Falcon Latest Well Intrevention With Glosory

FM WELL INTERVENTION
CERTIFICATION COURSE
S CHAPTER-1
PRINCIPLES AND PROCEDURES
Chapter 1 Principles & Procedures

TOPICS
Barrier Principles
ª
Well Integrity
ª
Valve Operation in Flowing Wells
ª
Pressure Control Methods
ª
Problems
ª
Pressure Control Management
ª
Page....1
Barriers
ª
Any devices, fluids or substance that prevent flow of wellbore fluid.
ª
Two Types of barrier used to prevent well flow are Mechanical and
Fluid.
ª
At least TWO independent, tested barriers to prevent undesired flows
of hydrocarbons from the well to surface.
ª
Artificial lift well needs to have same minimum barriers as natural
flow well.
ª
Barrier should be tested in the direction of flow of the well.
ª
Three main Categories of Barrier in term of their systematic operation:
Primary, secondary and tertiary barriers.
ª
During operations, there must always to have more than one barrier
[can combine two types of Barrier in same well].
ª
Two barriers are required between the well and the external
environment.
Page....2
Mechanical Barriers
ª
Cemented liner/casing
ª
Completion string
ª
Tubing hanger
ª
Xmas tree
ª
Cement plugs
ª
Mechanical plugs (many things)
ª
Mechanical barriers prevent well flow by closing off the flow path
ª
Can be installed by wireline, coiled tubing, snubbing, and freeze
(ice plug) method
[last way out when X/mas tree & BOP were removed or removing jammed equipments
from Tree/BOP]
ª
Wireline plug and pump through plug are installed by intervention
methods
ª
BOPs and Xmas tree valves are considered as closeable barriers
[Closeable - can be opened or closed by hand or remotely control]
Page....3
Mechanical Barriers
Fluid Barriers
Common Fluids used as a Barrier are;
Drilling Mud, Brine, inhibited Sea Water and Fresh water
ª
Correct specification (desired weight)
ª
Testing [monitoring when fluid is being weighted and pumped that
should be consistency]
ª
Observation [monitoring for a period that pumped fluid is
stabilizing or kill the well]
Classed as a primary barrier

[being as primary barrier when it balance the well pressure or a well is killed]
Page....4
Barriers Envelops
Contain well pressure
ª Production Casing
ª Production Tubing
ª Production Packer
ª Tubing hanger with check valve (if installed)
ª Xmas Trees
Prevent annulus flow

ª Production Casing
ª Production Packer
ª Completion Fluid
ª Tubing hanger/hanger spool
ª Casing spool outlet valves
Page....5
Barriers Envelops
Drawing beside, identify the
barrier elements (envelope)
Xmas free
that;
Tubing hanger with check valve
(Inside Tbg)
Tubing hanger well head (outside) Contain Well Pressure
Wellhead with annular
Production string
1.
DHSV
2.
3.
Casing 4.
well fluid 5.
Completion fluid
Production Packer
Prevent flow from Annulus
1.
Perforations 2.
3.
4.
5.
From the production well

schematic, identify the barrier
(envelop) that prevent Annulus
flow?
(pick up 5 answers)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page....6
Barriers Envelops
From the production well
schematic, identify the barrier
(envelop) that contain well
pressure?
(pick up 5 answers)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IWCF-Barrier Philosophy
Two primary Barriers
Between inside and
external Environment
First contain/maintain pressure or flow

[first line of the defense from an uncontrolled well flow]
= Primary Barrier
Page....7
Well was killed with Kill Fluid (fluid barrier)
First prevent flow of well = Primary Barrier
Page....8
Wireline Operation
First preventing flow of well
Primary Barrier = Stuffing Box
Pressure
Hydrostatic Pressure
The hydrostatic pressure of a column of fluid is determined on the basis

of that fluid density and vertical height of that fluid column.
API Unit
Pressure (psi) = 0.052 x Fluid Density (ppg) x TVD (ft) Formula-3
Pressure Gradient (psi/ft) = 0.052 x Fluid Density (ppg) Formula-1
Fluid Density (ppg) = Pressure (psi)

[0.052 x TVD (ft)]
Formula-2
Page....9
Pressure
Formation Pressure
When the well had been shut in, static well head pressure (SIWHP) was
stabilized. Formation Pressure can be determined as follows;-
API Unit Formula-4

Formation Pressure (psi) = Hydrostatic Pressure (psi) + SIWHP (psi)
When well was shut in fluids and gas in production string will separate out
due to gravitational forces thus hydrostatic pressure will be equal to sum of
hydrostatic pressure of fluids and gas columns in the production string.
Formation Pressure Determination

Formation Pressure
= HSP of Producing Fluid + SITHP
SITHP
SAMPLE: (Oil Well)
SITHP = 2,500 psl
Oil Density = 7.0. ppg
Depth of top Perforation = 9,500 Ft. (TVD)
FP = (0.052 x 7 x 9500) + 2500
= 5,958 psi
Page....10
Over Balance & Under Balance Pressure
Overbalance (psi)
= Bottom Hole Pressure - Formation Pressure
Over Balance Pressure is;

Mud Wt
20.4 ppg [0.052 x 10.4 x 10000] - 5200 = 208 psi
Static BHP=5,408 psi
Over Balancing Formation
Pressure by 208 psi
In opposite;
If Formation Pressure > Bottom Hole Pressure
10,000 ft TVD
Well is under balance
Pressure
Pressure
Basic Hydrostatic Pressure

Shut in Pressure Calculation
Page....11
Testing Barriers
Barriers should be tested for its integrity
There are two types of testing;
• Inflow test - reducing the pressure on the upper side of the barrier to detect
any leaks
• Pressure testing - increasing the pressure to a value higher than the lower
side of the barrier to detect any leaks
INFLOW TEST
Reduce Pressure at the upper side of

Barrier then observe for certain period
of time in order to detect for any leaks.
PRESSURE TEST
Increase Pressure at the upper side of

Barrier then observe for certain period
of time in order to detect for any leaks.
Page....12
Testing Barriers
The Testing Barrier will depend on which phase of the well life;
•Drilling
•Completion
•Production
•Well Intervention
SAMPLE OF TESTING BARRIERS OF VARIOUS
MECHANICAL & FLIUD BARRIERS
Cement Plug (P & A):

Pressure test to verify for
the future leakages
Cased hole well:

• Pressure test with mud or water
• Inflow test by displacing mud with
sea water (washing)
• Drilling
SAMPLE OF TESTING BARRIERS OF VARIOUS
• Completion
MECHANICAL & FLIUD BARRIERS
• Production
• Well Intervention
X/Mas Tree & Well Head:

• Pressure Test by pumping
• Inflow test of valves and
connections with well pressure
Deep Plug with Perforated Liner:
• Inflow test by reducing pressure at
top of plug
• Pressure test to verify its integrity
Page....13
Testing Barriers
• Drilling
• Completion SAMPLE OF TESTING BARRIERS OF VARIOUS
• Production MECHANICAL & FLIUD BARRIERS
Production Packer Production Packer with

without perforation: perforation:
Pressure test from Pressure test from Annulus
Underside
Tubing Hanger:
Inflow/pressure test by
pumping from annulus and
check for leakages
Casing:
Pressure test annulus
ª
Positive plug prevents the flow from either direction
ª
If it is not possible to perform inflow test for installed plug, then it should
be pressure tested from above (except the dead well can not perform
inflow test)
ª
Test of SSD above top packer after closingiDy pressure test the annulus
(Tubing open to the Perforations, alternatively set plug at tailpipe before
testing)
Page....14
Design Test Pressures
API's pressure classes are based on working pressures of 2M, 3M, 5M, 10M,
15M and 20M. Where M = 1,000 psi (test before deployment)
ª
2 times working pressure up to and including 5M equipment
ª
1.5 times working pressure for 10M and 15M equipment
ª
1.25 times working pressure for_20M equipment
ª
When equipment is being installed and during the operation phase, it is
leak tested to the given working pressure (test to maximum anticipate
working pressure that equipment withstands, i.e. BOP, plugs , e.t.c)
Valve Operation in Flowing Wells

ª
Before conducting well intervention, pressure (leak) test Xmas tree
valves
ª
Opening the valve under pressure can damage other equipment and
need to equalize pressure before opening
ª
Open the closed valve while having pressure on the father side may
cause damage to the valve and equipment downstream of the valve
(due to great differential pressure)
ª
DHSJ is the last valve to be closed during the emergency
shut-in
Page....15
Shutting in Well at Xmas Tree
ª
Valves can be damaged if they are closed on a tool string
ª
Use the upper master valve if there is nothing in the hole (shut in when
well kicks)
ª
Some Master valves can close and cut the wireline
ª
The lower master valve is not normally used
ª
Counting the turns while operating the valve
ª
After closing, a manual valve should be backed out a part of turn
Volume Calculation
String Pipe Capacity and Displacement
Page....16
Volume Calculation
Closed End String Displacement
Annular Capacity
Page....17
Volume Calculation
Capacity of Production Tubing
= ¶ x (ID)2 x L
4
Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) = (ID)2
1029.4
Capacity of Annulus
= ¶ x (IDcasing)2 - (ODtubinq)2x L
4
Annular Capacity (bbl/ft) = (IDcsq)2 - (ODtbq)2

1029.4
(where OD and ID in Inches, Capacity in bbl/ft)
IWCF-WELL INTERVENTION
Given Capacity in
bbl/ft. (API) l/m. (Metric)
Volume Calculation
API Unit Formula-7
Strokes to Displace (strokes)
Tubing = Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Pump output (bbl/stroke)
Annulus = Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Metric Unit
Capacity = l/m.
Pump output = l/stroke
Page....18
Volume Calculation
API Unit Formula-6
Time to Pump (minutes)
Tubing = Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Pump rate (bbl/min.)
Annulus = Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Pump rate (bbl/min.)
Metric Unit
Capacity = 1/m.
Pump rate = 1/min.
API unit
Sample:
Casing - 7", 32 lb/ft, 6.094" ID, set @ 11,436 ft. (MD/TVD)
Tubing- 2-7/8", 7.9 lb/ft, 2.265" ID -
End of Tubing - 11,300 ft. (MD/TVD)
Packer - set @ 11,290 ft. SSD - set @ 11,190 ft. (MD/TVD) -,
Pump output - 0.1044 bb/stk.
-Perforations - top 11,353 ft. bottom 11,393 ft. (MD/TVD)
1. Annulus capacity - Kfi.094)z - (2.875)'] + 1029.4 = 0.028 bbl/ft
2. Tubing capacity -X^^)2 + 1029.4 - 0.0050 bbl/ft
3. Casing capacity - ($.094)2 + 1029.4 - 0.0361 bbl/ft4.
4.Total Barrels in Annulus above Packer = 0.028 x 11.290 = 316.6 bbls
5. Total Barrels and Strokes to Reverse circulation through SSD

Barrels in Annulus - 0.028 x 11,190 = 313.35 bbls
Barrels in Tubing - 0.0050 x.11,190 - 55.95 bbls
Total barrels for reverse circulation - 313.35 + 55.95 - 369.3 bbls
Total strokes for reverse circulation » 369.3 * 0.1044 - 3537.4 stks
6. Total barrels to bullhead down the tubing to the top perforation

with 2 barrels over displacement and surface volume Is 2 barrels:-
Volume in tubing - 0.0050 x 11,300.- 56.50 bbls
Volume in casing below tubing - top Perf. - 0.0361 x 53 - 1.91 bbls
Total volume for bullheading - 56.50 + 1.91 + 2 + 2 = 62.4 bbls
Total strokes for bullheading - 62.4 + 0.1044 - 598 stks
Page....19
Key Practices for
Reverse Circulation & Bullheading
Reverse Circulation
ª Calculate volume both in Tubing and Annulus based on SSD
depth. When Completion Fluid (Brine) is fully filled in Tubing,
Some overbalance pressure required during reversely circulating
until kill fluid entering the Tubing via SSD, The tubing head
pressure is allowed to drop to zero.
Bullheading
ª Calculate tubing volume from surface down to the end of tubing
plus volume in casing below tubing until top and bottom
perforation if requested.
ª Total volume include tubing volume + volume below tubing plus
volume of surface lines and "upfront" kill fluid (acid/sea water)
which to be injected into the formation for minor fracturing
purposes if the formation is dense
Note: Formation pressure always calculated based on top of

perforation depth.
Kill Fluid
ª
Compatibility with formation and formation fluids (drilling fluid not need)
ª
Appropriate weight to kill well and avoid too much weight causing excessive over pressure
Kill Fluid Density = Formation Pressure

0.052 x TVD (ft)
Kill Fluid Density (ppg)
= Original Fluid Density (ppg) + SIWHP (psi)

0.052 x Top of Perofration in feet (TVD)
Page....20
Well Killing Methods
ª
Forward circulation (drilling preferred method)
ª
Reverse circulation
ª
Bull Heading (through tubing)
ª
Bleed-off/Lubrication (through tubing)
Reverse Circulation
Preferred method in planned well kill operations (kill faster)
Main advantages:
ª All wells can normally be killed
ª
Both tubing and annulus end up with comparable kill fluid
ª
Surface pressure is low
ª
Less danger of formation damage
ª
Lift solid more easily when in a large hole
Page....21
Bull Heading
ª
Used in emergency during a well intervention operation and it
becomes necessary to kill the well
ª
Failed DHSV
ª
Cannot establish circulation (in the wen that SSD win not open)
ª
Insufficient information to calculate a reverse Circulation kill (volume
& Weight)
ª
When speed (emergency) is important
ª
Can only be performed when perforation is opened
ª
Can plug formation with scales or solids from inside the completion
string
ª
Limit by working pressure rating of surface equipment
ª
Burst limit of completion
ª
Formation permeability
ª
Fracture of the formation
Page....22
Bleed off and Lubricating
ª
Can be performed when emergency and not possible to bullhead
ª
Repeatedly bleed off small well pressure and pump small
amount of fluid while maintaining BHP constant
ª
It is a killing method, which consume more time.
Pressure behavior while in Killing Operation
Page....23
Pressure behavior while in Killing Operation
Well Killing Methods
Killing Graphs
Page....24
Problems
ª
Free gas in the well
ª
Swab and surge pressure
ª
Thief zone
ª
String washout
ª
Blockages in the well
ª
Hydrates
Example of Problems
(Gas Cap) Thief zone)
ª
Shut in the well and pressure slowly build up due to gas cap
(Bullheading Gas) forming in well bore (stabilized fairly
quick)
ª
Thief zone can limit circulation back to Surface (depleted
more than other zones)
ª
Cleaning the sand and scale problem in well with thief zone
would need to use LCM to stop any losses into the thief zone
(especially in the long Perforation zones which few zone is a
Thief zone)
Page....25
Free Gas in the Well
ª
Bleeding off gas (Joule-Thomson)
(decrease in Temp, due to Freezing after across valve i.e. gas
pressure fall thus expands and losses energy) :Brittle fracture
in pipe (stainless steel), valves and e.t.c.
ª
Gas migration (gas migrate up to surface in connection with
uninhibited seawater if used as a displaced fluid in well, will
form hydrate)
ª
Bullheading gas (well shut-in with gas on top)
ª
Hydrates (gas + water = crystalline)
Hydrates
ª
Can damage well bore and intervention
equipment (due to crystalline compound of Hydrate)
ª
Can cause damage if they becomes free at high differential
pressure
ª
Can only form in the presence of free water
ª
Likely to form at high pressures than low pressure well (high
differential pressure potential)
ª
Likely to form downstream of chokes or at pressure relief
valves or emergency blow-down line
Page....26
Hydrates
ª
Can also be prevented or removed by injecting chemicals or
raising the temperature of equipment used
ª
Injecting methanol, glycol or brine can reduce formation of
hydrates (Inhibitors)
ª
Injecting distilled water cannot prevent the hydrates because
of containing free water
Surge & Swab Pressure

Surge = Piston power
Swab = Suction power
Surge and Swab are function of:-

ª The clearance of well wall and downhole equipments
ª Type of fluid (completion fluid has higher pressure)
ª Trip/run speed
ª Length of components with has a large diameter
ª Acceleration / retardation speed (high speed high
pressure)
Swab will be maximum when we trip out intervention

equipments close to the reservoir
Page....27
String Washout
ª
Snubbing String Washout
ª
Coiled tubing fracture at surface (especially at the goose
neck, related shut-in procedure, see CT section)
ª
Coiled tubing break in the well (kill the well first before
pulling out the coil)
ª
Blockage the well (sand, scale, mechanical. See methods to
remove the blocks; mechanical & chemical)
Management of Operations
Planning
ª
Start-up meeting
ª
System of communication
ª
Well program
ª
Emergency procedures
ª
Organization - well killing
Abnormal Operations
ª
See details in manual
Page....28
Conditions necessary for work to conduct safely:
ª
Using tested, inspected and well maintained equipment
ª
Hold pre-job safety meeting before start working
ª
Have crew properly trained in what to do when equipment
failed
ª
Organize meeting to discuss plan, get feed back, make
changes and get everyone to agree and understand
(Tool Box meeting)
ª
Document for responsibility of concerned party in
emergency case
ª
Intervention Equipment Operator to shut in the well when
pressure control problem arise during well intervention
operations
Page....29
Abnormal conditions occurred during well intervention operation
which are not fully understood:
The well must be;
1. Shut in and secured then need to
2. Analyze the problem and seek out solutions, state the problems
on paper, gives possible causes, invite offshore team to
comment, state action to be taken, then ask onshore support
team to comment on action and get permission.
Note:
In some oil companies, not only well intervention operator who is
in charge to Shut in well. The person designated in the Joint
Operations Manual can also the shut in well in Emergency
situation.
Document for responsibility of concerned party in emergency

case:-
Due to the Well Intervention Operations are carried out by many

involved parties
The Joint Operations Manual must be clearly stated for the Well
operations Intervention Team in order to effectively control of a
well control incident and should be available on site for immediate
actions in emergency case.
ª
Categories of personnel responsible for well Intervention
Emergency duties (i.e. who will shut in well)
ª
Make the Flow Charts (discuss who is a 24 hrs. on duty)
ª
Regular on-site exercises and Tool Box meeting
Page....30
S CHAPTER-2
COMPLETION EQUIPMENTS
Chapter 2 Completion Equipments

ª
Equipment placed in the well after the
drilling phase to enable the well to be
brought into use as a producer or
injector
ª
Consist of completion string with
individual components and Xmas
tree at the top of the well
Page....31
Completion Equipments
ª
Equipment placed in the well after the
brought into use as a producer or
injector
ª
Consist of completion string with
individual components and Xmas
tree at the top of the well
Page....32
Monobore Completion
ª
Having approximately the same
internal diameter throughout the well
ª
Eliminating restriction on which
cable tools and coiled tubing were
liable to catch
ª
Virtually free of Tubing Nipple
profiles
Production Packers
ª
FUNCTION: Isolate annulus from casing below the packer and
the tubing bore
ª
Act as a barrier and must be no leakages of hydrocarbon/pressure
pass the packer
ª
When the production packer is set, it is normally tested both from
above and below
ª
Normally be set above and close to the top perforation
ª
TYPES: Permanent and Retrievable type
(presently have third type:Permanent/ Retrievable )
Page....33
Permanent Packers
ª
Most common type
ª
Can be retrieved only by milling it out
ª
Can be run as part of the completion
string or as part of the tail pipe
ª
Can be set hydraulically, mechanical
method or using explosive
ª
Having double set of slips working in
different directions
Retrievable Packers
ª
Can be run as part of the completion
string
ª
Can only be removed together with
the production string
ª
Having a set of slips, in which the
packer element or sealing element is
located either under or over the slips
Note: The 3rd type Packer;
Permanent/Retrievable is typically same
characteristics as Permanent Packer but it
can released/recovered from the well
without milling. Generally, it has a small ID
to accommodate some releasing
mechanisms Page....34
Circulation Equipments
Sample of Circulating Equipments
- Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)

- Sliding Side Door/Sleeves (SSD)
- Nipples with port(s)/sleeves
ª
FUNCTION: Establish temporary communication between
tubing and annulus by (for example) open SSD or install
circulation valve in SPM
ª
Pressure should be equalized before opening the circulation
device
ª
Should be checked for completely in open position when used to
kill a well Most common type
Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)

ª
Used either for gas-lift purposes,
chemical injection, or for the
temporary communication
between the annulus and the
Completion String (circulating valve
is installed)
ª
A "dummy" valve is installed in
SPM to block flow when it is not in
use (positive closure)
ª
Check valve in the gas lift valve
prevents well fluid from entering
the annulus (back flow)
Page....35
Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)
SPMs are installed in the completion string to
act as receptacles for the following range of
devices;
ª
Gas Lift Valves
ª
Dummy Valves
ª
Chemical Injection Valve
ª
Circulation Valves
ª
Differential Dump Kill Valves
ª
Equalizing Valves
Sliding Side Door/ Sleeves (SSD)

ª
Used to open communication between the tubing
bore and the casing annulus (discuss if SSD could
not be opened, how to solve this problem in order to
establish the circulation possible?)
ª
It is installed either across the reservoir zones for
production or immediately above the top
production packer for well circulation
ª
Can also be used for gas-lift purpose (utilize the
orifice valve)
ª
Consist of a movable inner sleeve with slit ports and
a fixed outer part
Page....36
Nipple Profiles (Anchoring)
ª
Main purpose is to install flow control equipment
down-hole, either temporarily or for long periods
of time
ª
Installed as part of completion string
ª
Consist of a locating profile, a No GO shoulder
(non selective type) and a sealing surface
ª
The lock mandrels in landing Nipple locks into the
Tubing Nipple by mandrel locking dogs match to
the Nipple recess or profiles
ª
Elastomeric packings of flow control device sealed
in a polished nipple bore)
Nipple Profiles
ª
Lock mandrel is locked into the tubing nipple
by means of locking dogs matched in suitable
milled profile in the nipple recess
ª
No go shoulder helps locate lock mandrels to
their matching nipples and also prevents the
equipment being installed from going any
further down the well
NO-GO Shoulder Functions:-

Primary - Locate the Lock Mandrel
Secondary - Prevent tools falling down
Page....37
Nipple Profiles
NO GO none-selective type is
used for locating purpose
(Primary Function)
It is designed to have a smaller

shoulder diameter and the
Nipple diameter than the OD of
Locking devices (Secondary
Function)
Most common, NO GO Nipple

as the last Nipple in the Tailpipe
is a "Bottom NO GO" (XN)
Nipple with Port / Sleeve

ª
A nipple has ports between the inside and the outside
ª
When it not to be used, a sleeve with packers in the nipple profile is
installed
ª
When used in a well kill, the circulation devices should be check for
fully open and pressure to be equalized before opening
ª
Seldom utilized due to SSD has a better beneficial features
Page....38
Down Hole Safety Valves
ª
Main purpose is to close in the well in
emergency
ª
They are "fall-safe closed" type
(system failed, valve closed)
ª
When it closed, it can prevent flow
from below
ª
Closure mechanism is flapper or ball
valves
ª
TYPES:
Tubing retrievable and Wireline

retrievable types
ª
Setting depth should be such that a
topside collision or explosion would
not damage the valve itself or that
hydrates will not interfere with valve
operation
ª
DHSVs can be surface control or sub-
surface control
ª
Sub-surface control of DHSVs are
closed by pressure either differential
pressure or ambient pressure valves
Page....39
Down Hole Safety Valves
The SCSSV type is controlled by hydraulic
pressure supplied from a surface control
system which is ideally suited to manual or
automatic operation or ESD systems
The SSCSV type is a normally OPEN

valve that utilizes a pressure
differential to provide a method of
valve closure. The spring holds the
valve off-seat until the well flow
reaches pre-determined rate.
The 2nd control by Ambient pressure of
Nitrogen-calibrated Dome (chamber)
pressure
Tubing Retrievable DHSVs

ª
Installed as an integral part of the
completion string (in nipple profile
with open port to surface control line)
ª
May also have a nipple profile for a
wireline retrievable DHSV as a back-
up in case problems should occur by
lock the valve open and install a
wireline inserted valve
ª
Has a large internal diameter
Page....40
Wireline Retrievable DHSVs
ª
Primary advantage is that it
can be retrieved and replaced
with a new valve
ª
Often create a restriction in a well
ª
Installed in the nipple profile in the
completion string
ª
Run in hole in the open position with
a prong on the lock mandrel running
tool
ª
It makes hydraulic communication
with the control line between two
packing seal stacks once the lock
mandrel is set
ª
If the DHSV is to be out of the well
for any length of time, a protective
sleeve should be installed
(especially to protect any damage to
the valve when operated a heavy
well intervention operation)
Page....41
Annulus Safety Valves
ª
Main purpose is to prevent an uncontrolled reverse backflow of gas
from the annulus in gas-lift wells on fixed installation
ª
They are "fail-safe closed" type either flapper or plug valves
Valve prevents back flow from Annulus to Surface when Gas

compressor failure
Other Mechanical Equipment in the

Completion String
ª
Expansion joint
(Temperature expansion
or Pressure change in
short string Dual
completion)
ª
Flow coupling
ª
Blast joint
ª
Wireline entry guide
ª
Storm choke
ª
Plugs
Page....42
Wellhead
ª
Anchoring/connections for each casing
ª
Pressure isolation of individual casings
ª
Connections for completion string
ª
Connections for Xmas tree
ª
Isolation of production annulus
ª
Access to annulus for pressure
monitoring and/or pumping
Typical Subsea Tree Configuration
Page....43
Tubing Hanger
ª
Transfer the weight of the
completion string to the wellhead
ª
Seal the top of the production
annulus
ª
Allow an internal plug to be
installed
ª
Provide a seal around hydraulic
or electrical control lines through
the tubing hanger
(hydraulic lines, ESP pump)
Issues for discussion
Completion Equipment
DHSV
ª Possibility of pulling DHSV
before Intervention
ª
Use of Wear Sleeves or Lock out
Device
Well Head & X/mas Tree
ª
Hanger nipple sealing
mechanisms
ª
Control line pressure versus
tubing pressure
Page....44
Plugs in Tubing Hanger
ª
Tubing hanger plug (THP)
ª
Two-way check valve (TWCV)
- provide a seal in both direction as
long as there is a high differential
pressure across the plug, at the
same time permit slow pumping
through the plug from above
ª
Back pressure valve (BPV)
- contains pressure from below, but
allows pumping through the plug
from above
Xmas Trees
ª
Safety equipment placed on top of
the wellhead
ª
Control the flow of hydrocarbons
from the well
ª
Allow access to the well during the
operation phases
ª
Regarded as a safety barrier
ª
Split gate or Slab gate types
Page....45
Valves on the Xmas Tree
ª
Manual operated master valve
ª
Hydraulic operated master valve
ª
Manual operated wing valve
ª
Hydraulic operated wing valve
ª
Manual operated swab valve
ª
Manual operated kill valve
ª
Some X/mas Tree master
valves can be used to cut slick
line
ª
Count number of turns when
close and back out part of a turn
after closing
ª
Seldom use lower master valve
Page....46
Valves on the Xmas Tree
Page....47
S CHAPTER-3
WIRELINE EQUIPMENTS
Chapter 3 Wireline - Equipments

Topics
ª
Types of wireline
ª
Surface pressure control equipments
ª
Positioning of wireline BOP
ª
Grease control head (GIH)
ª
Ball check valve
ª
Manual & Hydraulic Slickline BOP
ª
Braided line BOP
Page....48
Slick Line Rig Up
Wireline-Surface Equipment
Page....49
Wireline-Equpments
Three types of wirline;
1. Slick Line
2. Braided line
3. Electrical (conductive) line)
Wireline-Surface Equipments
Page....50
Wireline-Surface Equipments
Identifying Barriers
Stuffing Box = Primary
Wireline BOP = Secondary
Master Valve = Tertiary

(wire cutter type)
Wireline-Equipments
Wireline Pressure Controlled
Equipments (PCE)
ª
Stuffing Box
ª
GIH
ª
Lubricator
ª
BOP
PRESSURE TESTING;
Pressure test of Riser and Lubricator must be

performed with maximum shut in tubing head
pressure.
Pressure rating of equipments should be equal

or greater than the maximum operation
pressure.
Page....51
Wireline-Stuffing Box
ª
Allow wireline to enter the well under
pressure and also provides a seal
should wireline break and be blown
out of packing.
ª
The packing nut (or piston) pushing
down on the upper busing (or gland)
that makes the seal around the wire
ª
If the wireline breaks in the well, the
loss of weight on the wire at surface
allows well pressure to eject the wire
from the well.
ª
Well pressure forces up the internal
BOP or Plunger to seal against the
lower gland.
ª
The packing nut (or piston) pushing
down on the upper busing (or gland)
that makes the seal around the wire
ª
If the wireline breaks in the well, the
loss of weight on the wire at surface
allows well pressure to eject the wire
from the well.
ª
Well pressure forces up the internal
BOP or Plunger to seal against the
lower gland.
Page....52
Wireline-Stuffing Box
1. Sheave
2. Piston
3. Packing nut Cylinder
4. Hydraulic Connection
5. Piston Spring
6. Upper Gland
7. Packing
8. Lower Gland
9. Body
10. Plunger
11. Quick Union Collar
12. Bottom Sub
Hydraulic packing nut
ª
Hydraulic Packing Nut assembly is designed for a
standard wireline Stuffing Box to allow remote
adjustment of the packing nut
ª
It is safe and convenient
ª
The regulating of the packing nut is made from the
ground by hydraulic hand pump
Hydraulic packing nut
ªHydraulic Packing Nut assembly is designed for

a standard wireline Stuffing Box to allow
remote adjustment of the packing nut.
ªIt is safe and convenient
ªThe regulating of the packing nut is made from

the ground by hydraulic hand pump
Page....53
WL-Stuffing Box Problem Cases
1. While rigging up Slick line pressure control
equipment (PCE), It is observed that the
stuffing box gland nut is screwed fully home.
What action you should take on this
problem?
2. When wireline tool stuck in the Xmas tree

and wireline string across the BOP. The wire
is pulled out of Rope Socket. What is the
component which prevent the well from
flowing out the stuffing box?
3. How the Slick line enter the well and seal

under pressure on the Stuffing box?
Wireline-Lubricator
Lubricator is, in effect, a pressure vessel situated
above the BOP/Xmas tree, subject to the wellhead
shut-in pressure and also the test pressure.
It should be regularly inspected and Pressure tested in

accordance with Statutory Regulations (some
companies also requires NDT test certificates)
Must provide stainless steel banded for Max. rated

working pressure, test pressure, date and rating of last
hydrostatic test
The following factors govern the selection of

Lubricator:-
:Shut-in wellhead pressure
:Wireiine tool diameter
:Length of wireline tools
: H2S matters
Page....54
WL-Lower Lubricator Section
ª
The lowermost
Lubricator section
normally has one or more
bleed off valve port (or
Needle valve port)
ª
Pressure gauge can be
connected to this valve
port to monitor pressure
in the Lubricator.
ª
The Lubricator manifold
can be installed after this
pressure gauge using T-
joint for the pressure test
Lubricator.
WL-Quick Unions & Well head Adapter

Well head Adapters are X/over subs from the
bottom connection of the wireline BOP or Riser to
the Xmas Tree.
There are 3 common types of Well head Adapter;

ª Quick Union to Quick Union
ª API Flange to Quick Union
ª ACMEThread to Quick Union
Two (2) Types of API Flange;

ª API "6B" Flange (low pressure) An advantage of setting the
ªAPI "6BX" Flange (high pressure) wireline BOP on top of the Xmas
Tree is less potential paths
Flange Expression: between barriers and maximum
7-1/16", 10,000 psi Flange, means this flange has lubricator length above the BOP
a 10,000 psi working pressure has a 7-1/16"
(through bore) ID
Page....55
WL-Lubricator & Quick Unions
Main Issues for Lubricator & Quick Unions;
When rigging up slick line on the well, a damage
lubricator needle valve or gauge connection may
cause a leak from the lubricator and also the damage
of quick union "0" ring or seal surface. So before an
operation, we should check the "0" ring condition for
any possible leaks.
Pressure testing of the wireline rig up: the pressure

must be applied slowly to avoid hitting the underside
of the stuffing box, especially with the rope socket.
The minimum length of the Lubricator must be

longer than the maximum length of the tool string to
be run or pulled.
Main Issues for Lubricator & Quick Unions

(continue);
Prior to exposing the Lubricator and Riser to the well
pressure, the following functions must be tested and
checked to ensure safety operation;
ª
Check the pressure Rating is equal to or
greater than the maximum anticipated
operating pressure
ª
Complete the pressure Test of Lubricator and
Riser must be at least the maximum of the shut
in tubing head pressure
ª
Check "0" and seal face are in good condition
Page....56
WL-Tool Catcher & Tool Trap
It is normally
installed between
wireline BOP and
lower Lubricator
section
It is normally
installed
between
Stuffing box
and Lubricator
assembly. It
engages Rope
Socket fish
neck to prevent
falling down.
Wireline-Injection Sub
The Injection Sub should be installed immediately
below the Stuffing box in the surface rig-up
The function is to introduce fluids (chemical) into the
Lubricator during wireline operations to counteract one
or more of the following:-
ª
Corrosive Environments (i.e. H2S)
ª
Hydrate formation (glycol/methanol Injection)
ª
Dry gas conditions
A check (ball) valve is installed

in the body of the injection sub as
part of the injection line.
This check valve is to contain

well pressure in the event of hose
failure
Page....57
WL-Grease Injection Head (GIH)
Grease Injection Head (GIH) has the
same functions as a Stuffing box when
Braided cable is being utilized.
The GIH is designed to effectively seal

off Stranded wireline for fishing and
logging operations.
Grease is pumped in through the lower

inlet nipple/injection port and up through
wireline and the seal Tube.
Sufficient Grease must be available for

the complete operation
Wireline-Safety Check Union

Safety Check Union
(ball check valve)
It is included in Braided/stranded wireline

Lubricator hook-up, locating just below
the GIH
Function:
Retain Pressure in event that the
wire breaks and is blown out of
the GIH.
Before installation, Ball valve

should be checked, if any
damage is found the ball and its
brass seat should be replaced
Page....58
Wireline-BOPs
Main purposes of BOPs : To
operate safely and to contain
well pressure and enable to
repair of any connection above
the BOPs that might start to
leak including stuffing box
packing elements.
Advantage of setting a
wireline BOP directly on top
of Xmas tree
: Less potential paths between
barriers and maximize
lubricator length above
wireline BOP
Slick Line Rig-up Braided Line Rig-up
Page....59
Wireline-BOPs
Page....60
Wireline-BOPs
Function of Equalized
valve assembly on
wireline BOP : To allow
the same pressure
above and below the
closed wireline BOP
WL-Ram Type Preventers/Valves
Page....61
Braided line needs more pressure control equipments
An additional wireline BOP should be installed for fishing

operations
Recommend the Dual BOP or Two single BOP to be

installed and equipped with the appropriate size of braided
line Rams (with lower rams inverted)
The correct Braided line Ram configuration (from top to

bottom:
ª Braided Normal (Secondary Barrier)
ª Braided Inverted (Secondary Barrier)
ª Shear Seal (Tertiary Barrier)
BOP ram inner seals for slick line are usually completely
different from those the braided line (i.e. 0.108" siickline
and 3/16" braided line will have different seal)
Typical Braided Line Rig Up
WIRELINE
PRESSURE CONTROL
EQUIPMENT RIG-UP
Page....62
The Shear/Seal BOP is installed between Xmas
ª
tree and the wireline BOP
The last BOP on stack normally provide the

ª
shear/seal BOP which suitable for both slickline
and braided cable if both lines are in operation.
It is the Tertiary Barrier

ª
Hydraulic activated (high power) and can be

ª
operated manually
It cut the wire at surface to avoid having utilize

ª
the Xmas tree (i.e. cutting wire on Xmas tree
may damage the Master valves)
Wireline-Pressure Testing
In General, pressure testing of Equipments which connected to the
Production and Completion classified by operational phases;
Design Pressure Testing or Full Workshop Testing

This test is to verify material strength of the equipments before use and the
API recommendation testing pressure is described on Chapter-1 (Principles
& Procedures)
Pressure Testing on Operation phase after equipment Rig-up

Function test and Pressure (leak) test will be performed after rigging up the
assembly.
ª Pressure test for Riser and Lubricator = Maximum SITHP (+ safety
margin)
ª Check for PCE rating pressure must equal to or greater than the
maximum (anticipated) operating pressure. Test pressure after rig-up
should be at least equal to Max. anticipated operating pressure.
Page....63
Barriers System for Slick line Operation
PRIMARY
ª Stuffing Box and Lubricator system
ª Check valve if wireline breaks and is ejected from Lubricator
ª Xmas tree valves during installing into or removing from, Lubricator
SECONDARY
ª Wireline Rams or Wireline valves which can close and seal around the
wire
ª Upper master valve if wire is broken and ejected out the well
ª SCSSV if wire is above it (Emergency)
TERTIARY
ª Wireline cutter rams/BOP
ª Wire cuter type-Upper Master valve if absolutely necessary
ª Barriers System for Braided line Operation
Barriers System for Braided line Operation

PRIMARY
ª Grease seal and Lubricator system
ª Check valve if wireline breaks and is ejected from Lubricator Xmas
tree valves during installing into or removing from, Riser
SECONDARY
ª Dual Braided line BOPs which can close and seal around the wire
ª Upper master valve if wire is broken and ejected out the well
ª SCSSV if wire is above it (Emergency)
TERTIARY
ª Wireline cutter rams/BOP
ª Shear/Seal BOP
Page....64
WL-Emergency Situations and Shut in
Procedures
Different Oil Companies have different approach towards emergency
situations and shut in procedures. But in principle, we must secure the well in
a very safe and sound situation before well site is to be left.
In real emergency situation, the following procedures to be carried out

(Wireline Operator duty);
If tool string is in the Lubricator
1. Close Swab valve on X/mas Tree

2. Shut down wireline power pack
3. Bleed off pressure above Swab valve and in Lubricator to zero
4. Secure wirline with wireline clamp
5. Check, Secure and Confirm all areas are safe
6. Report to installation supervisor for further actions with regard to
company regulations
If tool string is suspended in the Well
1. Shut down wireline power pack if it is

not generate master power to the BOP
control system
2. Close wireline BOP
3. Bleed off pressure above BOP to zero
4. Secure wireline with wireline clamp
5. Check, Secure and Confirm all areas
are safe
6. Report to installation supervisor for
further actions with regard to company
regulations
Page....65
Wireline-Rig Up Problems Cases
1. The situation when
Packing Elements in the
Stuffing box to be checked
and changed,
Which pressure control

equipment to be used or
operated?
Answer_______________
2. During the Slick line operation, the

leak is observed between the top two
Lubricator sections
Which of the second Barrier that must be closed to

make safe and allow the leak to be fixed/repaired?
Answer_________________
3. From Diagram, what changes can be

made (only) to the BOP in order to run
Braided line safely?
Answer_________________
Page....66
S CHAPTER-4
Coiled Tubing Equipments
Chapter 4 Coiled Tubing Equipments

ª
CT Surface Equipment Rig-up
ª
Pressurized development system
ª
CT Strippers
ª
Operating principles of CT BOPs
ª
Use of check valves
ª
CT Equipment Pressure Testing
ª
CT with Motor Assembly
Page....67
Coiled Tubing-Equipments
Coiled Tubing Recognized as;
ª Portable
ª Compact
ª Efficient unit (breaking/connecting, going in/out hole)
Coiled Tubing can perform;
Sand and Solid washing

ª
Paraffin and Asphaltene clean outs
ª
Unloading wells and initiating production
ª
Formation Stimulation (Acidizing)
ª
Cementing
ª
Sand consolidation Thru-Tubing milling
ª
Drilling (with downhole Motor)
ª
Page....68
Coiled Tubing-Equipments
Coiled Tubing-Surface Equipments

CT is a narrow thin-walled tube into a pressurized well by means of a
mechanical driven belt (Injector/Extractor)
Impossible to rotate CT string,

ª
CT can clean out (i.e. scales) and the well to be kept live at all time
ª
The retum flow from the well go to adjustable choke located at the fluid
ª
exit coiled tubing/completion Annulus
When clean out and pump rate was increase, annular pressure loss,
ª
pump pressure and dynamic bottom hole pressure will increase
If Coiled Tubing is utilized for reverse circulation (which is not
ª
common operation), the advantage of doing this with CT is that the flow
can lift solids in tubing more easily when in large hole. Generally, The
reverse circulation can not be done with normal check valves unless
dropping the ball to enable valve to open
Page....69
The return
flow from the
well go to
adjustable
choke
located at
the fluid exit
coiled
tubing/
completion
Annulus
Coiled Tubing-Equipment Rig up
Page....70
CT-External Pipe Pressure Control
PRIMARY
ª
Stripper
ª
Annular BOPs
SECONDARY
ª
Coiled Tubing BOPs (Safety Rams)
TERTIARY
ª
Shear/Seal (Safety Head)
Between tubing injector and BOPs, a hydraulic connector ( hydraulic quick

latch) is installed for making possible the BHA in drilling operation or else.
Deployment system
The systemo accommodate longer BHA to be run into well. This deployment
system is normally fitted with Annular BOP on the top ( normally installed
between BOPs and Safety head)
Page....71
Developing System for Coiled Tubing
DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM
FOR COILED TUBING
1. Use W/L system, run the

BHA inside the Lubricator
2. With SBR closed, install
Lubricator onto the BOP
stack, equalize pressure
3. Open SBR and run BHA with
W/L into well and close
pipe/slip rams at Deployment
Bar
4. Bleed off and remove
Lubricator

In high pressure well, flange connectors are normally utilized, There are two
types of flanges;
1. API 6B Flange (max. 5,000 psi rate working)

2. API 6BX Flange (higher pressure up to 20,000 psi)
Question:
What would be the effect of fitting 7-1/16" x 5,000 psi flange to a BOP rated
working rated pressure of 10,000 psi?
Answer : ______________________________________
Page....72
Coiled Tubing-Strippers
Stripper or Stuffing Box (for CT)
ª Stripper is located immediately below the injector head
ª Most deployed with Dual Strippers
ª It is a Primary barrier
There are three common types:-
1. Convention Stripper Assembly (2)
2. Side Door Stripper Assembly (3)
3. Radial Stripper Assembly (1)
ªWhen Strippers generally energized, Hydraulically

Operated by piston press the rubber element (via Upper
bushing) against the CT downward (except the
Conventional type)
ªFor the Conventional Strippers, the hydraulic applied to the

bottom and push lower bushing compress energizer
upward. The well pressure, when increase, also helps to
keep seal
The conventional stripper, bushing & packing elements

replaced by inserting it through the top.
When CT inside conventional stripper, only upper stripper

packing element (not energizer) in a single configuration can
be replaced while system is in operation.
For Dual configuration of each assembly, packing insert &

stripper rubbers cannot be replaced once CT has passed
through the assembly
For Radial and Side Door strippers, packing elements can be

replaced via an access window in the stack
Page....73
Page....74
SIDE DOOR STRIPPER AND STRIPPER ELASTO METER ELEMENTS
Material for Stripper
ª
Urethane
ª
Nitrile (usually for Oil base mud)
ª
Viton
ª
EDPM
(resistant to steam and good for geothermal well)
Page....75
Advantage and Disadvantage of each Stripper
Conventional
Great distance from gripping chains (Buckling)
Side Door
Mounted closer to the injector head (less buckling)
Radial
Similar to pipe ram, it is lower height and less space from injector head
Coiled Tubing-BOPs
BOP systems when first used, are subjected to the manufacturing test
ª
(new body test) with 150% of rate working pressure.
Ram type BOPs are located below the Strippers. It may consist of
ª
Double, Triple or Quadruple (Quad) BOPs
It is Secondary Barrier with regard to Barrier develop

ª
Ram Preventer are designed to hold pressure from Below

ª
Ram Preventer assembly is fitted with equalizing valves in order to

ª
allow the pressure to be equalized across a closed ram before it is
opened
Ram Preventer is also fitted with a Kill port

ª
Page....76
Coiled Tubing-BOPs
Page....77
Coiled Tubing-BOPs
Ram Type Preventers - QUAD RAM
To Cut the Coiled Tubing

The procedures to operate Rams;
1. Close slip ram

2. Close pipe ram
3. Close shear ram (cut CT)
4. Pull CT above the blind ram
5. Close blind ram
Page....78
Coiled Tubing-BOPs
RAM Designed Functions;
Blind Ram = Designed to close and seal
an open hole
Shear Ram =Designed to shear or cut

pipe in the hole
Shear/Seal Ram = Designed both to cut the

pipe and then seal the well
Slip Ram = Have a Slip insert for

sealing element but not sealing pressure.
Primarily used to hang the string and to
prevent it from rotating (designed to grip only
one direction)
Pipe Ram = Also called Safety ram to

closed off pressure when need to change out
stripper
Shear/Seal BOP (also called safety head) located just above the
ª
tree/well head
The purpose of Shear/Seal BOP is provide additional shear capacity on

ª
the BOP stack
If tubing in the hole, Shear/Seal BOP will be a Tertiary barrier (if no CT

ª
in hole,this Safety head is not recommended to close the well, use
another tertiary barrier, API)
Page....79
Coiled Tubing-Ram Assembly
Page....80
Coiled Tubing-Annular Preventer
ª
In case we need to close the well
around various sizes/dimension
(OD/shape) of pipe and/or BHA.
We need the Annular BOP to be
performed this operation
ª
Annular is an extra safety system for
Stripper
ª
It normally installed above the
Shear/Seal BOP
ª
Precaution when stripping through
Annular BOP we need to monitor
Annular operating pressure and
weight indicator, also the consult
fishing diagram of stripping tool
strings (Surge bottles installed near
the Annular)
ª
Brief on Accumulator/Nitrogen
precharge
CT-BOP Control System
Page....81
Accumulator Requirements (API):
Volumetric Capacity
As a minimum requirement, all blowout preventer closing units should be equipped
with accumulator bottles with sufficient volumetric capacity to provide the usable fluid
volume (with pumps inoperative) to close and open:
One Annular preventer and all Ram-type preventers in the stack plus the
remaining pressure of 200 psi (or more) above minimum pre-charge
pressure
(Note: the capacity of Shear Ram may be varied upon manufacturing design and size of
pipe)
Usable fluid volume is defined as the volume of fluid recoverable from an accumulator
between the accumulator operating pressure and 200 psi above the precharge pressure.
The accumulator operating pressure is the pressure to which accumulators are charged
with hydraulic fluid.
Accumulators:
Definitions
Usable fluid: Usable fluid volume is defined as the volume of fluid recoverable from an
accumulator between the accumulator operating pressure and 200 psi above the pre-
charge pressure.
Descriptions
Pre-charge pressure: Pre-charge pressure is defined as the pressure of nitrogen in the
accumulator, 1000 Psi.
Accumulator operating pressure: The accumulator operating pressure is

the pressure to which accumulators are charged with hydraulic fluid, 3000 Psi.
Minimum accumulator operating pressure: The minimum accumulator operating

pressure is 200 Psi above the pre-charge pressure, 1200 Psi. (final accumulator pressure
or closing unit pressure)
Page....82
Usable Fluid Volume
PlxVl = P2XV2 = P3XV3

1000x10 = 3000xV2 = 1200xV3
From:-
1000 x 10 = 3000 xV2
V2 = (1000 x 10)/3000
= 3.33 gallons
From:-
1000x10 = 1200 xV3
V3 = (1000 x 10)/1200
= 8.33 gallons
Thus:-
Usable Fluid = V3-V2 = 8.33-3.33
= 5 gallons
Page....83
Ore Charge Ore Charge
Min. Presuure Max. Presuure X Bottle Capacity = Usable fluid/bottle
SAMPLE:
Calculate the usable fluid per bottle of the BOP control system as follows:-
Pre-charge Pressure = 1,000 psi
Maximum Operating Pressure = 3,000 psi
Minimum Pressure = 1,200 psi
Bottle Capacity = 15 gallons
Answer : Usable Fluid = _______ gallons
Page....84
CT-Bop Control System
Company policy is to provide sufficient volume to...
close, open and close again all rams and annular using the
information below, calculate required volume.
Item Open Vol. Close Vol.

Annular BOP 27 29
Ram type BOP 13 15
Required Volume ?
Answer:________________Gallons
Following a previous accumulator specification, How

many Accumulator Bottles should be provided on well site
according to this sufficient volume?
Answer: ________________

Annular BOP
Open Position Closing action begins Closing Position

Seal around CT
Sealing assistance is gained by well pressure after initial seal off
Page....85
Page....86
ANNULAR PREVENTER
ANNULAR PREVENTER
Shaffer Bolted Cover Spherical BOP

Page....87
ANNULAR PREVENTER
Coiled Tubing- Check Valave

ª
Installed at the end of CT
ª
Purposes is to control or to maintain
pressure when CT failed at surface.
ª
Reverse circulation is not possible
ª
Most frequently used are flapper type
valve-Dual configuration
ª
Pumping balls and plugs down will
enable flaper valve to be opened and
can operate special equipment in the
well ( i.e. for BHA or reverse
circulation.
ª
Once the ball has been dropped to
open the check valve, there will no
mechanical Barrier at bottom of the
CT, especially while pulling CT out.
Page....88
CT-Internal Pipe Pressure Control
CT & SN with Motor Assembly
Page....89
Coiled Tubing-Adjustable Choke
The return flow of the CT from the well go to choke
(mainly adjustable) located at the fluid exist coiled
tubing/completion annulus.
Before Choke, there are two choke line valves

which outside one is hydraulically operated and
another valve is manually operated (inside valve)
QUESTION:
From Figure, match the inlet and outlet connection
as follows;
Inlet _______
Outlet _______
CT-Genral Rig Up Procedures

When rigging up CT on a well, the equipments must
be checked before performing a pressure testing;
ª
All connections, joints BHA connection if present
ª
Check damaged Quick union "O" ring or seal
surface if present that may cause a leak at that
joint
ª
Check damaged Ring Groove if present that may
cause a leak on the flange connection
ª
When CT is being run, make sure CT does not
crushed into fold or buckled
ª
Before X/mas tree is opened, pressure
equalizing must be done.
ª
Normal practice is to fill in the CT with fluid when
running CT into well in order to prevent CT to
collapse
ª
Kill fluid, completion fluid, pump and fluid tank
must be provided on site.
Page....90
Coiled Tubing-Pressure Testing
ª
Most Coiled Tubing BOPs and Strippers
must be tested at maintenance facility
before shipping to well site
ª
The on site testing include Function test
and Low (200-300 psi) then High pressure
test
ª
The High pressure test is test up to
maximum anticipated surface pressure,
and minimum Burst pressure of tubing if
CT to run in production tubing
ª
The specific BOP testing vary with type
and number of components that are used
ª
Common practice to test Blind ram and
Safety head by pumping through Kill
wing
ª
Common practice to test the strippers and
pipe ram by pumping through Coiled
tubing
Coiled Tubing-Common Problems

Hole in coiled tubing
ª
Coiled Tubing parted at the Goose neck

ª
Coiled Tubing parted in the well

ª
Coiled Tubing stuck

ª
BPV failure
ª
Runaway coiled tubing

ª
Page....91
Coiled Tubing-Common Problem
PROBLEM PROBLEM
HOLES IN TUBING:- TUBING PARTED:-
If under pressure well and SOLUTION
hazardous fluids are in use ª Pull tubing out of the well until
SOLUTION above Blind Ram
ª Pull tubing until hole is ª Close Blind Ram
between Stripper and Pipe ª Kill the Well
Ram ª Once the well is dead, fish the
ª Close Slip Ram and Pipe Ram tubing
ª Kill the Well ª If tubing splits on surface,
ª Once the well is dead, pull out close the Slip and Pipe Ram
of well and repair/replace the ª Close Shear Ram, pull out
tubing remain tubing then close
Blind Ram
PROBLEM PROBLEM
TUBING STUCK:- FA I L U R E O F C H E C K
VALVE :-
SOLUTION
ª
Tubing stuck in the well, the circulation SOLUTION
still be carried out, so try to circulate and
spot with lubricants ª Kill the well
ª
Pumping heavy fluid to increase the ª Once the well is dead, pull out
pipe's Buoyancy the tubing
ª
Try to work pipe free and make sure the
over pull will not exceed tubing tensile ª Repair or replace the Check
strength Valves
ª
Cut the tubing at free point?? above the
stuck point may be considered at the last
resources if well under pressure (Kill the
well first before cut the tubing)
Page....92
Coiled Tubing-Common Problem
PROBLEM PROBLEM
LEAKS:-
Leak can occur the BOP, LEAKS ( continue):-
Spool, Connection or on the
X/tree SOLUTION
If Leak worsens while killing in
SOLUTION progress;
ª Kill the well ª Cut the tubing and drop the
ª Strip the tubing out the well remaining part in the well
ª Close Master valve on Tree ª Close Swab valve ( check the
ª Repair the leaks turns)
IF LEAK IS AT STRIPPER;
ª Close Slip & Pipe ram
ª Repair for Leak at Striper
PROBLEM PROBLEM
RUNWAY COILED TUBING REEL SKIDING FORWARD
ª Gripper Blocks become fouled THE WELLHEAD
ª Too much weight/momentum Mostly happen to the offshore
ª Runaway condition may be skid mounted unit when the reel
taken to slow and then stop breaks loos from the binding
movement
SOLUTION SOLUTION
ª
Don't brake it but depend on company ª Stop the Injector/Extractor
policy, applying reel breaks and/or
closing Slip rams ª Close the Slip ram
ª
Increase the traction or skate pressure ª Spool out excess tubing
ª
Clean the gripper blocks before open slip ª Skid back to its position
ram
ª Secure the mounted unit
Page....93
CT-Barrier Related Question
During a rigging UP (no CT in the hole but
across a Quad BOPs), there is a leak from
connector between Quad ram and Stripper
(consider only Barrier terminology, not the
practical operation or your policy);
1. What is the 1st Barrier which to be closed

in order to repair this leak?
Answer __________________
2. While CT in operating (CT in the well),

there is a worn Stripper Packing element
and needed change, what type of Rams
can be closed to allow this change?
Answer __________________(2 BOPs)
CT-Presure Test Related question

3. What is the normal method to pressure
test the pipe Ram (lower most) of
Quad BOP?
Answer ______________________
4. From Figure-the Live Well Case Pipe

Ram is not holding pressure when
they is closed. Can the Pipe Ram be
changed out on this live well?
Answer ______________________
Page....94
CT-Pressure Test related Question
Pressure Test
5. Coiled tubing has been rigged up on the
production well. Pump is connected to
the kill wing on the Tree, to connect one
side of the Quad and the reel, how the
pump be performed in order to test the
blind ram and the safety head (shear/seal
BOP)???
Answer ________________________
CT-Rig Up related Question
Killing
6. If the CT parted on the Goose neck and the reel. The check valve in CT did not
hold pressure. Which rig up configuration allow you to secure the well and kill
it bycirculating down the CT and return to the choke?________
7.Which Rig up configuration is suitable work for high pressure well?_________

Page....95
S CHAPTER-5
SNUBBING EQUIPMENT
Chapter 5 Snubbing Equipment

ª
Function and Tasks required
ªSnubbing Unit Equipment
ªSnubbing Pressure Control Equipments
ªNipple & Rigging up Procedures
ªEquipment pressure Testing
ªSnubbing with Motor Assembly
ªEmergency Shut-in Procedures
ªSimple Calculations
ªSnubbing-Problem Cases
Page....96
Snubbing Equipments
Snubbing
Also known as "Pressure Tubing" is an intervention method for working live

wells. To move pipe into the hole by mean of "Pipe-light" and "Pipe-heavy"
concept
Pipe-light
Need to force pipe into hole due to well pressure is greater than the workover
string
Pipe-heavy
Weight of workover string is greater than the well pressure which trying to
squeeze the workover string out of the well. Also called "Stripping"
Balance Point
The point at which the weight of the string is great enough to equal the force
that must be overcome (transition from pipe light to pipe heavy)
Snubbing Applications
ª
Fishing or internal milling tubing/casing
ª
Washing out scale in the liner and inside gravel packing
ª
Drill cement or bridge plugs Washing out fracture material
ª
Pressure control/well killing Circulation
ª
Running in and retrievable plugs Acid treatment and washing
ª
Nitrogen pumping
ª
Completion operations
ª
Gravel packing
ª
Squeeze cement job or back plugging
ª
Drilling/Deepening hole
Page....97
Snubbing Equipments
Two basic Snubbing Units
Rig Assisted adn Hydraulic Types
Hydraulic Units are most common used with most

Specialized Equipments in nowadays (also known as
HWO)
Types of Hydraulic Snubbing Stacks;

ª Hydraulic Jack (short-stroke)
ª Hydraulic Long-stroke
Short Stroke, handle 8-10 ft. stroke length

ª Able to handle with higher wellhead pressure
(15,000 psi)
ª Unit must be rigged up to the top of wellhead or BOP
stack
ª All of its load is transferred to that wellhead
Long Stroke, handle 20-36 ft. stroke length

ª Handle many tool strings in one stroke
ª Able to handle with lower wellhead pressure (3,000
psi) All of its load is transferred to its Skid or
platform
Page....98
Snubbing Equipments
Basic Snubbing Unit
ª
Stripper Rubber
ª
Stripper Rams
ª
Safety Ram
ª
Blind Ram
ª
Tree Connection
If bleed off line has a built in choke,

a positive (fixed) choke is usually
installed
There are always two Valves on

each Choke and Kill connection.
The outside Valves is hydraulic
controlled and routinely used, the
inside valve is manual valve,
serving as a back up.
Basic Snubbing Unit

ª
Stripper Rubber
ª
Stripper Rams
ª
Safety Ram
ª
Blind Ram
ª
Tree Connection
If bleed off line has a built in choke,

a positive (fixed) choke is usually
installed
If Taper Strings be
run in hole, the There are always two Valves on
additional Safety each Choke and Kill connection.
Ram should be The outside Valves is hydraulic
installed. controlled and routinely used, the
inside valve is manual valve,
serving as a back up.
Page....99
Snubbing Procedures
External Pipe Pressure Control

Barrier Teminology:
PRIMARY
ª Striper Bowl, Rubber
ª Striper Rams
ª Annular BOP if run the BHA
SECONDARY
Safety ram (Pipe Ram)
TERTAIRY
ª Shear and Blind rams which is
mounted directly on top of the
Xman tree
ª Safety Head (Shear/Seal Ram)
Page....100
Pressure Control Equipments
From top to bottom
Striper Bowl ( below the Window)
Annular BOP
Striper ram (upper & lower)
Safety Ram (pipe ram)
Blind Shear Ram
Safety Ram (optional*)
Shear / Seal ram (Safety head)
ª
Shear Ram is designed to cut the work
string, not the BHA
ª
Shear/Seal ram Ram (safety head)
should be locaion just above the tree /
well head
ª
2nd Safety Ram is necessary installed
when running different sizes of working
strings ( or tapered string) in the well
Cameron D type annular BOP
Annular BOP i a back up for Stripper rubber in case running the specific type
of function ( drill cement tools, Fishing tools and etc.
Page....101
Hydril GS Annular BOP
Annular Preventer
ª
Operated by hydraulic
power fluid from
Accumulator Bottle
hooks up with BOP
control system
ª
The Accumulator bottles
i s p r e - c h a rg e d w i t h
Nitrogen gas
ª
It is not normal practice to
have a changed out worn
annular packing element
during a job ( it takes more
time and not safety)
ª
Hydraulic pressure to pre-tension the packing off unit against the string
well pressure also assist seal
ª
Usually short in life due to severity limitation ( normally with above 1500 psi)
ª
Limitation on maximum well pressure up to 3,000 psi
ª
Does not need to be energized by pumping it up with hand pump before it will seal around the
pipe ( steel reinforced rubber)
Page....102
Page....103
Ram Assemblies
A = Shear/Blind Ram
B = Pipe Ram
C = Blind Ram
D = Shear Ram
E = Striper ram
NAME AND FUNCTION FOR RAMS
Blind Ram = Close and Seal the well flow
Shear Ram = Cut the workover

String (but not BHA)
Blind/Shear Ram = Both cut and seal

the well flow
Page....104
Internal Pipe Pressure Control
Barrier Terminology:
PRIMARY
ª Two Check Valves in the BHA
SECONDARY
ª Wireline Plug (installed by wireline
in the BHA) or an additional 3rd
Check Valve
TERTAIRY
ª Safety Head (Shear/Seal Ram)
ª Kill Pump facilities to install Barite
or Cement plug
BACK PRESSURE VALVE

Prevent the well from flowing
in via workover string.
A minimum 2 BPVs are

installed at the bottom of the
workover string (tandem).
When this BPV not holding

pressure, wireline plugs
should be set into the Nipple
profiles in the BHA. Back Pressure Valves (BPVs)
Note:
This valve installed on bottom of the work string, can be tested by pumping
fluid into the stack from Kill line but before testing make sure working string
must be held so that it can not move up and down.
Page....105
Internal Pipe Pressure Control
It is an additional Check Valve for
Snubbing operations. It should be
available on the working Basket
during operation.
Gray Valve is the surface safety

valve which to be stabbed in
working string in case of well flow.
It works as a non-return type valve
or Check valve
When on the working basket, it

should kept locked in an open
position
FULL OPENING SAFETY

VALVE (FOSV)
Also Called ;
ªKelly Cock
ªTIW
ªStabing valve
Both GRAY VALVE and FOSY

must be present on the working
basket especially during trip out
Page....106
Nipple & Rigging Up Procedures (HWO)
Hydraulic Cylinders
ª Single concentric/non-concentric Cylinders
ª Multiple Cylinder (allow greater lifting)
Power Supply
ª Common self-contained and portable
ª Consist of Diesel Engine, Hydraulic fluid Pump, Fluid
Reservoir, Piping, Accumulator, Air Compressor, Air tank
and e.t.c.
Control Panels
ª The work Basket is the main operating controls
ª Primary control (Hydraulic cylinder operating valve, Slip
assembly, BOP and remote operated valves on equalizing
loop
ª Secondary control (Counter balance Winch, Power Tongs,
Power Swivels, Telescoping Mast)
Slip Assembly
ª Traveling Slips, 2 sets, Snubbing slip and lifting slip)
ª Stationary Slips, 2 sets, hold upward force, hold downward
weight)
Nipple & Rigging Up Procedures (Hydraulic Unit)

Guide Tube
Prevent Pipe from Buckling
Access Window
Provides an access for Tool joints, for changing Stripper c
Rubber, for installation of large diameter tools which could not
go through the bore of Jack
Rotating Equipment
Rotary table for Drilling/Milling normally attached to the
Traveling assembly
Telescopic Mast (Gin Pole)

ª Has a capacity and height to handling single joint of Tubing
ª Sometime equipped with Dual counter-balance Winch in
order to handle two joints of Tubing at the same time

(as previous slides)
Page....107
Snubbing Pressure Testing Procedures
After Snubbing rig up, the integrity of the
wellhead and well control equipments must be
established before operation commence.
The principle of pressure test series are as

follows;
ª
Test the Tertiary control system against a
closed tymas tree valves
ª
Test the Secondary control system against
the Tertiary control system
ª
Test the Primary control system against the
Tertiary control system
Therefore, the test line must be connected to the

correct direction
Equipment Pressure Testing

Upon the completion of the Rigging up, all BOP, Lines, Valves and Manifolds
should be pressure tested;
A. Low Pressure Test

Perform to detect Leaks, Plugs with tested pressure 200-300 psi
B. High Pressure Test

Stripper Rubbers, BOP's, BPV's, Nipples, Safety Valves and other
equipments should be tested with:-
"Maximum Anticipated Operating Pressure but not exceed the rated

working pressure of that equipments (API recommendation & IWCF
Well Intervention)"
Page....108
Snubbing Procedures
Procedures to Rig-up Snubbing Unit can be varied with regard to company policies. Caution
should be taken when start Snubbing operation and should be kept in mind to the following
situations;
1. Snubbing in Live Well: The largest snubbing force acting on work pipe is when the first
joint going in the hole
2. If set a Slips on Tool joint in a "Pipe-Light" mode, The pipe may BLOW out the well.
3. Fluctuations can occur in Tool joint goes through Annular Preventer because it has a
larger area thus, it can easily throw the "Pipe-heavy" to "Pipe-light" condition
4. Correctly operate during the transition between "Pipe-light" to "Pipe-heavy"
1. Run Pipe empty until it begin to float

2. Set heavy Slips
3. Fill the Pipe
4. Invert a Snub Slips
5. Continue the tripping-in hole
Emergency Shut-in
GENERAL PROCEDURES;
1. Position the working string at the same level as the work Basket
2. Close the Slips
3. Equalize and Bleed off the pressure across valves
4. Install Gray Valve (inside BOP)
5. Close upper Safety Ram
6. Secure hanging load by mean of Winch
7. Shut down the Power Pack
8. Close relevant Gate Valves on the BOP stack and Choke manifold
Page....109
Fluid Barriers
Page....110
Failures & Contingency Procedures
Procedures and general approaches
vary depending on company policy LEAKS IN WORK STRING ABOVE BHA
and degree of failure against well ª Kill the well
pressure. ª Set wireline Bridge plug above the leak
point
However, the followings are most ª Come out the hole
common procedures..
STRIPPER RUBBER FAILURE

BPVs FAILURE ª Close Striper Rams
ª Install FOSV then close it ª Install FOSV than close it
ª Connect with circulating hose
ª Opening the FOSV and pump
down or Run wireline plug and STRIPPER RAM LEAKS
seated into Nipple in the BHA ª Close Pipe Rams
ª Come out the hole ª Close Annular BOP if installed
ª Repair leaks
Simple Calculations
Two Stages of Operations
Pipe -Light - Snubbing Operation

Pipe-Heavy - Striping operation
Weight in Air of work String (lbs) = lbs/ft x ft

Buoyancy Factor (BF) = 65.5 - MW (ppg)
65.5
Hanging Weight of work String in the well (with BF) = lbs x BF
Force in lbs from the well = Well Pressure (SICP, psi) x Area (sq.in)
Area (cross section area of work string) = 0.7857 x (OD)2
ª
If the hanging weight of work string > Well Force - Stripping
ª
If the hanging weight of work string < Well Force - Snubbing
ª
If the hanging weight of work string = Well Force - Balance point
Page....111
Hpow to Detect washout (leak) Depth
in the work String
Leak in work String is a hassle problem and we need to determine the depth
of leak in order to run the pump down plug and land at nipple above the leak
before pulling out the work String.
The most common method to determine the leak depth is to pump a volume
of Brine water until its return to the Choke in Annulus.
Depth of the Leak = Volume Pumped (bbls)

[Work String Cap.(bbl/ft) + Annular Cap.(bbl/ft)]
Snubbing-Problem Cases
From Snubbing Lay out;
ª A 2-3/8" work string had been run to
wash out sand in a well.
ª An obstruction was encountered in the
tail pipe
ª The work string was then pulled out
ª We decided to run a smaller taper
string (1.9* OD) with 900' length
below the 1,500' of 2-3/8" work string
Question-1
What the specific equipments to be
required for this Snubbing rig up unit in
order to run safely?
Answer : _________________________
________________________________
Page....112
Snubbing-Problem Cases
From Snubbing Lay out;
Question-2
How to do the pressure test on the Safety
Ram (pipe ram)?
Answer:
_________________________
_________________________
Question-3
If leak occurred in the upper Stripper
Rams while a work string in the hole.
What is the best procedures and as the
first action to be taken in order to repair
the leak?
Answer:
_________________________
_________________________
Question-4
The Snubbing unit when rigged up

with Annular Preventer, the
closing line is sometimes hooked
with one gallon Accumulator
bottle. What is the reason for this?
Answer:
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Page....113
S
Exercise
ª
Principle & Procedures
ª
Completion Equipments
ª
Wireline Equipments
ª
ª
Snubbing Equipments
ª
Additional P & P
Page....114
Exercise -1Principle & Procedures
Giving Well Data below, answer the question 1 to question 8
Casing :-
7", 32 lbs/ft, 6.094" ID set at 11,436 ft.
MD/TVD.
Tubing:-
2-7/8^ 7.9 lbs/ft, 2.265" ID (none upset)-
End of Tubing (EOT) - 11,300 ft
Packer: at 11,290 ft.
Sliding Sleeve: at 11,190 ft.
Pump output: 0.1044 bbl/stk.

Perforation :-
- Top @ 11,353 ft.
- Bottom @ 11,393 ft.
Estimated Formation Pressure: 5,903)psi at the top Perforation
The well is prepared for

work over operation
1. Calculate the total barrels in the annulus (surface to packer).
Answer: _______________bbls.
2. Calculate the total barrels and strokes to reverse out through the sliding
sleeve (SSD).
Answer:______________bbis / __________________strokes
3. Calculate the total barrels to bullhead down the tubing string to the
bottom perforation with 2 bbis over displacement and surface volume
is 2 bbis.
Answer:________________bbls.
Page....115
4. Refer to question 3, how many strokes to bullhead in the above
problem?
Answer:________________strokes.
5. What is the minimum fluid density required to kill the well using
estimated formation pressure?
Answer: ________________ppg.
6. Referring question-5, how many total barrels of kill fluid will be

required (workover fluid to be displaced the entire well capacity) if you
need a total standby surface volume of 200 bbls? (note: consider the
total barrejs theoretically)
Answer: ________________bbls.
7. For further kill fluid preparation (if well kick during workover
operation), there are two tanks of same brine standby at well site. If 100
bbls of 11.7 ppg -calcium chloride were mixed with 200 bbls of 10.0
ppg calcium chloride what would the approximate density of the new
kill fluid be?
Answer: ________________ppg.
8. If the gradient of fluid/gas (production fluid) in the tubing is 0.13

psi/ft. what should the tubing pressure be at the surface?
Answer: ________________psi.
Page....116
Giving the well data below and drawing
beside, answer the question-12 to question-
13
Bullheading 15 bbls of HCL acid from the

surface and into perforation at 9,370 to 9,400 ft.
MD.
Casing - 7" OD, 6.538" ID

Tubing - 2-3/8" OD, 1.995" ID
EOT - 9,300 ft. MD.
Bottom of the Packer was set @ 9,298 ft. MD
The surface line capacity is 3 bbls

Pump output - 0.038 bbl/stk. 100% efficiency
9. Calculate total pump strokes required to

bullhead HCL acid into the top of
Perforation depth
Answer:________________ strokes.
10. Calculate total pump strokes required to
bullhead HCL acid into the bottom of
Perforation depth
Answer:_________________ strokes.
11. The Tubing Plugs when run and set in the well are considered as the
barrier. What is the standard issues which to be considered and to be
checked before and after the running of this tool?
1. ________________________________
2. ________________________________
3. ________________________________
Page....117
12. The Gas well has total depth of 15,000 ft. MD. (13,200 ft. TVD). The
Packer is set at 11,500 ft. MD.(9,800 ft. TVD). The Annulus is full of
9.0 ppg. Completion Brine
The Shut in wellhead pressure is 2,700 psi
Gas Gradient is 0.15 psi/ft.
What is the different pressure between Tubing and Annulus at the
underside of the Tubing Hanger?
Answer:__________psi.
13. The following information had been gathered from a GAS well:-
Well Depth, TVD 6,500 ft.

Well Depth, MD 13,200 ft.
Formation Gradient 0.5720 psi/ft.
Gas Gradient 0.0707 psi/ft.
Prior to run production casing and wellhead equipments;
Calculate the Formation Pressure?_________psi.
Calculate the maximum surface Pressure for Wellhead equipment?
What is the rate working Pressure of Wellhead equipment? ______M.
14. Refer to Well Data on question-13;

The 7" Casing has been run to the bottom of the well and the 3-1/2"
completion string has been set. Prior to perforate the production zone,
the drilling mud to be displaced with Brine to BALANCE the
formation pressure.
What the Brine density is required?________ppg.
15. Describe on how the Mechanical Plugs can be installed or can be

placed in the well bore?
1. _________________________
2. _________________________
Page....118
16. A production well is to be shut in after pulling the intervention tool
strings out of the hole. What is the FIRST correct action to take?
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
17. Well Data:-

Tubing Depth 9,500 ft. MD. (8,700 ft.TVD)
Tubing Capacity 0.0025 bbl/ft
Annular Capacity 0.0052 bbl/ft
Pump Rate 0.7500 bbl/minute
For forward circulation (pump down tubing and up to annulus),

calculate the time required to pump Bottom-up and to pump full
circulation? [note: the Packer is unseated]
Time in minutes required to Bottom up ______________
Time in minutes required to full circulation ______________
Page....119
Exercise -2 (Completion Equipments)
1. Two common types of downhole safety valve are available for Completion,
There are? (Two answers)
a) Permanent
b) Tubing retrievable
c) Temporary
d) Coiled tubing retrievable
(e) Wireline retrievable
2. How the lock mandrels in landing nipple lock (not seal pressure) into the tubing
nipples?
a) On No-Go Shoulder
b) With Slips
c) By metal to Metal
d) With elastic packings in a polished nipple bore
e) With mandrel locking dogs and matching nipple recess
3. What are the main functions of the tubing hanger? (Two answers)
a) It supports the weight of the completion string

b) It allows communication from inside the completion to the
completion Annulus through the control line ports
c) It isolates the completion from the completion annulus
d) It is this place where the well to be closed by the pressure
controlled line
4. What is the main purpose of SSD?
a) To close off the tubing bore

b) To provide a communication path between the annulus and
tubing and vise versa
c) To close off the annulus
5. Do the downhole safety valves prevent the flow in both directions when closed?
a) No
b) Yes
Page....120
6. When a Side Pocket Mandrel is not in use, what is the equipment to be installed as
a positive closure (prevent flow from both direction)?
a) Gate valve
b) Chemical injection valve
c) Dummy valve
d) Circulating valve
e) Gas lift valve
7. What are the main purposes of a Side Pocket Mandrel? (Two answers)
a) To provide a profile for landing some flow control devices

b) To provide a communication path between the tubing and the casing
annulus
c) To plug the tubing
d) To act as the receptacle for gas lift, chemical injection, circulating or
dummy valves
e) To act as the receptacle for a wireline safety valve
8. How a surface controlled wireline retrievable downhole safety valve be able to

make a hydraulic communication with control line once it had been set inside
the tubing retrievable safety valve type?
a) Through a hydraulic Stab

b) Between two packing seal stacks, once the lock mandrel is set
c) Through the SSD when it opened
9. Which of the following statements about Xmas tree are true? (Two answers)
a) When close the valves, it necessary to close tightly as possible

b) All valve on Xmas tree take 25 turns to open or close
c) After closing, a manual valve should be backed out as part of turns
d) Counting the turn while operating the valve can show if there is an
obstruction at the valve
e) There is a indicator shows how many turns are still required to fully close
the valve
Page....121
10. Which of the following statements are true with regard to the Circulating
devices in a well killing operation? (Two answers)
a) Check the circulating device must be fully opened

b) Check the catcher is installed below the SSD
c) Check the pressure rating to be adequate for the job
d) Check the pressure are equalized before opening
e) Check the tail pipe plug is in place before opening the sleeve
11. From which direction are Downhole Safety Valves designed to prevent the
formation fluid from flowing?
_________________
12. Name the Downhole Safety Valves which are SURFACE controlled?
__________________________
13. How many the generic types of PACKERS available for completions?
_____________________________________
14. What is the PRIMARY factor that determines the setting depth of a Downhole
Safety Valve?
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
15. How to re-instate production in a well which the Tubing retrievable DHSV was
failed?
________________________________________________________
Page....122
Exercise -3 (Wireline Equipments)
1. What is the main advantage of wireline units over other types of well service
units?
a) Wireline units can perform perforation operations
b) Coiled tubing units cannot rotate tools in the hole
c) Overall economics due to the speed in which they can rig up,
complete a job, and rig down
d) All types of logging are done by means of wireline
2. How much pressure is the Bell line Wiper designed to hold?

a) 5,000 psi
b) 3,000 psi
c) 15,000 psi
d) 0 psi
3. Where most of the wireline operations are take place?

a) Through the tubing or work string
b) At the top of the well
c) Below the production packer
d) Above production packer
4. Which statement is most true concerning wireline units?

a) There is no need for blowout preventers on wireline jobs
b) Wireline blowout preventers and valves are similar to pipe ram in
operation
c) The blowout preventer stack is supported by a telescoping gin pole
d) Ram type preventers cannot be used because the rams do not form a good
seal around the wire
5. When working on the well under pressure, wireline lubricators are usually
installed directly above the master valve on the tree?
a) True
b) False
6. Which of the following is not a component of the lubricator assembly?

a) Control valve
b) Riser sections
c) Rope sockets
d) Various valves and unions on lubricator
Page....123
7. What is the main purpose of installing the Wireline blowout preventers?
a) To provide better protection than a stuffing box
b) To contain well pressure and enable the repair/change if any
connection above the BOPs is leaked
c) The pressure of the tool pin aids wedging the plug in the body
d) They are different methods of attaching wireline to down hole tools
8. Which one of the following statements is true regarding to braided line grease
heads (GIH)?
a) It is the applied hydraulic pressure pushing up the pack-off that makes the
seal around the braided line cable
b) It is the wellhead pressure pushing up the pack-off that makes the seal
around the braided line cable
c) It is the grease, pumped into the flow tube through the lower grease inlet
which makes the seal around the braided line cable.
d) It is the grease, pumped into tubes through the upper grease inlet
which makes the seal around the braided line cable
9. Which one is the primary barrier during a slick line operation?

a) Wireline BOP
b) Lubricator
c) Stuffing box
d) Master valve on X/mas tree
10. Which of the following cases or situations should the Slick line BOP be closed?
(Two answers)
a) When the running tools must be changed during running in
b) When the wire to be cleaned on pulling out of the hole
c) When the wire broken at near surface at fallen down the hole
d) When a broken wire has been successfully fished and has to be reeled back
onto the drum via Stuffing box
e) When the tools are stuck in hole and the Cutter Bar is to be dropped
11. What is the most reason to install the lower Ram with the seal upside down?
a) It is standard design for Ram preventers to hold pressure from below
b) It is suitable and balancing of the wireline BOP
c) The ram can be fitted in either way
d) The lower Rams contain Grease pressure, not a well pressure
Page....124
12. The advantages of setting a wireline BOP directly on top of the Xmas tree
are;(Three answers)
a) Less potential leak paths between barriers
b) Be able to maximize length of Lubricator above wireline BOP
c) Minimize a borehole restrictions in the Tree
d) Full bore tool stuck in the Tree
e) Provide good access to the wireline BOP (shorter distance)
13. What is the main purpose of having a Ball check valve or Safety check union
installed below the Grease injection head when run with the braided line?
a) To clean the Grease off the Braided line while pulling out
b) To prevent both Grease and Well Fluid to be contaminated each other /£K
c) To prevent the escape of Well Fluids through the Grease head in case
of the cable breaks at surface
d) To hold the Chemical in the Chemical Injection sub at all time
14. After closing the wireline BOP and before breaking out the Lubricator to lay it
down above the closed BOP, which following actions must be carried out?
(Three answers)
a) Kill the well
b) Inflow test the wireline BOP
c) Increase the pressure against the wireline BOP from the top
d) Screw in the Manual Stems to lock the hydraulic Rams
e) Bleed off well pressure above the closed wireline BOP
15. When the Slick line broken off and lost in down hole, the plan is to fish the
slick line with braided line. Which procedures are recommended in order to
perform this operation safely; (Two answers)
a) It is necessary to rig up both slick line and braided line BOP's before the
fishing operation
b) The Lubricator must be changed out to one of higher rated working
pressure
c) Redress the slick line BOP into a Single braided line BOP
d) It may necessary to pick up extra lubricator to accommodate the fishing
tool string and slick line tool string
Page....125
Exercise -4 (Coiled Tubing Equipments)
l. Listed below are several advantages of coiled tubing units over other types of
Workover units. Which is considered the most advantage?
a) No tubing connections to make or break
b) Less manpower requirements
c) Tubing costs less per foot than joined pipe
d) Ability to circulate while running in/out of the well
2. Slip rams are designed to contain well bore pressure;

a) True
B) False
3. How is coiled tubing run in and out of the well?

a) Spooled on or off a reel using hydraulic power
b) Raised and lowered with an arrangement of sheaves supported
by a telescoping gin pole
c) The coil is moved up and down the hole by means of the
injector/extractor
d) Skates are fitted onto the reel to supply gripping friction
4. What is the purpose of installing Shear Seal BOP (safety head) on Coiled tubing
rig up?
a) To replace a Quad or Combi BOP if there are not available
b) To provide additional shear capacity in the BOP stack
c) To shear the tabular but not seal the well
d) To seal the well effectively if closed on the pipe
5. Coiled tubing Buckling is a major concern with which type of

stripper?
a) Side door Stripper
b) Conventional Stripper
c) Radial Stripper
6. In typical Coiled tubing operations, the majority of bending stresses occurs at;
a) Between the reel and goose neck
b) At the mechanical footage counter
c) Lower collapse limits than conventional tubing
d) The injector goose neck or arch guide when POOH
Page....126
7. The tubing stripper on a coiled tubing unit is often referred to as;
a) The "annular"
b) The "packoff tool"
c) The "stuffing box"
d) None of the above
8. All stripper assemblies for coiled tubing units are well bore energized:
a) True
b) False
9. The "Quad" ram set is in common use on coiled tubing jobs. What is the
recommended arrangement (from bottom to top)
a) Pipe, Slip, Cutter, Blind
b) Blind, Cutter, Slip, Pipe
c) Blind, Flow Tee, Cutter, Slip
d) Slip, Pipe, Cutter, Blind
10. Two of the advantages of using coiled tubing for remedial work are the ability
to work on live wells and the ability to circulate going into or coming out of
the hole. What disadvantage may be associated with these advantages?
a) Pressure limits due to BOP equipment
b) High volume, low pressure pumps on the unit
c) The injector/extractor may not be able to overcome well pressure
d) Relatively low pumping rates due to the high friction created when
pumping through a small diameter tubing
11. From the drawings below, describe how the process of Stripper should be carried
out when it energized?
Activation Activation
Page....127
12. Described correctly on how to pressure test the Pipe Rams of a QUAD BOP?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
13. How to determine the working pressure of the Stripper Assemblies when this
equipment to be deployed?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
14. What are the main advantage of the "COMBI" BP[ over the "QUAD" BOP?
1. ______________________________________________________
2. ______________________________________________________
15. Coiled Tubing has run into a live producing well to clean out some scale. If the
pump rate is increased, which pressure losses along the well are affected on
this change?
1. ______________________________________________________
2. ______________________________________________________
Page....128
Exercise -5 (Snubbing Equipments)
1. What is the meaning of the term "pipe light"?
a) The pipe is dry, that is not filled with mud
b) The well is exerting an upward force greater than the weight of
the string at a given depth
c) The term refers to range of pipe
d) The well is exerting an upward force less than the weight of the
string at a given depth
2. Which type of snubbing unit is most commonly used today?

a) Conventional units
b) Long stroke units
c) Hydraulic jack units
d) Mechanical units
3. The function of the guide tube on snubbing unit is to;

a) J Prevent pipe buckling
b) Guide the pipe through the BOPs
c) Guide the jack pistons into the cylinders
d) Guide the pipe safety through the window
4. Which of the following is not a hydraulic circuit on snubbing units?

a) Main system to the jack
b) BOP operating circuit
c) Priority circuit
d) Counter balance circuit
5. The stripper rubber, located at the base of the jack, is usually;

a) A low pressure preventer (less than 3,000 psi)
b) A high pressure preventer (greater than 3,000 psi)
c) A modified ram type preventer
d) Is used for drilling only
6. A definition of the stripping might be: moving pipe into or out of a well when
wellbore pressure is less than the weight of the pipe.
a) True
b) False
Page....129
7. The most crucial part of any operation is;
a) Anticipated formation pressure
b) Condition of the equipment
c) Careful pre-job planning
d) Production history
8. If the slips are set on a tool joint while operating in the "pipe light" mode, the
following may occur.
a) The work string may drop into the well
b) The work string may part just below the slips
c) The pipe could be forced out of the well
d) The work string may part just above the slips
9. When selecting the type of Snubbing well control equipment to be used, which
of the following should be the most important consideration?
a) Maximum pressure to be encountered
b) Maximum depth to be performed the task
c) Equipment needed to assist rig up
d) Type of kill fluid to be used
10. Which of the following does not increase the inelastic buckling limit of pipe?
a) Increase the size of the string
b) Increase the length of the string
c) Reduce the unsupported length of pipe
d) Increase the grade (yield strength of pipe)
11. On the rigging up the BOP control unit (Accumulator unit), after connecting a
hydraulic control lines to the BOP's, what is the action that should be taken
after this?
a) Pre-charge the Accumulator with Nitrogen Gas
b) Function test all items on the BOP stack
c) Place all Rams in a "Block" position to charge up the hoses
d) Install the injection head
Page....130
12. While running the work string into hole using the stripping rams as the
primary barrier. It is found that one of the stripping rams has worn out badly
and no longer to hold pressure. What the correct course of action?
a) Finish the job by using only good one stripping ram
b) Stop and redress both stripping rams
c) Stop and redress the worn stripping ram
d) Continue the job because the Annular preventer can be used as primary
barrier
13. Describe on how to test the Stripper Rams and Safety Rams correctly?
1. ____________________________
2. ____________________________
14. Give the best reason why the fluid pumps should be provided on site for
Snubbing operation?
1. ____________________________
2. ____________________________
15. Describe the correct procedure to pressure test the BPV's (Check Valve) in the
bottom of the work string after the completion of rigging up?
1. ____________________________
2. ____________________________
Page....131
Exercise -6 (Additional P &P)
Tubing Capacity
= 0.0083 bbl/ft
Casing Capacity
= 0.0371 bbl/ft
Annulus Capacity
=0.0252 bbl/ft
Gradients;
Brine (in Ann) = 0.49 psi/ft
Oil (in Tbg & Csg)
= 0.35 psi/ft
Gas (in Tbg) = 0.12 psi/ft

Kill fluid = 0.52 psi/ft
Gas/Oil contact @ 4200 ft.

SSD @ 7500 ft.
Packer @ 7550 ft.
Top Perforation @ 7800 ft.
Formation Pressure
= 3764 psi
Shut in THP = 2000 psi

Shut in CHP = 0 psi
Figure-1 shows the configuration of the well which is shut in and will be circulated by
REVERSE CIRCULA TION method.
The Tubing which constant ID/OD containing Gas and Oil
The Casing below the Packer is full with Oil "
In Annulus is filled up with completion Brine r"
Kill fluid to be pumped through annulus via the sliding sleeve until formation fluid/gases
and completion fluid brine are displaced out entirely.
During killing, we maintain an overbalance of 200 psi above the Formation pressure at
top (tubing side).
1. Calculate Tubing Volume used for this Operation _______ bbls

Page....132
2. Calculate Annular Volume used for this operation _____________ bbls.
3. Calculate Hydrostatic Pressures in tubing in static condition;

a) Of the Gas column _____________psi.
b) Of the Oil column (till SSD) _____________psi.
c) Of Kill Fluid when filled annulus across SSD _____________ psi.
4. Calculate Pressure in static condition at the sliding sleeve on the following

periods of the reverse circulation well kill.
a) Actua[pressure when tubing is full of Brine (including overbalance)
_____________psi.
b) When Reverse circulation was completed _____________ psi.
c) Expected pressure during killing operation (including overbalance)
_____________ psi.
5. After pumping 63 bbls, we maintain the tubing head pressure to stabilize at

200 psi until we have pumped 189 bbls. What is the reason for the
stabilization of pressure at 200 psi.
Answer: _______________________________
6. If tubing head pressure between pumping 63 bbls until 189 bbls is held
constant at 150 psi instead of 200 psi, will the well become underbalance?
Answer: __________________ (Yes or No)
7. How many pumped barrels of kill fluid to fill annulus while the gas has just
been displaced out of tubing string?
Answer: _______________________________________
The following information are gathered from the gas well:-
Well Depth - 12,200 ft. MD, 6,120 ft. TVD

Formation Gradient - 0.572 psi/ft
Gas Gradient - 0.0707 psi/ft
Casing Capacity - 0.04049 bbl/ft

Tubing Capacity - 0.00829 bbl/ft
Page....133
Exercise -5 Snubbing
Tubing closed end displacement- 0.01190 bbl/ft
Pump displacement - 0.0899 bbl/stroke
Tubing shoe depth - 11,000 ft. MD, 5,980 ft. TVD
8. Calculate how many strokes to displace the tubing string?
Answer: _____________strokes.
9. A Sliding Sleeve (SSD) is to be opened in a producing Oil well.

EOT - 9,175 ft. MD, 8,100 ft. TVD
Packer depth - 8,500 ft. MD, 7,250 ft.
TVD SSD depth - 8,100 ft. MD, 6,825 ft.
TVD Completion fluid density - 9.2 ppg
Oil density - 6.8 ppg
SITHP - 750 psi
a) Calculate the differential pressure that exists across the SSD?
Answer: _____________________ psi.
b) From above, which side has more pressure?
Answer: ____________________
10. Well is to be killed with 10.0 ppg brine. Well MD = 12,000 ft. (TVD 11,000 ft).
Formation pressure = 5,620 psi. How many psi overbalance the well?
Answer: ____________ psi.
11. Given data:-

Tubing depth - 9,500 ft. MD
Tubing capacity - 0.0025 bbl/ft
Annular capacity - 0.0052 bbl/ft
Pump rate - 0.75 barrel/minute
Calculate the time required to pump on full circulation
Answer: ____________ minutes.
Page....134
12. During a well intervention operation, an emergency situation arises, and it
become necessary to kill the well. What method would be appropriate to use if
formation zone is opened (perforation open) and surface working pressure is
great enough to handle?
Answer: __________________
13. If the recommended method which answered on question 12 was not

possible, what is another method should be introduced?
Answer: __________________
14. The Gas well data:-

Well depth - 6,150 ft. TVD., 12,500 ft. MD
Formation Gradient - 0.572 psi/ft
Gas Gradient - 0.0707 psi/ft
Calculate the maximum Surface Pressure prior to installation of the production

casing equipments and well head equipments.
Answer: __________________ psi. (approximately)
15. An attempt to open a closed valve whilst there is pressure on one side only, which
of the following statement are true? (two answers)
a) lt can cause the valve to damage
b) It will reduce the risk of damage to the valve
c) It will reduce chance of pressure locking the valve It can cause less
hydraulic shock to the system
d) It can cause damage to equipment downstream of the valve
Page....135
Equipment Drawings
Drawing 1.1
COMP-Christmas Tree
Page....136
Equipment Drawings
WL-Dual Wireline BOP
Drawing 2.1
WL-Hydraulic Single BOP
Drawing 2.2
Page....137
Equipment Drawings
WL-Manual Single BOP
Drawing 2.3
WL-Stuffing Box
Drawing 2.4
Page....138
Equipment Drawings
WL-Slickline Stuffing Box
Drawing 2.5
WL-Lower Lubricator Section
Drawing 2.6
Page....139
Equipment Drawings
WL-Grease Injection
Head (GIH) Drawing 2.7
WL-Pressure Control
Equipment Rig Up
Drawing 2.8
Page....140
Equipment Drawings
CT-Annular BOP
Drawing 3.9
Drawing 3.10
Page....141
Equipment Drawings
CT-Quad BOP
Drawing 3.1
CT-BOP ram Assemblies
Drawing 3.2
Page....142
Equipment Drawings
CT-Striper Assemblies
Drawing 3.3
CT- Conventional Striper Stack

Drawing 3.4
Page....143
Equipment Drawings
CT-Striper is Energized
Drawing 3.5
What Happen when this Stripper

is Energed?
CT-Rig up Configuration
Drawing 3.6
Coiled tubing was Rigged up in live

well. Pump is connected to kill
wing on the tree, to the connection
on the side of Quad and to the reel.
How to test the Build ram and the

Safety head?
Page....144
Equipment Drawings
CT-BOP Rig up Configurations
Drawing 3.7
Which Rig up configuration that the wel can be killed by

pumping down the Coiled tubing and returning to choke?
CT Runs in Live Well
Drawing 3.8
From Figure-in the Live well

Case:
Pipe ram is not holding

pressure when they is closed.
Can the Pipe ram be changed
out on this life well?
Page....145
Equipment Drawings
CT-Annular BOP
Drawing 3.9
Drawing 3.10
Page....146
Equipment Drawings
SNUBBING
Common Drawing 4.1
Surface
Rig-up
From SN-Rig Up for live well:

If taper Strings to be run in this well,
Explain how to modify this Rig up in order
to run safely?
(i.e. how and where.......)
SN-Annular Preventer
Drawing 4.2
Page....147
Equipment Drawings
CT-Annular BOP
Drawing 3.9
SN-BOP Ram Assemblies

Drawing 4.3
Page....148
Wireline Equipments
Page....149
Wireline Equipments
DUAL WIRLINE BOP
WIRLINE MANUAL SINGLE BOP
Page....150
Wireline Equipments
WIRELINE HYDRAULIC
STUFFING BOX
SLICK LINE- MECHANICAL

STUFFING BOX
Page....151
Wireline Equipments
LOWER LUBRICATOR
SECTION
GREASE INJECTION HEAD (GIH)
Page....152
Wireline Equipments
WIRELINE PRESSURE CONTROL
EQUIPMENT RIG-UP
Page....153
Wireline-Equipments
Page....154
COILED TUBING - QUAD BOP
COILED TUBING - STRIPPERS
Page....155
CT-Conventional Stripper Stack
1. Lock Pins
2. Upper Bushing/Split Cap
3. Non Extrusion Ring
4. Packing Insert
5. Energizer
6. Lower Bushing
Page....156
CT-Stripper is Energized
What Happen when this Stripper

is Energized?
Side Door Stripper

Hydraulic pressure is applied to the
upper Bushing then compress the
packers in a download direction
Page....157
Hydrill GS ANNULAR PREVENTER
Annular EJ72
Vent see at drawing
Sleves 9
Pack off Port 18
Body 1
Wear rig 17
Bonet 2
Packing Element
see at drawing
Piston 13
ANNULAR PREVENTER
Page....158
ANNULAR PREVENTER
Shaffer Bolted Cover Spherical BOP
ANNULAR PREVENTER
SHAFFER wedge-cover single spherical BOP

Page....159
ANNULAR PREVENTER
SHAFFER Bolted-cover single spherical BOP
COILED TUBING CHECK VALVES
Ball and Seat valve Dome Type valve
Removable Cartridge Flapper Type Valve

Type Flapper Valve
Page....160
COILED TUBING CHECK VALVES
Page....161
Snubbing-Equipments
Snubbing - Annular Preventer
Snubbing - BOP Ram Assemblies
Page....162
Chapter -2 Principles & Procedures
2. PRINCIPLES AND PROCEDURES
2.1 Definition of Barrier

The term barrier Refers to mechanical or fluid used to limit fluid flow. Barriers may be located down
hole for example mechanical plugs, columns of fluid, or topside valves or plugs.
During well entry operations there must always be at least two independent, tested barriers in place, in
order to prevent undesired flows of hydrocarbons from the well to surface. If one of the barriers should
fail, the other will maintain the barrier function and prevent a uncontrolled flow from the well.
During operations, barriers must be defined and fault criteria established. The availability of the
barriers must be evaluated against the risk involved in the operation. Pressure testing methods and
intervals must be established. As fat as possible the barriers should be tested in the direction of flow
from the well. The location of valves and the status of the barriers must be known at all times.
The barriers must be capable of being operated independently of each other. No failure may be capable
of destroying the functional capacity of both barriers simultaneously.
The barriers must be physically independent of each other and may not share a barrier element (in order
to prevent a failure in the common barrier element from leading to the loss of both barriers).
If one barrier fails it must be possible to put compensatory measures into effect immediately. During
this phase, efforts to re-establish the barrier are the only type of work permitted.
If it is not possible to set up two tested barriers, we must ensure that the total risk does not increase.
Barriers are divided into primary, secondary and tertiary barriers (if installed). Primary barriers are
those that control the connection to the reservoir ( by opening or closing it for production or injection).
Secondary barriers are brought into action if the primary barrier should fail, and if the secondary barrier
fails, the tertiary barrier is utilized etc.
Note: In most operations, the primary and secondary barriers will vary according to the phase of the
operation.
Envelope is a concept that is utilized in considering a barrier as part of a total system that involves
pressure of fluids. The barrier itself an wireline BOP. Will not be much help if the complete system is not
intact (Xmas tree, completion string, extension tubing).
Page....163
2.1.2 Mechanical Barriers
ªCemented liner/casing.
ªCompletion string.
ªTubing hanger.
ªXmas tree.
ªCement plugs.
ªMechanical plugs (many things) (name mechanical barriers?? installed by well
intervention).
ªMechanical barriers prevent well flow by closing off the flow path.
ªCan be installed by wireline, coiled tubing, snubbing, and freeze method.
ªWireline plug and pump through plug are installed by intervention methods.
ªBOP's and Xmas tree valves are considered as closeable barriers
(Closeable = can be opened and closed).
2.1.3 Fluid Barriers

ªDrilling/Completion fluids.
ªCorrect specification (desired weight).
ªTesting (monitoring when fluid is being weighted and pumped).
ªObservation [monitoring for a period that pumped fluid is stabilizing (kill) the well],
ªClassed as primary barrier (being as primary barrier when it balance the well pressure or
being killed mud).
Page....164
2.1.4 Barrier Envelopes
Contain well pressure

ª Production Casing.
ª Production Tubing.
ª Production Packer.
ª Tubing hanger with check valve.
ª Xmas Trees.
Prevent annulus flow

ª Production Casing.
ª Production Packer.
ª Completion Fluid.
ª Tubing hanger/hanger spool.
ª Casing spool outlet valves.
Page....165
Drawing beside, identify the

barrier elements (envelope) that;
Contain Well Pressure

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page....166
Drawing beside, identify the barrier
elements (envelope) that;
Contain Well Pressure

1. Xmas Tree
2. Tubing hanger with check valve
3. Production string
4. Production casing
5. Production packer

1. Tubing hanger/well head
2. Annular in wellhead
3. Completion fluid
Page....167
2.1.4.3. Barrier Envelops
Question
BARRIER ENVELOPES
From the production well schematic

identify the barrier ( envelop)
that contain well pressure?
(pick up 5 answer)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page....168
2.1.4.4. Barrier Envelops
Question
BARRIER ENVELOPES
From the production well schematic

identify the barrier ( envelop)
that maintain well pressure?
(Select 5 answer)
1. Xmas Tress
2. Tubing hanger/hanger Spool (X)
3. Production tubing
Page....169
2.1.4.5. Barrier Philosophy
Page....170
Page....171
Well was killed with kill Fluid (fluid barrier)
First prevent flow of well = Primary Barrier
Page....172
Wireline Operation
First preventing flow of well
Primary Barrier = Stuffing Box
Page....173
2.2 Pressure
Pressure = Force exerted per unit Area
The Pressure exerted per unit area by a volume or column of stationary Fluid, either liquid or gas
of which a known density
API Unit:
PSI = Pound per square inch.
2.2.1 How 0.052 Conversion Factor is derived
1 cubic foot = 7.48 gallons

If 1 ppg, means 1 pound = 1 gallon
Thus weight 1 cubic foot is;
1 ppg x 7.48 = 7.48 pounds
1 sq. feet = 144 sq. inch
Therefore; 7.48 Gallons - 0.052

144
Therefore the conversion factor of 0.052

When pounds per gallon is converted
into Pounds per square Inch. (PSI)
Page....174
2.2.2 Hydrostatic Pressure
Hydrostatic Pressure will depend on the weight or density

of the Fluid and its vertical length or depth
Hydrostatic Pressure = 0.052 x MW x Depth
Where, in API Unit:
2.2.2 Hydrostatic Pressure
Thr hydrostatic pressure of a column of fluid is determined on the basis of that fluid
desity and vertical height of that fluid column.
API Unit:
Pressure psi = 0.052 x Fluid Density ppg x TVD feet Formula-3
Pressure Gradient psi/ft = 0.052 x Fluid Density ppg Formula-1
Fluid Density ppg = Pressure (psi) [0.052 x TVD feet]

Formula-2
Page....175
2.2.4 Hydrostatic Pressure Effects
Single Fluid Density

(Same MW)
Which one has more
Hydrostatic Pressure?
2.2.5 Hydrostatic Pressure Effects
Page....176
2.3 Pressure Gradient
Pressure of Fluid of a given Density is measured over a given unit depth
Example:
Fresh Water has a density of 8.33 ppg, at 1 foot column it shall exert Pressure of;
0.052 x 8.33 x 1 = 0.433 psi or Pressure gradient of Fresh Water = 0.433 psi/ft
Salt Water has a density of 8.94 ppg, at 1 foot column it shall exert Pressure of;
0.052 x 8.94 x 1 = 0.465 psi or Pressure gradient of Salt Water = 0.465 psi/ft
2.3.1 Pressure Gradient, Mud Weight and its Relationship
From Equation;
Pressure = 0.052 x MW x DEPTH (TVD)
psi ppg ft.
Thus
psi/ft = 0.052 x ppg
Or. Gradient = 0.052 x MW (ppg)
ppg = psi/ft = Gradient ÷ 0.052

0.052
Or, MW = Gradient ÷ 0.052
To convert ppg to Gradient - Multiply with 0.052

To convert Gradient to ppg - Divided by 0.052
Page....177
2.3.2 Pressure Gradient, Mud Weight and its Relationship
From Equation; PRESSURE = 0.052 x MW x DEPTH

psi pg ft.
Practice:-
Find the Pressure, gradient and column Height and Mud Weight from given data;
Calculate MW (ppg)
0.33psi/ft = 6.35 ppg
0.46psi/ft = 8.85 ppg
*Calculate Gradient (psi/ft)
8.94 ppg = 0.465 psi/ft
8.33 ppg = 0.433 psi/ft
C. Calculate Column height (ft)

0.45 psi/ft with 2,500 psi = 5,556'
0.35 psi/ft with 3,000 psi = 8,571'
2.4 Hydrostatic Pressure Effect
Hydrostatic Pressure = 0.052 x 11 x 8,000 feet = 4,576 psi
Page....178
2.4.1 Hydrostatic Pressure Effect
PRACTICE
Calculate Hydrostatic Pressure from given data below:-
MW (ppg) Depth in TVD. (ft) Hydrostatic pressure (psi)
9.0 8,000 __________________?
10.0 9,000 __________________?
10.5 10,000 __________________?
12.5 15,000 __________________?
2.4.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Effect
Different Fluid Density

Hydrostatic Pressure at Different fluid columns
(in Annulus)
Column 1 = 0.052 x 10 x 3,500 = 1,820 psi
Column 2 = 0.052 x 9 x 4,000 = 1,872 psi
Column 3 = 0.052 x 11 x 500 = 286 psi
Total Hydrostatic Pressure = 1820+1872+286

(at 8,000'TVD) = 3,978 psi
This case is most likely happen when circulate Kick out of the Well
Page....179
2.5 Formation (Pore) Pressure
Pressure exerted by the naturally occurring Fluids which trapped in the pore space of the formation.
These fluids include water, oil and gas.
Formation Pressure are categorized as:-
ªNORMAL PRESSURE
ªABNORMAL PRESSURE
ªSUBNORMAL PRESSURE
ªNormal Pressure = 0.465 psi/ft (Formation Fluid/Salt Water)

ªAbnormal Pressure = 0.465 - 1.0 psi/ft
ªSubnormal Pressure = < 0.465 psi/ft (depleted Reservoir)
2.5.1 Formation Pressure

When the well had been shut in, static well head pressure (SIWHP) was stabilized. Formation
Pressure can be determined as follows;-
Formula-4
API Unit
Formation Pressure (psi) = Hydrostatic Pressure (psi) + SIWHP (psi)
When well was shut in fluids and gas in production string will separate out due to gravitational forces
thus hydrostatic pressure will be equal to sum of hydrostatic pressure of fluids and gas columns in the
production string.
Page....180
2.5.2 Bottom Hole Pressure (BHP)
BHP Equals the sum of all pressure are being exerted at the bottom of the hole
Note:
Dynamic Pressure are pressure exerted due to fluid movement such are annular pressure
losses, when pipe movement in the well i.e. Swab and Surge pressure
BHP when not Circulating = Hydrostatic Pressure due to Mud column
BHP while Drilling = Hydrostatic Pressure + Annular Pressure Losses
BHP while Tripping in = Hydrostatic Pressure + Surge Pressure
BHP while Tripping out = Hydrostatic Pressure - Swab Pressure
BHP when initial Shut in well = Hydrostatic Pressure + Shut in Pressure
Page....181
2.6 Testing Barriers
ªBarriers should be tested for both inflow and pressure integrity.

ªInflow test - reducing the pressure on the upper side of the barrier to detect any leaks.
ªPressure testing - increasing the pressure to a value higher than the lower side of the barrier to
detect any leaks.
INFLOW TEST
Reduce Pressure at the upper side of Barrier then observe for

certain period of time in order to detect for any leaks.
PRESSURE TEST
Increase Pressure at the upper side of Barrier then observe

for certain period of time in order to detect for any leaks.
Page....182
2.6 Testing Barriers
The Testing Barrier will depend on

which phase of the well life;
Cased hole well, pressure tested P &A: Cemented liner; is Drilling
with mud or water. Is subjected pressure tested in order to
to inflow-testing when the well verify its resistance to future
is displaced from mud to
leakages (NB! Leak-off at
seawater (washing).
shoe).). • Completion
• Production
Perforated liner and deep Production packer as barrier

plug. The plug is inflow- element is pressure tested
and pressure-tested in order from underside = inflow
to verify its integrity test.
(barrier function).
SAMPLE OF TESTING
BARRIERS, OF VARIOUS
MECHANICAL & FLIUD
BARRIERS
Pressure test of annulus Pressure test of Xmas tree =

provides inflow test of inflow test of valves and
tubing hanger, pressure test Xmas tree connection to
of CSG (secondary barrier) wellhead.
and pressure test of
production packer.
Testing Barriers
Positive plug prevents the flow from either direction
If it is not possible to perform inflow test for installed plug, then it should be pressure tested
from above (except the dead well can not do inflow test).
Test of SSD above top packer after closing by pressure test the annulus.
Page....183
2.7 Design Test Pressures
ªAPI's pressure classes are based on working pressures of 2M, 3M, 5M, 10M, 15M and 20M.
Where IVI = 1,000 psi (test before deployment).
ª2 times working pressure up to and including 5M equipment.
ª1.5 times working pressure for 10M and 15M equipment.
ª1.25 times working pressure for 20IVI equipment.
When equipment is being installed and during the operation phase, it is leak tested to the given
working pressure (means that test to maximum anticipated working pressure that equipment
withstand, BOP, plugs etc.
2.8 Valve Operation in Flowing Wells

ªBefore conducting well intervention, pressure test Xmas tree valves.
ªOpening the valve under pressure can damage other equipment and need to equalize pressure
before opening.
ªOpen the closed valve while having pressure on the other side may cause damage to the valve
and equipment downstream of the valve (due to great differential pressure).
ªDHSV is the last valve to be closed during the emergency shut-in.
2.9 Shutting in Well at Xmas Tree

ªValves can be damaged if they are closed on a tool string.
ªUse the upper master valve if there is nothing in the hole.
ªSome Master valves can close and cut the wireline.
ªThe lower master valve is not normally used.
ªCounting the turns while operating the valve.
ªAfter closing, a manual valve should be backed out a part of turn.
Page....184
2.10 Volume Calculation
Page....185
API Unit Formula-6
Time to Pump (minutes)
Tubing = Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD (ft)

Pump rate (bbl/min)
Annulus = Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MD (ft)

Pump rate (bbl/min)
Page....186
Sample:
Casing 7" 32 lb/ft, 6.094" ID, set @ 11,436'MD/TVD
Tubing- 2-7/8", 7.9 lb/ft, 2.265" ID
End of Tubing : 11,300 ft.
Packer set@ : 11,290 ft.
SSD - set @ : 11,190 ft.
Pump output : 0.1044 bb/stks.
Perforations : top 11,353 ft. bottom 11,393 ft.
1. Annulus capacity : [(6.094)2 - (2.875)2]/1029.4 = 0.028 bbl/ft

2. Tubing capacity : (2.265)2 / 1029.4 - 0.0050 bbl/ft
3. Casing capacity : (6.094)2 / 1029.4 - 0.0361 bbl/ft
4. Total Barrels in Annulus above Packer = 0.028 x 11,290 - 316.6 bbls
5. Total Barrels and Strokes to Reverse circulation through SSD:-
Barrels in Annulus = 0.028 x 11,190 = 313.35 bbls
Barrels in Tubing = 0.0050 x 11,190 - 55.95 bbls
Total barrels for reverse circulation - 313.35+55.95 = 369.3 bbls
Total strokes for reverse circulation = 369.3/0.1044 = 3537.4 stks
6. Total barrels to bullhead down the tubing to the bottom perforation with 2
barrels over displacement and surface volume is 2 barrels-
Volume in casing below packer - 0.0361 x 103 = 3.72 bbls
Volume in tubing = 0.0050 x 11,300 = 56.50 bbls
Total volume for bull heading - 3.72+56.50+2+2 = 64.2 bbls
Total strokes for bull heading = 64.2/0.1044 = 615 stks
Page....187
2.11 Kill Fluid
ªCompatibility with formation and formation fluids (drilling fluid not need).
ªAppropriate weight to kill well and avoid too much weight causing excessive over pressure.
Kill Fluid Density = Formation Pressure

0.052 x TVD (ft)
Kill Fluid Density (ppg)
= Original Fluid Density (ppg) + SIWHP psi

0.052 x Top of Perforation in feet. (TVD)
2.11.1 Well Killing Methods
Forward Circulation.
ªReverse circulation.
ªBull Heading (through tubing).
ªBleed-off/Lubrication (through tubing)
(= Volumetric Method on Drilling).
2.11.2 Reverse Circulation
ªPreferred method in planned well kill operations (kill faster).
ªMain advantages:
ªAll wells can normally be killed.
ªBoth tubing and annulus end up with comparable kill fluid.
ªSurface pressure is low.
ªLess danger of formation damage.
ªLift solid more easily when in a large hole.
Page....188
2.11.3 Bull Heading
ªUsed in emergency during a well intervention operation and it becomes necessary, to kill the
well.
ªFailed DHSV (what kinds of failure??).
ªCannot establish circulation.
ªInsufficient information to calculate a reverse circulation kill (volume & Weight).
ªWhen speed is important.
ªCan only be performed when perforation is opened.
ªCan plug formation with scales or solids from inside the completion string.
ªLimit by working pressure rating of surface equipment.
ªBurst limit of completion.
ªFormation permeability.
ªFracture of the formation.
Page....189
2.11.4 Key Practices for Reverse Circulation and Bull heading
Reverse Circulation
Calculate volume both in Tubing and Annulus based on SSD depth.
Some overbalance required during reversely circulate Kill fluid from

SSD up to tubing.
Bull heading
Calculate tubing volume from surface down to production packer

plus volume in casing below packer until top and bottom perforation
if requested.
Total volume may include tubing volume + volume below packer

plus volume of surface lines and "upfront" kill fluid (acid7sea
water)which go into the Formation.
Note: Formation pressure always calculated based on top of

perforation depth.
2.11.5 Bleed off and Lubricating
ªCan be performed when emergency and not possible to bullhead.
ªRepeatedly bleed off small well pressure and pump small amount of fluid while maintaining
BHP constant.
ªIt is a killing method which required time consume
Page....190
2.12 Problems
ªFree gas in the well.
ªSwab and surge pressure.
ªThief zone.
ªString washout.
ªBlockages in the well.
ªHydrates.
2.12.1 Example of Problems (Gas Cap, Thief zone)

ªShut in the well and pressure slowly build up due to gas cap (Bull heading Gas) forming in well
bore (stabilized fairly quick).
ªThief zone can limit circulation back to surface (depleted more than other zones).
ªCleaning the sand and scale problem in well with thief zone would need to use LCM to stop any
losses into the thief zone.
2.12.2 Free Gas in the Well

ªBleeding off gas (Joule-Thomson) (decrease in Temp, due to Freezing after across valve i.e. gas
pressure fall thus expands and losses energy) :Brittle fracture in pipe (stainless steel), valves
and e.t.c.
ªGas migration (gas migrate up to surface in connection with uninhibited seawater if used as a
displaced fluid in well, will form hydrate).
ªBullheading gas (well shut-in with gas on top).
ªHydrates (gas + water = crystalline).
Page....191
2.12.3 Hydrates
ªCan damage well bore and intervention equipment (due to crystalline compound of Hydrate).
ªCan cause damage if they becomes free at high differential pressure.
ªCan only form in the presence of free water.
ªLikely to form at high pressures than low pressure well.
ªLikely to form downstream of chokes or at pressure relief valves or emergency blow-down line.
ªCan also be prevented or removed by injecting chemicals or raising the temperature of

equipment used.
ªInjecting methanol, glycol or brine can reduce formation of hydrates (Inhibitors).
ªInjecting distilled water cannot prevent the hydrates (why?).
2.12.4 Surge & Swab Pressure

ªSurge = Piston power.
ªSwab = Suction power.
Surge and Swab are function of:
ªThe clearance of well wall and downhole equipments.
ªType of fluid (completion fluid has higher pressure).
ªTrip/run speed.
ªLength of components with has a large diameter.
ªAcceleration / retardation speed (high speed high pressure).
Swab will be maximum when we trip out intervention equipments close to the reservoir.
Page....192
2.12.5 String Washout
2.9.6 Coil Tubing String Washout.
ªCoiled tubing fracture at surface (especially at the goose neck, related shut-in procedure, see
CT section).
ªCoiled tubing break in the well (kill the well first before pulling out the coil).
ªBlockage the well (sand, scale, mechanical. See methods to remove the blocks; mechanical &
chemical).
2.12.6 Management of Operations

Planning
ªStart-up meeting.
ªSystem of communication.
ªWell program.
ªEmergency procedures.
ªOrganization - well killing.
ªAbnormal Operations.
2.12.7 Conditions necessary for work to conduct safely:

ªUsing tested, inspected and well maintained equipment.
ªHold pre-job safety meeting before start working.
ªHave crew properly trained in what to do when equipment fails.
ªOrganize meeting to discuss plan, get feed back, make changes and get everyone to agree and
understand.
ªDocument for responsibility of concerned party in emergency case.
ªIntervention Equipment Operator to shut in the well when pressure control problem arise
during well intervention operations.
Page....193
2.13 Abnormal conditions occurred during well intervention operation

which are not fully understood:
The well must be;
1. Shut in and secured then need to analyze the problem and seek out solutions.
Page....194
Chapter - 2 Problem
PROBLEMS
3.1 Free gas in the well
3.1.1 Bleeding off gas (Joule-Thomson Effect)

When we have flow through a pipe or a valve we may find that the temperature of
the flowing medium is lower than the ambient temperature. The difference
between the ambient temperature and the temperature of the flow is known as the
Joule-Thomson Effect.
When gas pressure falls (through a pipeline or across a valve) the gas expands
and loses energy. If the expansion of the gas takes place with constant enthalpy
(H = U (internal energy) + PV (pressure x volume) = constant), some of the
energy will manifest itself as a reduction in temperature due to the lower
pressure.
Normally, temperature falls by about half a degree Celsius per bar of pressure
drop, i.e. 100 bar pressure drop will produce a 50 degree fall in temperature.
NB: bleeding off gas at low temperature, with a large pressure drop and low
outlet pressure may result in brittle fracture in pipelines and other equipment.
Stainless steel may suffer from brittle fracture at temperatures as "high" as-20° C.
3.1.2 Gas migration

In the course of well operations it is usual to displace the well with seawater,
which does not provide a stable "seal" against the formation, with the result that
hydrocarbons and/or gas will gradually migrate to the surface. In order to keep
the gas away we normally after-pump at a rate, for example of 100 Ipm, either
continuously or periodically while the workover is in progress.
Gas that migrates to the surface - in connection with uninhibited seawater- may
produce hydrate problems. We often notice an increased "drag" in the equipment
when we are pulling out of a well (above the DHSV) or we may observe plugging
in the surface equipment itself. Occasionally, the well may become blocked - this
is a serious matter and means a risk of several days to even months of delay
before the well returns to the state it was in before the well operation.
Page....195
Chapter - 2 Problem
3.1.3 Bullheading gas
Wells that are being shut in stabilise fairly quickly, with the gas on top, followed
by an oil phase and an aqueous phase at the bottom. A test performed on a
Gullfaks well a few years ago (above a closed DHSV) showed the phases to be in
stable equilibrium after 30 minutes.
Gas bullheading requires a good flow rate and inhibited fluid ahead of the gas. It
is good practice to inhibit the volume down to the safety valve (this valve is
normally installed so deep that the temperature will prevent hydrate formation).
In the event of any problems during this start-up phase, the inhibited fluid will
prevent the formation of hydrates if the operation has to be stopped.
It is good practice to maintain a bullheading rate of 1 m/s or more (theoretical

calculations have shown that 0.3 m/s may occasionally be sufficient). This will
give a well-defined fluid front during the first part of the operation, which will
help to minimise the chances of hydrate formation.
When the liquid meets the gas, the latter will be compressed. This process
becomes evident in the form of a major reduction in pumping pressure during the
first phase of the displacement process. It occasionally happens that the gas is
compressed so much that it moves into the liquid phase.
NB: pumping pressure in connection with gas-injection and WAG wells (in the
gas phase) must be monitored in order to prevent formation fracture. This is due
to the low gas gradient, which normally offers narrow margins against
fracturing.
3.1.4 Gas + water = hydrates
Seawater is the most frequently used liquid in well operations. It is free and easily
available. However, the disadvantage of seawater is that it forms a crystalline
compound with gas (density 0.88 - 0.90 g/cm3 at low temperatures and high
pressures.
The seawater is inhibited in order to prevent hydrate formation. We also normally

use inhibited liquid during the testing of intervention equipment (coiled tubing,
snubbing, wireline) before we open the equipment to the well.
Page....196
Chapter - 2 Problem
3.2. Swab and surge pressure
3.2.1 Surge pressure

The expression "surge" refers to the piston power (overpressure) that arises when the
downhole string is run into the well. Surge pressure is a function of the following
conditions:
ª
Clearance between the well wall and downhole equipment (small clearance
means high pressure)
ª
Type of fluids in the well (completion fluid produces a higher pressure than
oil/gas)
ª
Trip/run speed (high speed produces high pressure)
ª
Length of the components in the downhole equipment with largest diameter (long
components produce highest pressures)
ª
Acceleration/retardation speed (high speed produces high pressure).
In a perforated hydrocarbon well, surge pressures will arise locally around the
downhole equipment and will not result in global effects until they are close to the
reservoir. In wells that are producing sand there may be sand in the horizontal part of the
well, which is pushed on by or reinforces the surge effect when we enter the well.
In a scaled-over well or a well with poor injectivity, the surge pressure may produce
pressure pulses that are greater than the reservoir's fracture resistance.
In an imperforated well the effect of pressure pulses will rise the deeper we go into the
well (as in the case of the piston in a bicycle pump as it is pushed in).
The consequences of surge pressure may include the activation of pressure-actuated

equipment in the downhole string and circulation devices.
Entering a well also results in a general rise in pressure which leads to an injection into
the reservoir, equivalent to the displaced liquid volume of the equipment.
Example: If we enter the well with a 2 7/8" string and a running speed of 250 m/h - this
will result in aminjection rate of 1.05 m3/h = 17.5 Ipm. This can be compensated for by
bleeding off via the choke (to the test separator) while we are running in equipment.
In entering an unperforated well it is particularly important to bleed off a volume

equivalent to the volume displaced by the equipment. There are cases of this having
been forgotten, with the result that wells have been perforated several thousand metres
above the reservoir.
Page....197
Chapter - 2 Problem
3.2.2 Swab pressure
Swab pressure is the piston effect that occurs when downhole equipment is
pulled from the well.
The size of the swab pressure is dependent on such conditions as:
Clearance between the well wall and downhole equipment (small clearance
ª
means high pressure)
Type of fluids in the well (completion fluid produces a higher pressure than
ª
oil/gas)
Trip/run speed (high speed produces high pressure)
ª
Length of the components in the downhole equipment with largest diameter
ª
(long components produce the highest pressures)
Acceleration/retardation speed (high speed produces high pressure)
ª
The effect will be greatest when the downhole string is close to the reservoir
ª
and causes hydrocarbons to be drawn out of the reservoir
When we trip the intervention equipment out of the well it will naturally fill
ª
up/produce a volume equivalent to that displaced by the equipment. If this is
not desirable, we need to inject an equivalent volume of diesel oil or
inhibited seawater as we pull the equipment. Such a procedure is normal
following gravel packing.
3.3. String washout
3.3.1 Snubbing string
Washout of the snubbing string is usually registered in the form of an unexpected

fall in pumping pressure without a change in choke pressure.
This is a critical occurrence since the DHSVs are not capable of maintaining the
well pressure for long. The pumping pressure is reduced to well pressure and the
"kelly cock" valve is closed. We then start to clear the well for killing.
Washout is usually due to normal erosion caused by sand washing, but may also
be caused by chemical conditions and faulty materials. Washout occurs
extremely seldom.
Page....198
Chapter - 2 Problem
3.3.2 Coiled tubing
Coiled tubing may fracture above or below the "injector head".
Break above the "injector head"
The procedure to be followed involves stopping the coil and closing slips and
pipe rams in the BOP.
If we observe that the well is flowing into the coil (leaky back-pressure valve),
the shear ram should be closed, the coil pulled up by about 0.5 m and the blind
ram closed. We then start to kill the well by filling the coil below the BOP with
kill fluid, and the rest of the well by bullheading via the Xmas tree.
If we see that the BPV is tight, we pull the coil from the well and replace it.
Break below the "injector head"
This results in well pressure entering the coil so that the well has to be killed
before the coil can be pulled. See preceding section: "Break above injector
head".
Coiled tubing is liable to "pitholing". Due to the length of the coil, it may be
difficult to empty it of all liquids after use (e.g. acid, chemicals, seawater). The
liquids remain on the low side of the well and may corrode holes in the coil.
Welds in coiled tubing are also liable to suffer from cracks or fractures. These
have always been among the most frequent fracture sites. This may also occur as
a result of fatigue or collapse of the tubing when the first part of the coiled tubing
has passed the stripper rubber.
Page....199
Chapter - 2 Problem
3.4. Blockages in the well
3.4.1 Blockage mechanisms in wells
The blockage mechanisms we refer to include:
ª
Formation sand (from sand-producing wells)
ª
Scale
ª
Mechanical blockages (collapsed casings, liners, "patchers", "straddle packers",
jammed valves and downhole strings
3.4.2 Bursting of the completion string as a result of sudden blockages
This situation may be of relevance for gas injection and WAG (Water Alternating Gas)
wells. Such wells are often operated close to their design limits, with the result that they
have no safety margin in reserve to cope with bursts. In the event of a sudden blockage
(mechanical collapse) the safety systems will normally be unable to react before the
completion string has burst. The explosive force arises from the mass energy % m x v,
which is transformed from kinetic into potential energy.
We also find this effect when we run downhole strings with closed lower ends (shear
disks). There have been many cases of valves and packers being set too early on their
way into wells because the driller has stopped the string too suddenly.
3.4.3 Removing blockages
There are normally two ways of doing this:
a) By mechanical methods
b) By means of chemicals
Mechanical methods require the use of intervention equipment such as wireline, coiled
tubing or pressure tubing equipment.
Wireline equipment can be fitted with jars or accelerators capable of breaking through
obstacles such as scale (by breaking it up) or by fragmenting them in cases where we try
to fish up equipment that has been lost in the well. If the blockage is caused by ice and
we have an electric cable we can melt a channel through the hydrate plug with a melting
tool and a pump at the end of the cable.
If we have coiled tubing or pressure tubing available we can use a jar to hit the obstacle
upwards or downwards. We can also use a motor andmilling machine to drill or mill a
Page....200
Chapter - 2 Problem
passage through the restriction. If we use pressure tubing the string can be rotated
within the range of the jack stroke - normally 2 - 2.5 m - which is an effective way of
cleaning the hole (though rotation also causes wear on the completion string).
Chemical methods involve pumping chemicals down to the region of the restriction.
We allow the chemicals to react for a while, and produce them by the same route up
again. In order to prevent the process from becoming unstable, it may be necessary to
add more chemicals at the surface before the original chemicals enter the process.
3.5. Hydrates
3.5.1 Conditions under which hydrates form
The following conditions are necessary for the formation of hydrates:
ª
Presence of free water
ª
Presence of light gas molecules
ª
Relatively high pressure
ª
Relatively low temperature.
Hydrates consist of water in a crystal lattice structure mixed with light gas components.
1 m3 of hydrate contains approximately 0.8 m3 water and 180 m3 gas.
For a stable hydrate to form, the gas needs to be saturated with water vapour (the dew-
point of the water is higher than the temperature of the system).
An example of a classical case of hydrate formation is a valve located in a vertical pipe

system. Above the valve, three phases rapidly form, with water at the bottom and lying
on the valve. Similarly, directly underneath the valve the will be gas. If the valve leaks
the gas will seep up from beneath the valve into the liquid phase above the valve, and
under certain pressure and temperature conditions, hydrates may be formed.
Page....201
Chapter - 2 Problem
The following methods can be employed to remove hydrates:
ª Lower pressure
ª Raise temperature
ª Use an inhibitor.
Pressure reduction
For any given temperature, we must reduce the pressure to below the equilibrium
curve, so that the lattice bonds in the hydrates begin to dissolve. This process requires
energy, which it takes from itself, (the temperature in the melt will fall), and the rate of
melting will then be a function of how easily the hydrate plug has access to the ambient
temperature. If the pipeline or vessel is insulated, the melting process will take longer
than in an uninsulated pipe or vessel.
NB: in a well in which a hydrate plug has formed, reducing pressure can be risky. If the
hydrate plug slips and there is gas between the plug and the surface system, the plug
may shoot through the Xmas tree topside and cause a blowout (until we are able to close
the DHSV).
If we have hydrates in a pipeline or vessel, the pressure must be reduced by an equal

amount on both sides of the plug in order to prevent it from moving as it melts.
Temperature rise
We raise the temperature while maintaining constant pressure. The heat will break up
the lattice structure in the plug.
NB: if the volume is constant, (i.e. if the gas that is released has nowhere to expand
into), the process will stop of its own accord as the rising pressure within the enclosed
volume will cause a change in equilibrium conditions. This pressure can be extremely
high - up to several thousand bar.
Use of inhibitor
Methanol, glycol and salt can all dissolve hydrates. When these substances come into
contact with hydrates, the equilibrium curve in the area of contact will change, but at
the same time, the inhibitory effect will be used up. If the effect is to be maintained
while the hydrates are being dissolved, inhibitor must be added either continuously or
batch-wise.
Page....202
3.5.3 Risks in connection with removing hydratesAs mentioned in section 5.2, dissolving
hydrates within a constant volume is risky. Generally speaking, we need to ensure that
it is possible to bleed off volume, i.e. to maintain control of the pressure. It is
particularly important to monitor the pressure.
Removal of hydrate plug from completion string
A hydrate plug in a completion string will normally be localised above the DHSV,
where the temperature is so low that hydrates can form. The DHSV is normally
installed so deep that hydrates cannot form. The DHSV should be closed - even if it is
not 100% tight it will reduce the energy behind the plug if the plug should work loose.
We then dissolve the plug by bleeding off gas and pumping in methanol repeatedly.
This operation may require several days before the plug is dissolved. Here we have to
make sure that there is always liquid between the plug and the wellhead. If the plug
loosens, the liquid will immediately dampen the energy that is released , while gas
would permit the plug to accelerate to an enormous velocity by the time it reaches the
wellhead and Xmas tree, which of course is not very desirable.
An alternative method is to melt the plug using a melting tool and pump run in on an
electric cable. The pressure above the plug is maintained at a constant level - i.e. we
need to bleed off the gas liberated by the melting process. If we have a suspicion that the
pressure below the plug may be higher than above it, we should inject liquid inhibitor
between the plug and the topside equipment.
Removal of hydrate plug in flowing pipelines on the seabed.
In such cases we must first close the valve on the seabed and then lower the pressure on
both sides of the plug in the pipeline via the service umbilical/line and the topside
connection to the pipeline. We must try to reduce the pressure on both sides in order to
avoid damaging the pipeline, at bends, for example, in the event of the plug loosening
under unbalanced pressure conditions.
Removal of hydrate plug in topside system

The appropriate procedure is to reduce the pressure on both sides of the plug.
We can also employ heat, e.g. steam, but we must be sure that the liberated gas is
capable of expanding, i.e. monitor the pressure within the volume in which the gas is
liberated. NB: manometers are also capable of freezing- giving a false impression of
security.
Page....203
4 MANAGEMENT OF OPERATIONS
4.1 Planning before start of operations
4.1.1 General
Well operations and their planning are project-oriented. The success of a project
will be a function of the quality of the planning process (use of appropriate
expertise, building on previous experience, best practice), the ability to make the
right decision at the right time, clearly defined interfaces, and the various parties
involved accepting their own responsibilities.
Before the start of an operation an onshore start-up meeting will normally be held,
where the key personnel involved in the planning process go through the
operation with the "executive" personnel. Similar meetings will also be set up
offshore in order to familiarise all parties with their respective tasks, roles and
responsibilities during the operation.
Systems of communication must be defined, both internally at project level

offshore and between the offshore and onshore organisations. The offshore
operation will normally be supported by the land-based organisation. It is also
usual to establish a shift-based system onshore so that key personnel can be
consulted in the event of technical or logistical problems.
Activities for the coming 24 hours are identified and included in a daily plan. It is
also usual to draw up plans on a longer time-scale, covering personnel, equipment
and call-out times.
he well programme is supported by operational manuals which are drawn up by

the operator, contractor and/or producer. Examples of such manuals include:
ªProject plan/project handbook

ªWell operation manual
ªInstallation-specific procedures
ªOfficial requirements
ªOperators' and contractors' procedures
ªChanges and deviations
ªLists of contents
ªExperience data
ªSafety procedures and criteria (risk analyses, back-up plans and plans for
dealing with losses of barriers)
Page....204
Chapter -2 Problems
The operator must draw the attention of the contractor to current HSE objectives
and risk acceptance criteria. Safety meetings must be heldoffshore in order to
ensure that all personnel are aware of the operational limits of the operation. This
applies also to requirements regarding barriers, pollution control, fire and
explosion prevention measures and protective measures to be taken against toxic
and/or hazardous environmental conditions.
Good communications are important:

ª "Hand-over" meetings must be held at all levels when operational personnel
are replaced, at the end of shifts, coffee breaks, ?? lunch // launch ??
ª Daily meetings with the shore organisation should be held, to discuss the
previous 24 hours of the operation, accident/incidents, progress,
requirements for materials and forthcoming activities.
ª The archive for the operation should be available both onshore and offshore.
4.1.2 Emergency procedures
There are several situations in well operations which involve a change in status
from a safe condition to an unsafe or emergency situation.
ª
The pressure in one or more annuli rises or falls drastically
ª
Failure of a well barrier
ª
Failure of intervention equipment barrier
ª
Gas leak in the area of the well or process equipment
ª
Abnormal situations (bad weather, parallel activities).
Is we lose a well barrier, the well must be shut in, and compensatory measures
must be implemented in order to maintain safety levels until barrier no. 2 has been
established or activated.
When a well intervention is in progress and we lose the primary barrier in the
intervention equipment, the secondary barrier must be activated immediately.
This requires attention and a rapid response.
On certain installations all wells may be required to be shut in if a barrier in one

well is lost. This will be determined by specific operator requirements, which are
often related to the number and type of parallel activities.
Page....205
Chapter -2 Problems
4.1.3 Organisation - well killing
A well-kill plan is normally drawn up in advance of an operation. This plan must

identify the personnel who will perform the kill operation. Under normal
circumstances only a minimum number of personnel are require for the kill
operation, while the remaining personnel are withdrawn to safe positions (e.g.
lifeboats, muster stations).
Examples of personnel required for well killing:

ª Fire chief
ª Cementer (pump operator)
ª Intervention equipment foreman (wireline, coiled tubing, snubbing tubing).
ª Intervention equipment operator
ª Operator of hydraulic pump to DHSV and hydraulic master valve
ª Derrick operator.
During well operations a kill pill is often used in combination with clear kill fluid
(brine) to kill the well. The kill pill is pumped down to the perforation zone and is
forced into the perforations. The "squeeze" often needs to be repeated (hesitation
squeeze). The column of kill fluid should be in overbalance (10 bars or more)
relative to reservoir pressure in order to keep the kill pill in position. Drilling fluid
can be utilised as an alternative to the brine/kill pill combination.
The well killing process may follow this sequence of procedures:

1. The kill pill is mixed and made ready.
2. X m3 seawater are pumped into the well to displace hydrocarbons in the
uppermost pat of the well.
3. The kill pill is pumped in.
4. The kill pill is displaced by means of killing fluid (of the correct specific
gravity) at a pumping rate that is higher than the gas dispersal rate (e.g.
1000 Ipm).
5. The pumping rate is lowered before the kill pill reaches the perforations
(e.g. to 200 Ipm).
6. The kill pill is squeezed into the perforations at a given overpressure (lower
than the fracturing pressure of the formation).
7. The pump is stopped and killing is completed when the rate of pressure
reduction is lower than 1.5 bar/min. If the rate of pressure reduction is
higher, continue to squeeze the kill pill into the perforations and monitor
pressure bleed-off.
Page....206
Chapter -2 Problems
5.6.2. Abnormal operations
5.2.1 Loss of barriers
The following is a list of examples of barriers that may fail duringan operation (or
during testing in advance of an operation):
ª
Killing fluid that loses its hydrostatic overbalance vis-a-vis the
perforations/formation:
The kill pill dissolves and killing fluid flows into the formation Killing
fluid flows slowly into the formation ?? Barytes in the drilling mud "sags"
out
ª
BOP
ª
Unperforated and cemented liner is being tested for overpressure
resistance:
Leak in the liner shoe
Leak in the liner
Leak in the tubing hanger/packer
ª
Inflow-tested cement plug or mechanical plug in the casing above the
perforations
ª
Plugs installed internally in the casing, which isolate open perforations and
which have been inflow tested
ª
BOP valves, "stuffing box", "stripper bowl" for wireline, coiled tubing or
pressure tubing operations
ª
"Safety head" located between the Xmas tree and the rigging for wireline,
coiled tubing or pressure tubing equipment
ª
Manual and hydraulic master valves in the Xmas tree
ª
Production string and production packer (annular BOP) The production
packer should preferably be tested in the direction: from the formation
towards the surface
ª
Packers around the tubing hanger and annulus valves in the wellhead
ª
Downhole safety valve.
Page....207
Chapter -2 Problems
5.2.2 Removal of hydrates
Types of well in which we should be particularly observant regarding hydrates

include the following:
ª Water Alternating Gas wells (WAG
ª Gas injection wells
ª Subsea wells with long flowline
ª Gas-lift wells
Example: If the DHSV has not been installed at a hydrate-free depth and the valve
is leaky (the NPD requires it to be installed 50 m below the seabed), gas that leaks
from the underside of the well into the aqueous phase above it may form a hydrate
plug.
Removing hydrates is a risky process, which must be performed under careful
control. Hydrates liberate gas as they dissolve. If the gas is unableto expand it
will create a high pressure that may be capable of rupturing the vessel containing
the hydrate plug.
Pressure reduction involves reducing the pressure until the plug releases gas (Pi)
and bleeding off several bars pressure to P2, waiting for a few minutes and
pumping in inhibited liquid (salt, methanol, glycol) while allowing the pressure
to rise again to Pi. We then wait a few minutes and bleed down again to P2, and so
on. This process is known as lubrication.
Hydrates in flowlines are removed by reducing the pressure by equal amounts on

both sides of the plug.
Melting tools for operation on an electric cable are available (wireline operation).
These tools are lowered down to the hydrate plug and melting commences while
a pump circulates the melted liquid at the top of the plug.
We can also pump in heated fluid into a well if it is equipped with gas-lift valves -
however the pressure rise in the annulus may result in even more gas in the
completion string if the annulus is full of gas.
Hydrates can be dissolved by means of methanol, glycol or salt. Methanol is

efficient, but it is lighter than water and thus tends to be unable to sink into the
plug. Glycol (MEG, DEG or TEG) is heavier than water, but somewhat less
Page....208
Chapter -2 Problems
efficient that methanol. Salt is another efficient means of dissolving hydrates. We
can obtain a good effect primarily by flushing or washing the fluid into the
hydrate plug. If we use coiled tubing or pressure tubing for tasks of this sort it is
essential to maintain a balance of pressure above and below the plug during the
washing process.
5.2.3 Forming an ice plug as a barrier
This is absolutely the last way out when we have lost one or more barriers and
have been unable to replace them in order to be able to continue with the
operation. This may happen in such situations as:
ª
Overhauling or removing the Xmas tree or BOP
ª
Removing jammed equipment from the BOP or Xmas tree.
The method involves forcing a mixture of fresh water and bentonite into the upper
section of the well (approx. 150 - 300 m). We then pump in dry ice, which freezes
the freshwater/bentonite mixture (liquid nitrogen can also be used), The length of
ice plug required is given by the following formula:
L = OD of tubing (in) x WHP (psi)/1000
The time require for freezing is around one hour per inch of pipe diameter.
The plug is pressure tested before we begin to work on the Xmas tree or BOP.The
temperature of the wellhead (ice plug) must be monitored as long as work
continues over the wellhead, and the ice plug must be maintained in condition if
the temperature of the outside of the wellhead begins to rise.
Dangers associated with the use of ice plugs include:
ª
Brittle fracture of the wellhead or its components
ª
Fracture of the well head due to expansion of the freezing water
ª
Leaks in the packers due to low temperatures.
"Hot-tapping" of the wellhead before the freezing process commences is usually

also neededin order to gain access to the completion string.
Page....209
Chapter -2 Problems
5.2.4 Well killing
This is performed either as an urgent action because the situation requires it (loss
of barriers, other conditions) or a part of a plan for regaining a lost barrier (e.g. as
a result of re-completion).
In most cases we have plenty of time, and are able to evaluate/plan the most
appropriate killing method. Occasionally we will be short of time due to marine
environmental factors (e.g. when working on board a floater), explosion danger,
toxic gases, etc.
Example: if there is a gas leak to the atmosphere we can pump seawater

(bullheading) while we plan corrective measures to deal with the problem.
5.2.5 Leaks
By definition, barriers are tight. The IWCF does not regard the DHSV as a barrier,
although it is regarded as such on the Norwegian shelf, in spite of the fact that we
regard it as tight if it leaks less than:
0.4 l/min (liquid)

15 scf/min (gas)
Leaks to the atmosphere are not permitted. Small leaks which are not detected can
be more dangerous than large leaks which are registered by gas detectors. When
the concentration of gas rises above the lower explosion threshold - an explosion
can occur.
During well operations, in the event of a leak in a primary barrier the secondary
barrier is activated and this is used while we replace a packer set or re-establish
the primary barrier.
Page....210
Chapter -2 Problems
5.2.6 Fire and explosion
Fires and explosions produce particularly dangerous situations, which require

immediate closing of valves between the well and the fire, so that the seriousness
of the fire can be limited. Such situations also require the well itself to be shut in.
If the shut-in panel is not accessible (e.g. in the case of a fire in the control cabin or
if the operator has been injured), we must use the backup panel, which should be
located elsewhere (e.g. on a different deck or side of the well zone). If a wireline
operation is in progress without the use of a back-up panel, the hydraulic master
valve must be closed.
If the fire has due to an explosion the resulting pressure front (and the subsequent
under-pressure) may cause severe physical damage. If the fire is given time to
develop, equipment will become deformed and cease to function.
Wellhead equipment is normally designed to withstand an oil fire at 1000° C for

one hour, before closed valves start to leak and provide further fuel for the fire.
Fires and explosions must first be reported, before action is taken to shut in
equipment and then to extinguish the fire.
If the well cannot be shut in we face the risk of a blowout. The radiated heat may
be so high that parts of the platform can melt down. Shutting in such blowouts
requires special expertise, and it may take several months to bring the operation
to an end.
Page....211
Chapter -3 Completion Equipments
3.0 Completion Equipments
ª Equipment placed in the well after the
brought into use as a producer or injector
ª Consist of completion string with
individual components and Xmas tree at
the top of the well
ª Maximizes the safe recovery of
hydrocarbons from a gas or oil well
throughout its producing life.
ª Gives an effective means of pressurizing
selected zones in water injection wells.
Downhole accessories used should be designed to

provide the safe installation and retrieval of the
completion, and flexibility for sub-surface
maintenance of the well using wireline, coiled
tubing or other methods.
Even though different types of wells present distinct

design and installation problems for well engineers,
most completions are just variations on a few basic
designs types and, therefore, the equipment used is
fairly standard.
An overview of the equipment commonly used in

single and dual string completions is given in the
following sections. The detailed operation of some
the items such as sliding side doors (SSD), side
pocket mandrels (SPM) and packers will not be
covered in this manual. However, the relative
location of these tools in a completion and their
functions in intervention work or workovers will be
addressed. The following Figure shows a schematic
drawing illustrating the location of equipment in a
typical oil well completion. Each common item in
the completion string is described in the following
sections.
Page....212
3.1 Monobore Completion
ª
Having approximately the same internal diameter
throughout the well
ª
Eliminating restriction on which cable tools and coiled
tubing were liable to catch
ª
Virtually free of Tubing Nipple profiles
3.2 Production Packers
ª
Isolate annulus from casing below the packer and the
tubing bore
ª
Act as a barrier and must be no leakages of
hydrocarbon/pressure pass the packer
ª
When the production packer is set, it is normally tested
both from above and below
ª
Normally be set above and close to the top perforation
ª
Permanent or Retrievable type
3.3 Permanent Packers
ª
Most common type
ª
Can be retrieved only by milling it out.
ª
Can be run as part of the completion string or as part of the
tail pipe.
ª
Can be set hydraulically, mechanical method or using
explosive.
ª
Having double set of slips working in different directions.
Page....213
3.3.3 Locator Tubing Seal Assemblies
Locator tubing seal assemblies are fitted with a series of external seals providing an
effectiv seal between the tubing and packer bore. They also have a No-Go type locator for
position determination within the packer. Locator seal assemblies are normally space out
so that the can accommodate both upward and downward tubing movement induced by
changes in temperature and pressure.
3.3.4 Seal Bore Extensions
A seal bore extension is used to provide additional sealing bore length when a longer seal
assembly is run to accommodate greater tubing movement. The seal bore extension is run
below the packer and has the same ID as the packer.
Page....214
3.3.5 Anchor Tubing Seal Assemblies
Anchor tubing seal assemblies, are used where it is necessary to anchor the tubing to a
permanent packer while retaining the option to unlatch when required. Anchor latches are
normally used where well conditions require the tubing to be landed in tension or where
insufficient weight is available to prevent seal movement.
3.3.6 Polished Bore Receptacles (PBR)
A PBR is simply a seal receptacle attached to the top of a permanent packer or liner hanger
packer in which the seal assembly lands instead of the packer bore. As the PBR bore can
be made larger than the packer, this provides a larger flow area through the seal assembly.
Page....215
3.4 Retrievable Packers
ª
Can be run as part of the completion string
ª
Can only be removed together with the
production string
ª
Having a set of slips, in which the packer
element or sealing element is located
either under or over the slips
Page....216
3.5 Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM) or Gas Lift Valves
Circulation Equipment
Sample of Circulating Equipments
ª Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)
a Gas lift valves
b Dummy valves
c Chemical injection valves
d Circulation valves
e Differential dump kill valves
f Equalizing valves.
It is essential to understand the operation of the device installed in an SPM before conducting
any well intervention as it may affect well control.
3.5.1 Side Pocket Mandrel

There are many different designs for gas lift valves for various applications. They range from
being simple orifice valves to pressure operated bellows type valves. However, they all
contain check valves to prevent tubing to annulus flow. These check valves may leak after a
period of use and they should never be relied on as barriers in a well control situation. These
should be replaced with dummy valves and the tubing pressure tested to confirm integrity.
3.5.2 Dummy Valves

These are tubing/annulus isolation valves. They are installed in place of the valves in order that
the completion tubing string can be pressure tested from both sides during installation or when
well service operations are required.
3.53 Chemical Injection Valves

The injection valve is designed to control the flow of chemicals injected into the production
fluid at the depth of the valve. A spring provides the force necessary to maintain the valve in the
failsafe closed position. Reverse flow check valves, which prevent backflow and circulation
from the tubing to the casing, are included as an integral part of the valve assembly. Injection
chemicals enter the valve from the annulus in an open injection system. (This requires the
annulus to be full of the desired chemical. An alternative method is to run an injection line from
surface to the SPM.) When the hydraulic pressure of the injected chemicals overcomes the pre-
set tension in the valve spring plus the pressure in the tubing, the valve opens. Chemicals then
flow through the crossover seat in the valve and into the tubing.
3.5.4 Circulating Valves

These are recommended to be installed in the SPM whenever any circulating is to carried out.
The circulating valve is designed to enable circulation of fluid through the SPM without
Page....217
damaging the pocket. The valve allows fluid to be dispersed from both ends allowing
circulation of fluid at a minimal pressure drop. Some valves permit circulation from the casing
into the tubing only and others to circulate fluid from the tubing into the casing only. If a
circulating valve is not used and the pocket is flow cut a workover would be necessary to
replace the SPM.
3.5.5 Differential Dump Kill Valves

Differential dump/kill valves are designed to provide a means of communication between the
casing annulus and the tubing when an appropriate differential pressure occurs.
Below a preset differential pressure, the valve acts as a dummy valve since it uses a
moveablepiston to block off the circulating ports in the valve and the side pocket mandrel.
The differential pressure necessary to open the valve will depend on the type and number of
shear screws installed.
The valve will only open when the casing annulus pressure is increased by the differential (of
the shear screw rating) above the tubing pressure. An increase in tubing pressure above the
casing annulus pressure will not open the valve.
After opening, the piston is locked in the up position and fluids can flow freely in either
direction.The hydrostatic pressure from the column of annulus fluid will kill the well and
remedialoperations can be planned.
Equalizing Valves The equalization valve is designed to equalize pressure between tubing and
casing and/or to circulate fluid before pulling the valve from the SPM.
The valve has two sets of packing which straddle and pack off the casing ports in the SPM.
The tubing and annulus are isolated from each other until the equalizing device is operated by a
pulling tool. Pressures equalize through a port before the valve and latch is retrieved.
3.5.6 Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)
ª
Used either for gas-lift purposes, chemical injection,
or for the temporary communication between the
annulus and the completion string (circulating valve
installed)
ª
A "dummy" valve is installed in SPM to block flow when it is not
in use (positive closure)
ª
Check valve in the gas lift valve prevents well fluid from
entering the annulus (back flow)
Page....218
3.5.7 Side Pocket Mandrels
Operation
Flow control devices can be installed into the mandrel pocket under pressure with
standard wire-line methods. When installed in the mandrel pocket, the latch ring of a top
latching device locks under a latch lug machined at the top of the pocket.
There is also a profile provided at the bottom of the pocket when bottom latching
devices are used. The packing on the flow control device seals above and below the
ports in the mandrelpocket.
In production operations, flow from the casing enters through the mandrel ports, travels
through the flow control device and then into the tubing to perform many functions,
including, but not limited to gas lift, water flood, and chemical injection.
Page....219
3.6 Circulation Equipments
ª
Sliding Side Door/Sleeves (SSD).
ª
Nipples with port(s)/sleeves.
ª
Establish temporary communication between tubing and annulus by (for example) open SSD
or install circulation valve in SPM.
ª
Pressure should be equalized before opening the circulation device.
ª
Should be checked for completely in open position when used to kill a well (why?)
3.6.1 Sliding Side Doors or Sleeves (SSD)
Sliding Side Doors (SSD) or Sliding Sleeves are installed in the tubing during well completion
to provide a means of communication between the tubing and the annulus when opened: SSD
SSD designed to:
ª
Bring a well into production after drilling or workover by circulating the completion fluid out
of the tubing and replacing it with a lighter underbalanced fluid.
ª
Kill a well prior to pulling the tubing in a workover operation.
ª
Provide selective zone production in a multiple zone well completion.
SSD are available in versions which open by shifting an inner sleeve either upwards or
downwards. A number of SSD can be installed in a completion string and selectively opened
or closed by the use of the appropriate wireline shifting tool.
NOTE: If wire line equipment is Run inst the well, with a view to opening the sliding
sleeve.
Tubing and annulus pressures must be equalized before an SSD sleeve is opened to prevent
wireline tools being blown up or down the tubing.
A common fault of sliding sjeeves is that the seal failure usually leads to a workover although a
pack-off can be installed as a temporary solution.
Page....220
3.6.2 Sliding Side Doors or Sleeves (SSD)
ª
Used to open communication between the
tubing bore and the casing annulus (if SSD
could not be opened, how to solve this
problem in order to establish the circulation
possible?)
ª
It is installed either across the reservoir zones
for production or immediately above the top
production packer for well circulation
ª
Can also be used for gas-lift purpose (utilize
the orifice valve)
ª
Consist of a movable inner sleeve with slit
ports and a fixed outer part
Page....221
3.7 Nipple Profiles (Anchoring)
Main purpose is to install flow control equipment

down-hole, either temporarily or for long periods
of time
Installed as part of completion string
ª
Consist of a locating profile, a no go
shoulder and a sealing surface (with
elastomeric packing's of flow control device
sealed in a polished nipple bore)
3.7 Nipple Profiles
ª
Lock mandrel is locked into the tubing
nipple by means of locking dogs matched in
suitable milled profile in the nipple recess.
ª
No go shoulder helps locate lock mandrels
to their matching nipples and also prevents
the equipment being installed from going
any further down the well.
NO-GO Shoulder Functions: Primary

locates the Lock Mandrel.
Secondary: Prevent tools falling down.
Page....222
3.7.1 Nipple with Port or Sleeve
ª
A nipple has ports between the inside and the outside.
ª
When it not to be used, a sleeve with packers in the nipple profile is installed.
ª
When used in a well kill, the circulation devices should be check for fully open
and pressure to be equalized before opening.
ª
Seldom utilized due to SSD has a better beneficial features.
3.8 Flow Couplings

Flow couplings, which are heavy-walled tubulars, are installed above and below any
completion component which may cause flow turbulence such as wireline nipples, SSD,
SCSSV landing nipples etc., to cater for internal erosion. Although the same amount of
erosion is experienced, the added thickness of the flow coupling provides enough
material to prevent weakening over the projected life of the well. In lower velocity wells,
such as low GOR oil wells, a flow coupling may only be needed to be placed above
restrictions.
3.9 Blast Joint

Blast joints are installed opposite perforations (non gravel packed) where external
cutting or abrasive action occurs caused by produced well fluids or sand. They are
heavy-walled tubulars. In some areas they have been installed just above the tubing
collar on the top of an ESP pump assembly, to reduce the vortex erosion which generally
creates internal wear on a tubing pup joint when installed directly above the ESP pump.
3.10 Re-entry Guide or Mule shoe

This type of guide is essentially the same as the Bell Guide but incorporates a large 45
degree angle cut on one side of the guide. Should the guide hang up on any casing item
such as a liner lip while being run, rotation of the tubing will cause the 45 degree
shoulder to slide past the liner lip and enter the liner.
Page....223
3.11 Downhole Safety Valves
ª
Main purpose is to close in the well in
emergency
ª
They are "fail-safe closed" type (system
failed, valve closed)
ª
When it closed, it can prevent flow from
below
ª
Closure mechanism is flapper or ball
valves
ª
They are tubing retrievable or wireline
retrievable types
Page....224
3.11 Downhole Safety Valves
ª
Setting depth should be such that a topside
collision or explosion would not damage the
valve itself or that hydrates will not interfere
with valve operation
ª
DHSV can be surface control or subsurface
control
ª
Sub-surface control of DHSV are closed by
pressure either differential pressure or ambient
pressure valves
DHSV when closed, will it prevent flow in both

directions, or one way?
Yes or NO
Page....225
3.11.1 Wireline Retrievable DHSV
ª
Primary advantage is that it can be
retrived and replaced with a new
valve
ª
Often create a restriction in a well
ª
Installed in the nipple profile in the
completion string
ª
Run in hole in the open position with a
prong on the lock mandrel running
tool.
The components required for the

installation of a wireline retrivable SCSSV
are:
ª
Hydraulic control line
ª
Control Line Protectors
ª
Hydraulic control manifold
ª
Wireline retrivable safety valve
ª
Safety valve landing nipple
ª
Locking Mandrel
Page....226
3.11.1 Wireline Retrievable DHSV
ª
It makes hydraulic communication
with the control line between two
packing seal stacks once the lock
mandrel is set.
ª
If the DHSV is to be out of the well for
any length of time, a protective sleeve
should be installed ( especially to
protect any damage to the valve when
operated a heavy well intervention
operation)
Note: Discussion on DHSV-Leak Rates
Page....227
3.12 Tubing Retrievable SCSSV
Tubing retrievable safety valves operate by the same principle as wireline SCSSV except
all the components are incorporated in one assembly which is installed in the completion
string. Somemodels have rod pistons instead of the more normal concentric piston
designs.Should the tubing retrievable valve need to be locked out, a wireline retrievable
can be installed and operated, although with a reduced internal bore.
The components required are:

ª Hydraulic control line.
ª Control line protectors.
ª Hydraulic Control Manifold.
ª Tubing retrievable safety valve.
These are additionally available for insert capability:

ª Wireline safety valve.
ª Locking mandrel.
ª Wireline installation and retrieval tools for the locking mandrel.
Lock-out tool for the tubing retrievable valve.
3.12.1 Safety Valve Leak Testing
A test performed on Sub-Surface Safety Valves immediately after installation, and on a

regular schedule, is the leak test. A typical leak test entails the production, kill and swab
valves are closed on the Xmas tree and control line pressure bled off to close the valve.
Tubing pressure is bled off slowly above the valve to zero for a tubing retrievable valve
and in 100 psi stages for a wireline retrievable valve.
The system is closed in again and tubing pressure monitored. If there is a rapid build up, a
major leak is indicated or improper functioning of the valve; in this case the valve should
be cycled and the test repeated. After a specified shut-in period the tubing head pressure
should be below a maximum allowable pressure as specified by the operator is leak off
criteria although there is an API standard.
3.12.2 API Leakage Limit in Oil Wells

For oil wells, the pressure depends on the static fluid level and the amount of gas in the oil. If the
Page....228
liquid level is below the SCSSV, the formula for gas wells can be used. If the liquid level is
above the SCSSV. From this the leakage rates are determined from the build-up of surface
pressure which is converted to a liquid volume.
If the leakage rate is in excess of 6.3 gal per hour then the SCSSV should be cycled then
corrective and re-tested. If the leakage rate is still in excess of 6.3 gal per hour, further action
must be taken.
3.13 Annulus Safety Valves

ª Main purpose is to prevent an uncontrolled reverse backflow of gas from the annulus in
gas-lift wells on fixed installation.
ª They are "fail-safe closed" type either flapper or plug valves.
Valve prevents back flow from Annulus to Surface when Gas compressor failure. The sub-
surface safety valves discussed so far, i.e. tubing retrievable and wireline retrievable, only
provide tubing flow control. In these systems, no annular flow control exists. Annulus safety
valve systems are usually associated with completions where artificial lift or secondary
recovery methods are employed for example gas venting in Electric Submersible Pump
(ESP), hydraulic pump, and gas lift installations. There application is to remove the potential
hazard of a large gas escape in the event there is an incident where the tubing hanger seal is
breached.
There are a number of designs of such systems on the market and the variety of mode of
operation is too wide to be covered in this document, however the basic concepts are the same.
With any annulus system, there must be a sealing device between the tubing and the casing
through which the flow of gas can be closed off. This is generally a packer but may also be a
casing polished bore nipple in some designs into which a packing mandrel will seal. In the
sealing device there is a valve mechanism operated by hydraulic pressure similarly to an
SCSSV. The valve mechanism opens the communication path from the annulus below to the
annulus above the valve and is fail safe closed. The closure mechanism may be a sliding
sleeve, poppet or flapper device.
3.14 Control Lines

A Control Line is conduit which supplies the hydraulic fluid to the SCSSV is the control line.
The control line is normally a stainless steel tube is VS. OD. Attached to the sub-surface valve
(TRSV) or nipple line is normally a (WRSV) with a compression fitting, and run up the
outside of the tubing to the tubing hanger. The method of termination at the hanger is
dependent on the type wellhead and hanger system being deployed.
Some control lines on land wells are simply fed out through a packing element in a port (often
a tie-down bolt hole) which is tightened to seal around the tubing. Other systems have drilled
ports in the hanger, into which the control line is fitted again with a compression fitting, and
the spool sealed off from the annulus and the Xmas tree bore by concentric weight set or
pressure energized seals.
Page....229
3.15 Additional mechanical Equipment in the Completion String
ª
Expansion joint
ª
Flow coupling
ª
Blast joint
ª
Wireline entry guide
ª
Strom choke
ª
Plugs
Page....230
3.16 Wellhead
ª
Anchoring/connections for each
casing.
ª
Pressure isolation of individual
casings.
ª
Connection for completion string.
ª
Connection for Xmas tree.
ª
Isolation of production annulus.
ª
Access to annulus for pressure
monitoring and/or pumping.
Page....231
3.16 Wellhead
Typical Beam Pump Wellhead Design
Typical ESP Wellhead Design
Page....232
3.17 Tubing Hanger
ª
Transfer the weight of the completion
string to the wellhead.
ª
Seal the top of the production annulus
ª
Allow an internal plug to be installed
ª
Provide a seal around hydraulic or
electrical control lines through the
tubing hanger (hydraulic lines, ESP
pump)
Page....233
3.17 Tubing Hanger's
Page....234
3.18 Plugs in Tubing Hanger
ª
Tubing Hanger Plug (THP)
ª
Two-way check valve
(TWCV) provides a seal in
both direction as long as
there is a high differential
pressure across the plug at
the same time permit slow
pumping through the plug
from above.
ª Back pressure valve (BVP)

contains pressure from
below, but allows pumping
through the plug from
above.
.
Page....235
3.19 Xmas Trees
ª
Safety equipment placed on
top of the wellhead
ª
Control the flow of
hydrocarbons from the well
ª
Allow access to the well
during the operation phases
ª
Regarded as a safety barrier
ª
Split gate or Slab gate types
Page....236
3.19 Xmas Trees
Typical 2000 Psi Xmas Tree for ESP Well
Typical 3000 Psi Tree for Water Disposal Well
Page....237
3.19.1 Xmas Trees
Page....238
3.19.2 Valves on the Xmas Tree
ª
Manual operated master
valve
ª
Hydraulic operated master
valve
ª
Manual operated wing valve
ª
Hydraulic operated wing
valve
ª
Manual operated swad valve
ª
Manual operated kill valve
Page....239
3.20 Valves on the Xmas Tree
ª
Some Xmas Tree master
valves can be used to cut
slick line
ª
Count number of turns when
close and back out part of a
trun after closing
ª
Seldom use lower master
valve
Page....240
3.20 Various Xmas Tree Top connections (Cap's)
Page....241
3.3 Subsea Wellhead
Page....242
3.3.1 Subsea Completions
Certain wells are completed with double completion strings, where each string has a
separate set of functions; injection/production, gas/water, oil/water or gas/oil.
3.4 Subsea Xmas tree
Trees of this type are often designed as dual trees with two bores; one for production and
a smaller one for annulus functions.
The production bore is equipped with the same set of valves as on a standard surface
Xmas tree, while the annulus bore has hydraulically actuated wing and master valves.
Some Xmas trees also have a mechanically operated master valve on the same bore (for
use in ROV/diver interventions).
Some Xmas trees also have X-over valves between the production bore and the annulus
bore. This allows the line to the annulus to be used to pump fluids or chemicals
downhole or into the well-flow passing through the Xmas tree, or simply to bleed off
pressure, if a hydrate plug has built up in the flow tubing between the Xmas tree and the
topside installations.
3.5 Operational preparations

A standard requirement is that the valves in a Xmas tree should be pressure tested/inflow
tested before operation of the well commences. This is done in order to ensure that the
valves are tight; i.e. that they function as barrier elements.
Using leakage rate as a criterion is difficult, as suitable measurement equipment does
not exist. Leakage rate normally has to be converted to pressure rise via theoretical
calculations. Such calculations involve volume, where the real volume may differ from
the theoretical volume.
Consider for example a suspect hydraulic master valve into which we pump 5 - 10 litres
of grease in order to clean its sealing surfaces. If we perform an inflow test and measure
the pressure rise in the "cross" the volume of grease that has been pumped in (including
in the cross) will reduce the volume into which the valve is leaking, for example from 20
to 15 litres, and this in turn will affect the results/acceptable pressure rise. The volume in
the cross will also be uncertain if the cross has split gate valves, which have an "extra"
volume between the gates.
Page....243
Valves are normally regarded as tight if their leakage rate is less than 0.4 l/min liquid or 25.5 Sm3/gas.
It is good operational practice always to have several valves available as barrier elements, particularly
on workovers of older wells, where valves may be suspect because of deposits.When rigging up well
operation equipment on top of Xmas tree, the operational team takes over control of the hydraulic
master valve and the down-hole safety valve in order to avoid the possibility, for example, of the
control-room operator closing the hydraulic master valve while a wireline or other piece of equipment
is being run through the Xmas tree. Some hydraulic master valves can also be mechanically locked in
the open position. The hydraulic master valve and the DHSV are controlled from the Local Control
Panel.
When the downhole equipment is out of the well one or more valves in the Xmas tree are usually shut
in order to be sure that we have full control of the well when we bleed off the pressure in the
intervention equipment.
It is important to be aware of the number of turns needed to open and close manually operated valves,
and of which items of equipment the hydraulically actuated master valve has been tested to cut.
Opening valves under differential pressure conditions (including valves in a double block situation)
can damage their sealing mechanisms as a result of flushing and high mechanical loads. Differential
pressure can result in pressure damage to intervention equipment such as tool strings that are hanging
in a lubricator.
3.6 OTHER MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IN THE COMPLETION STRING
3.6.1 Storm choke
Storm chokes, or directly controlled safety valves, are placed in the well but are not controlled from
the surface via a control line. These valves are often located in the lowermost nipple profile in the
completion string with the aid of wireline equipment. There are two types of such valves:
Page....244
Excess flow
If the flow through the valve increases greatly (e.g. in a blowout) the pressure differential across
the valve rises and a spring closes the choke.
Pressure-activated
The downhole hydrostatic pressure holds the valve open. If the flow should suddenly increase
the pressure will fall and the valve will close with the aid of a spring and a pre-loaded nitrogen
charge.
3.6.2 Flow coupling/blast joint
This is a thick-walled pipe section that is placed in areas of turbulent flow; e.g. after the DHSV, nipple,
circulation equipment, pipe sections that pass perforations. Its ID is identical to that of the other pipe
sections in the completion string, while its OD may be the same as the OD of the connections.
3.6.3 Wireline entry guide
This is equipment that is located at the bottom of the tail-pipe (particularly if it is not a monobore well)
in order to enable intervention tools to enter the completion string without catching. Entry guides can
have a V2" Muleshoe or a full Muleshoe.
Seal Stems often have entry guides at their ends to make it easier to enter the liner PBR. Muleshoe's are
now available that rotate a certain number of degrees if the completion string takes a weight.
i.e. if it is impossible to enter the PBR, on the next attempt we have the Muleshoe entry guide which has
automatically rotated a certain number of degrees (so that we avoid having to rotate the whole
completion string, which could damage the control lines).
Page....245
3.6.4 Plugs
Blanking plug
This is wireline installed in a nipple profile. Such plugs are called "positive" if they can take pressure
from both sides. Due to their large diameter, it takes some time to run these plugs, while they may be
difficult to release if the pressure is not completely balanced across them.
Bypass blanking plug

This plug has a pressure equalization function. Two trips are normally needed to set such plugs; one
with the plug itself, and another with a prong, and two trips to pull them; pick up the prong = equalize
pressure over and under the plug and pick it up.
Check valve
This valve is installed as part of a plug. It is also known as a "standing valve". The valve seals the well
from above and is used in pressure testing the completion string and setting the production packer.
Some designs allow wirelines to remain connected during the pressure-testing process, so that the
plug or valve can be pulled immediately after a successful test.
Pump-through plug
This is a check-valve which maintains pressure only from below. It can be installed ahead of a
well-killing operation.
Pump-open plug
This plug is completely tight until an internal plate is ruptured by pressure applied from the
surface, producing full two-way communication through the plug.
Pressure cycle plugs

These are often used in monobore wells to set wells and wells with open-hole reservoirs. The
production packer is set by applying pressure to the plug. The plug is then cycled by pressuring up or
bleeding down until it opens. Certain designs of these valves do not restrict the ID of the completion
string (Ocre valves).
Pump-out plugs
These plugs are installed in a nipple profile. Pressuring up above the plug causes it to split in two and
the lower part falls down into the well. This type of plug offers a larger area of flow, but still restricts
the well flow (through the part of the plug that remains in the nipple profile).
Retrievable bridge plugs

These are the most frequently used plugs, not least in monobore wells, which do not have nipple
profiles. They can be set by wireline or coiled tubing, and are pulled using the same types of
intervention equipment. The plugs are fitted with packing elements and slips which operate in both
directions.
Page....246
Chapter 4 Coiled Tubing Operations
4. Coiled Tubing Operations
Coiled Tubing With Surface Equipment
This technique is based on running a narrow thin-walled tube into a pressurized

well by means of a mechanically driven belt.
The coiled tubing itself is stored coiled up on a drum or reel. In theory, there are no
limits as to the depth to which one can go in the well, depending on the size (length)
of the coils, the well profile, the pulling capacity of the equipment and the strength
of the coiled tubing.
Most operations can be performed using coiled tubing. The advantages of this type
of equipment are that it can be easily transported, rigged up and unrigged relatively
rapidly and that it is quick to bring into operation. Furthermore, the equipment has
become safer in the course of the past 10 to 15 years thanks to technical
improvements such as better steel quality shaped string, welding procedures and
the H2S problem.
The disadvantages of the equipment are that there are limits to the flexibility of the
coiled tubing and the tubing wall is relatively thin compared to the drill-string. Nor
can the coiled tubing string be rotated.
The topside equipment consist of a control house, power supply unit with fluid
tanks, the coiled tubing reel, tubing injector, and riser/lubricator system with
BOP's.
4.1 Coiled Tubing-Equipments

ª CT Surface Equipment Rig-up
ª Pressurized deployment system
ª CT strippers
ª Operating principles of CT BOP's
ª Use of check valves
ª CT Equipment Pressure Testing
ª CT with Motor Assembly
Page....247
4.1.1 Coiled Tubing Unit
Page....248
4.1.2. Coiled Tubing Reel Assembly
Page....249
4.1.3. Example of Coiled Tubing with Completion Clean Out
Typical concentric coiled tubing

worksovers may invlove washing
fill inside production tubing. Here, a
sand bridge at 10,000 ft is being
cleaned out
Page....250
4.1.4. Coiled Tubing Equipment Rig up
Page....251
4.1.5 Hydraulic Coiled Tubing Unit
Page....252
4.1.6 Cut-away view of the Injector Head Drive Assembly
Page....253
4.1.7 Coiled Tubing Equipment Rig up
4.1.8 Coiled Tubing-Surface Equipments

Key Issues:
ª CT is a narrow thin-walled tube into a pressurized well by means of a
mechanical driven belt (Injector/Extractor)
ª No limits to the well depth (but depend on reel capacity)
ª Impossible to rotate CT string
ª CT can clean out (i.e. scales) and the well to be kept live at all time
ª The return flow from the well go to adjustable choke located at the fluid
exit coiled tubing/completion annulus
ª When clean out and pump rate was increase, annular pressure loss and
bottom hole circulation pressure will increase
ª The advantage of doing reverse circulation with CT is that the flow can lift
solids more easily when in large hole (Can not be done while normal valve
installed).
Page....254
4.1.9. Lubricator stack and Connections
ª
Between tubing injector and BOP's, a hydraulic connector (hydraulic quick latch)
is installed for making possible the BHA in drilling operation or else.
ª
Deployment system accommodate longer BHA to be run into well. This
deployment system is normally fitted with Annular BOP on the top (normally
installed between BOP's and Safety head).
Page....255
4.1.10 Coiled Tubing - Surface Equipments
In high pressure well, flange connectors are normally utilized, There are two types of
flanges;
API 6B Flange
API 6BX Flange ( higher pressure)
Question:
What would be the effect of fitting 7 1/16" x 5,000 psi flange to a BOP rated working
rated pressure of 10,000 psi?
Answer: _____________________
4.2.1 Lubricator Stack With connections

The connections between the pipe-joints and the safety valves are either quick
connectors or are screwed together with several flanges and packer nuts.
The most usual set-up in all countries is that the shear/seal safety head is connected to
the Xmas tree by means of flanges.
In operations on high-pressure wells, flanged connectors are normally utilized.
Between the tubing injector and the safety valves, Blow out Preventers (BOP's) a
hydraulic connector or hydraulic quick latch is installed, making it possible to
reconfigure and change the make-up of the bottom-hole assembly (BHA).
The distance between the top of the BOP stack and the bottom of the shear/seal safety
head limits the length of the down-hole string (sluice length).
Page....256
If we need an extra long down-hole string , or in connection with running in
perforating cannon into the well, the stack can be "expanded" by means of a
deployment system.
In principle the deployment system is an extra spool piece fitted with Annular
BOP's which is installed in the stack between the existing BOP's and the
shear/seal BOP or SAFETY HEAD.
Then run in the lengths needed to make up the down hole string and screw or lock
them together by opening and closing the BOP's above the deployment system
and the valves on the deployment system itself. Once the whole downhole string
has been installed, the coiled tubing is connected to the top section, the tubing
injector is coupled up and we can run the string into the well.
4.2.2 Lubricator Stack With connections

Stripper or Stuffing Box (for CT)
ª Stripper is located immediately
below the injector head.
ª Most deployed with Dual Strippers.
ª It is a Primary barrier.
ª There are three common types:-
ª Convention Stripper Assembly (2)
ª Side Door Stripper Assembly (3)
ª Radial Stripper Assembly (1)
ª Strippers when energized, Hydraulically
Operated by piston press the rubber element
(via Upper bushing) against the CT downward
(except the Conventional type).
ª Well pressure also helps to keep the rubber
to seal/closed position (conventional Stripper only).
The stripper (or packer, or stuffing box) is located immediately below the
injector head and may be either single or dual. The stripper is the primary
pressure control barrier and is hydraulically actuated by means of a piston which
presses the stripper rubber or packing element against the coiled tubing. The
well pressure helps to keep the packing in closed position in certain types of
packing element configuration.
Page....257
The most common types of stripper are conventional strippers, side-door strippers and
radial strippers.
The packing elements in all of the above-mentioned types of stripper can be replaced
during operations, i.e. while the coiled tubing is in the well. To do this we must first
close the lowermost BOP and the pipe and slip rams and bleed off the pressure. In side-
door and radial strippers, the packing element can be replaced from the side. This
cannot be done in the case of a conventional stripper, in which the packing element must
be removed and replaced from the top of the stripper. A double set of strippers is
normally used. If one of the packing elements leaks due to wear, the lower stripper can
be pressurized (activated) first, allowing the pressure to be bled off from the upper
stripper.
4.3 Coiled Tubing-Strippers
A conventional stripper, bushing & packing elements

replaced by inserting it through the top.
When CT inside stripper, only upper stripper packing

element (or upper assy. In Dual) can be replaced while
system is in operation.
For Dual configuration, packing insert & stripper

rubbers cannot be replaced once CT has passed
through the assembly
For Radial and Side Door strippers, packing elements

can be replaced via an access window in the stack
Page....258
4.3.1 Coiled Tubing Striper
Side Door Striper

These types of stripper assembly can be used in single or dual configurations.
The stripper insert consists of two parts and can be replaced, together with its bushing,
via an access window in the stack.
This set-up allows us to replace bushings and elements without the need to pull the
coiled tubing from the stack.
Page....259
4.3.2 Coiled Tubing Striper
Conventional Striper
The conventional stripper assembly can be used in a single or dual configuration.In this
type of stripper, bushings and packing elements need to be replaced from above. With
the coiled tubing inserted in the stripper stack, only the upper packing in a single
configuration or the upper assembly in a dual configuration can be replaced while the
system is in operation.
In a dual configuration, packing inserts and stripper rubbers cannot be replaced once the
coiled tubing has passed through the assembly.
Note: Conventional stripper assemblies and single-stripper configurations are

not accepted for operation in certain areas of the North Sea.
CONVENTIONAL STRIPPER AND COMPONENTS
Page....260
4.4 Coiled Tubing BOP's
ª
BOP systems when first used, are subjected to the manufacturing test (new
body test) with 150% of rate working pressure.
ª
Ram type BOP's are located below the Strippers. It may consist of Double,
Triple or Quadruple Quad BOP's.
ª
It is Secondary Barrier with regard to Barrier develop.
ª
Ram Preventer are designed to hold pressure from Below.
ª
Ram Preventer assembly is fitted with equalizing valves in order to allow
the pressure to be equalized across a closed ram before it is opened.
ª
Ram Preventer is also fitted with a Kill port.
4.4.1 Coiled Tubing BOP's
Ram type BOP
The BOP's are located below the strippers and may consist of double, tripe or
quadruple Quad BOP's. The BOP stack comprises the secondary barrier.
A double or triple BOP is equipped with the same ram stacks as a quad BOP, but in
the form of combinations, i.e. in a double BOP, the upper valve will consist of a
Blind Shear ram and the lower part will consist of a pipe slip ram.
In a quad BOP, the uppermost valve is a blind ram, the second is a shear ram, the
third a slip ram and the fourth and lowest, a pipe ram.
If it turns out to be necessary to cut the coiled tubing in the course of an operation,
the procedure is as follows:
ª
Close slip ram
ª
Close pipe ram
ª
Close shear ram
ª
Pull coiled tubing above the blind ram
ª
Close blind ram.
Page....261
4.4.2 Coiled Tubing BOPs
Ram Type Preventers
Page....262
Ram Type Preventers
Page....263
Ram Type Preventers
To Cut the Coiled Tubing

The procedures to operate Rams;
ª
Close slip ram
ª
Close pipe ram
ª
Close shear ram (cut CT)
ª
Pull CT above the blind ram
ª
Close blind ram
QUAD RAM
Page....264
Page....265
RAM Designed Functions;

ª Blind Ram: Designed to close and seal
an open hole.
ª Shear Ram: Designed to shear or cut
pipe in the hole.
ª Shear/Seal Ram: Designed both to cut
the pipe and then seal the well.
ª Slip Ram : Have a Slip insert for sealing
element but not sealing pressure.
Primarily used to hang the string and to
prevent it from rotating (designed to
grip only one direction).
ª Pipe Ram: Also called Safety ram to
QUAD BOP closed off pressure when need to
change out stripper.
Coiled Tubing BOP's

Ram Type Preventers
ª
Shear/Seal BOP (also called safety head) located just above the tree/well head
ª
The purpose of Shear/Seal BOP is provide additional shear capacity on the BOP
stack
ª
If tubing in the hole, Shear/Seal BOP will be a Tertiary barrier
Page....266
4.5 Coiled Tubing Ram Assembly
The safety head BOP or shear/seal BOP is a simple shear/seal safety head which is
installed as close as possible to the Xmas tree and which is equipped with a
shear/seal ram. This BOP comprises the tertiary barrier.
This shear/seal safety head is usually designed to withstand pressures of up to

10,000psi. It is rather larger in diameter and is equipped with a larger and stronger
shear/blind ram that is capable of cutting the largest-diameter coiled tubing, even
one containing wireline, if that is being used in the well. After it has been cut, the
tubing falls down into the well and swab valve or other valves on the Xmas tree
can be closed.
Page....267
4.5.1 Coiled Tubing Ram Assembly
Page....268
4.5.2 Coiled Tubing Ram Assembly
4.6 Coiled Tubing-Annular Preventer
The annular BOP or annular preventer is utilized as a safety head in special

operations in which it is necessary to close around long, variable profiles of the
bottom-hole assemblies, (BHA) in the deployment system. The advantage of the
annular BOP is that it closes around various pipe dimensions and can also seal
the opening when there is no tubing in the valve.
The annular BOP is normally installed either above or below an existing safety
head on the stack.
Annular BOP's are also used as an extra safety system for strippers.
Page....269
4.6.1 Coiled Tubing Annular Preventer
ANNULAR BOP
ª
In case we need to close
the well around various
sizes/dimension
(OD/shape) of pipe
and/or BHA. We need the
Annular BOP to be
performed this operation
ª
Annular is an extra safety
system for Stripper
ª
It normally installed
above the Shear/Seal
BOP
ª
Precaution when
stripping through
Annular BOP we need to
monitor Annular
operating pressure and
weight indicator, also the
consult fishing diagram
of stripping tool strings
ª
Brief on Accumulator
Nitrogen pre-charge
Page....270
4.7.1 Coiled Tubing Equipment
Coiled Tubing-Check Valve
Check valves are always installed in the end of the coiled tubing except when we are
about to perform reverse out-circulation. In some areas in the North Sea, the check valve
is an element in the barrier philosophy. Reverse circulation is therefore, not permitted
during a normal operation.
The check valve is intended to prevent well fluids from entering the string. Although
there are several types of check valve, the most frequently used are flapper valves,
usually in a dual configuration. The flapper valves allow balls and plugs to be pumped
down in order to operate special equipment in the well. The check valve is normally
installed between the end connection of the coiled tubing and the rest of the bottom-hole
string.
Pump-down and through-pumping balls or plugs activate specific items of equipment
which are installed in the bottom-hole assembly. These are installed via s sluice port
which is installed in the centre of the coiled tubing reel in direct connection with the
coiled tubing pumping-in system.
Coiled Tubing-Check Valve ª

Installed at the end of CT.
ª
Purposes is to control or to maintain
pressure when CT failed at surface
ª
Reverse circulation is not possible
ª
Most frequently used is a flapper type
valve dual configuration.
ª
Pumping balls and plugs down will
enable flapper valve to be opened and
can operate special equipment in the
well i.e. for BHA or reverse circulation.
ª
Once the ball has been dropped to open
the check valve, there will no
mechanical Barrier at bottom of the CT.
Especially while pulling CT out.
Page....271
4.7.2 Coiled Tubing Equipment
Coiled Tubing-Adjustable Choke

The return flow of the CT from the well go to choke
(mainly adjustable) located at the fluid exit coiled
tubing/completion annulus.
Before Choke, there are two choke line valves
which outside one is hydraulically operated and
another valve is manually operated (inside valve).
Question:
From Figure, match the inlet and outlet connection
as follows;
Inlet _______________
Outlet _______________
4.8 Coiled Tubing-Pressure Testing
Pressure Testing
Once the coiled tubing stack with the coiled tubing and bottom-hole assembly has been
installed and its functions have been tested, the equipment must be pressure-tested. This
involves all connections and safety valves that are intended to maintain pressure from
the bottom upwards.
The following equipment should also be pressure-tested: all topside lines, joints,
connections and equipment on the bottom-hole assembly, the coiled tubing itself and the
check valves. The usual procedure is to pressure test the check valves before they are
installed on the string, ("on the stump" testing).
When the coiled tubing string is being run in it is important to ensure that the coiled
tubing does not become crumpled or pressed flat. Before the Xmas tree is opened, the
pressure must be equalized by raising the pressure in the stack.
It is normal practice to pump fluid in through the coiled tubing in order to increase the
pressure before entering the Xmas tree, and to continue pumping/filling the coiled
tubing as we run into the well. This is done in order to prevent the coiled tubing from
collapsing due to well pressure.
Page....272
We must be particularly careful when passing through the Xmas tree, the well safety
head assembly and any other equipment installed in the well, not to damage the
equipment, crumple the string or get stuck in the well.
It is also important to have kill pills and kill fluid ready to hand. The kill fluid may
consist of killing mud, salt water or completion fluid. We must also ensure that a reserve
pump is available and in working order.
4.8.1 Coiled Tubing Pressure Testing
When rigging up CT on a well, the

equipments must be pressure tested;
ª
All connections, joints, BHA connection if
present.
ª
Check damaged Quicktinion "0" ring or
seal surface if present that may cause a leak
at that joint.
ª
Check damaged Ring Groove if present that
may cause a leak on the flange connection.
ª
When CT is being run, make sure CT does
not crushed into fold or buckled.
ª
Before Xmas tree is opened, pressure
equalizing must be done.
ª
Normal practice is to fill-in the CT with
fluid when running CT into well in order to
prevent CT to collapse.
ª
Kill fluid, completion fluid, pump, and
fluid tank must be provided on site.
Page....273
4.8.2 Coiled Tubing-Common Problems
PROBLEM HOLES IN TUBING:- PROBLEM TUBING Parted :-
SOLUTION SOLUTION
ª
Pull tubing until hole is between ª
Pull tubing out of the well until
striper and Pipe Ram above Blind Ram
ª
Close Slip ram and Pipe Ram ª
Close Blind Ram and kill the well
ª
Kill the Well ª
Once the well is dead, fish the
tubing
ª
Once the well is dead, pull out of
well and repair/replace the tubing ª
If tubing splits on surface, close the
Slip and pipe Ram
ª
Close Shear Ram, pull out remain
tubing then close Blind Ram
PROBLEM TUBING STUCK:- PROBLEM FAILURE OF CHECK

SOLUTION VALVE :-
ª
Tubing stuck in the well, the SOLUTION
circulation still be carried out, so try
to circulate and spot with lubricants ª
Kill the well
ª
Pumping heavy fluid to increase the
pipe's Buoyancy ª
Once the well is dead, pull out the
ª
Try to work pipe free and make sure tubing
the over pull will not exceed tubing
tensile strength ª
Repair or repalce the Check Valves
ª
Cut the tubing at free point?? above
the stuck point may be considered
at the last resources if well under
pressure
Page....274
4.8.2 Coiled Tubing-Common Problems
PROBLEM LEAKS:- PROBLEM LEAKS (Continue) :-

SOLUTION
Leak can occure the BOP,
Spool, Connection or on the If leak worsens while killing the
X/tree progress
SOLUTION ª
Cut the tubing and drop the
remaining part in the well
ª
Kill the well
ª
Close Swab valve ( check the
ª
Strip the tubing out the well turns)
ª
Close Master valve on Tree If leak is at Stripper;
ª
repair the leaks ª
Close Slip & Pipe Ram
ª
Repair for Leak at Stripper
4.8.3 Coiled Tubing Barrier Related Question

During a Rigging up (no CT in the hole), there is a leak from connector between Quad
ram and Stripper;
1. What is the 1st Barrier which to be closed in order to repair this leak?
Answer _________
2. What is the next Barrier (after Question 1,) which to be closed in when the Barrier
(of Question, 1) failed?
3. While CT in operating (CT in the well), there is a worn Stripper Packing element
and needed change, what type of Rams can be closed to allow this change?
Answer _________
Page....275
4.8.4 Coiled Tubing Pressure Test Related Question
4. What is the normal method to pressure test
the pipe Ram (lower most) of Quad BOP?
Answer _______________
5. From Figure-the Life Well Case Pipe ram is

not holding pressure when they is closed.
Can the Pipe ram be changed out on this life
well ?
Answer _______________
Pressure Test
6. Coiled tubing has been rigged up on the

production well. Pump is connected to the
kill wing on the Tree, to connect one side of
the Quad and the reel how the pump be
performed in order to tst the blind ram and
the safety head ( shear / seal BOP) ???
Answer _______________
Page....276
4.8.5 Coiled Tubing Coiled Tubing Rig Up Related Question
Killing
7. If the CT parted on the Goose neck and the reel. The check valve in CT did not hold
pressure. Which rig up configuration allow you to secure the well and kill it by
circulating down the CT and return to the choke?
Answer _______________
Page....277
CHAPTER-1 WELL COMPLETION AND WORK-OVER
WELL COMPLETION
After a well has been drilled to its target depth the production casing is lowered &
cemented which is followed by lowering of completion assembly to establish a flow
path for the well to produce oil or gas. Completion assembly normally consists of a
tubing string, packers, and special down hole tools to allow reservoir fluids to flow
from the reservoir to the surface.
WORK OVER
Work over is the work carried out after the initial completion which may be required
for many reasons after the well has produced for some time.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN COMPLETION/ WORK OVER & DRILLING

Completion/Work over operations differ from drilling in following respects :
Operations are carried out in cased hole or with small open hole
Formation fluid i.e Gas/Oil normally in both tubing & casing
Well-bore fluids are usually brines which are solid free
In work over the operation may start with well killing
The integrity of tubulars in the well-bore i.e. casing or tubing may be doubtful
Slow pump rate pressures are usually not available
The well control equipment required depend upon the nature of the job
Well control procedures may be different
NEED FOR WORK-OVER

The various reasons for carrying out work over operations in a completed well are as
below:
Reworking the producing reservoir to achieve the following objectives.
i) To prevent water coning
ii) To prevent excessive gas production in an oil well
iii) To enhance production
iv) To carry out repair of downhole equipment / primary cement job etc.
v) To control sand problems
Re-completing a new zone/reservoir

Completing in multiple reservoir
Abandoning a well after it ceases to produce
Each of the above mentioned activities require pressure control while work- over.
Reworking the producing reservoir
Water Coning : A producing oil-well is said to be water coning when it starts producing
water at an increasing rate. In oil bearing reservoirs normally the pore spaces are oil
wet i.e the pore spaces are coated with oil. If the reservoir also has water present in it
& if the reservoir is producing at a high rate water may also enter the well bore. This
causes the reservoir area around the well bore to become water wet & in turn results
in to formation of water wet zones shaped like a cone. As it progresses, the water
production increases because the volume of fluid a well produces depends upon the
Page ....278
relative permeability of the reservoir which is a measure of one fluid‟s ability to move
through the pore spaces of the reservoir in the presence of other fluid. Since, water
coning primarily is a result of higher producing rate, the obvious solution is to cut
down the production. If this does not correct the problem then the only remedy is to
plug back & re-complete in a shallower depth.
Figure Water Coning
Excessive Gas Production : Though some degree of gas production is inevitable in

a producing oil well, excessive gas production is not desirable due to the fact that
the reservoir gas is a major driving energy that is required to lift oil to the surface.
The most common method used to avoid excessive gas production is to plug back,
re-perforate below gas-oil contact since gas is usually produced from upper portions
of the reservoir & to implement reservoir pressure maintenance tactics.
Enhancement Of Production : Loss of productivity could be either because of

formation damage i.e impaired formation permeability due to poor drilling practices
or naturally occurring low permeability. Productivity can be enhanced in such cases
by stimulating methods such as matrix acidization or fracture acidization or treatment
with surfactants
Page....279
.
Figure Increasing Gas cap
Figure Increasing Oil-Water Contact

Page....280
Downhole Equipment & Cement Repair : Failure of downhole equipment such as
tubing, packers & valves etc. due to corrosion & erosion often require a work-over
job. Similarly failure of primary cement job may cause formation fluids from one zone
to flow into other & require work-over for cement repair.
Sand Control : Control of sand produced with reservoir fluid is a serious problem &
perhaps the primary cause of most work-over operations. Formation sand mixed in
reservoir fluid can cut or plug flow lines & can cause excessive damage to downhole
production equipment & wellhead. Gravel packing is most commonly used method of
sand control though plastic resin can also be used for sand consolidation in some
zones.
Recompleting a new zone/reservoir
Factors such as increased desired production rates, irreparable damage to the

previous producing interval and depletion of pressure in original producing zone may
require a work-over operation so as to re-complete to a new zone higher up in the
hole after isolating the lower zone by means of retainers or mechanical plugs in
addition to a cement plug. Sometimes it may be necessary to deepen or side-track
the well for re-completion. In addition to this re-completion may also be required for
secondary recovery operations e.g. water or steam flooding.
Figure Recompletion of New Reservoir

Page....281
Completing in multiple reservoir
A single well-bore may be considered for multiple reservoir completion i.e completing
a single well for more than one producing zones to increase production rates.
Multiple completion could be dual, triple or quadruple zone completion. Though such
completions are economical but remedial work-over operations cost much more than
that of a single completion. Sometimes it is required to kill all the producing zones
before taking up remedial work.
Figure Multiple completions
Abandoning a well after it ceases to produce
Abandonment of a well that has ceased to produce also involves work-over

operations.
MISCELLANEOUS WORK-OVER OPERATIONS
Depending on the nature of problems, various work-over techniques are made use of
to meet the objectives of restoring / increasing the well production or abandoning the
well. Some such techniques are:
Sand Control
Acidizing
Page....282
Perforating
Hydro-fracturing
Side Tracking
Plugging
Cement Squeezing
Sand Control
Formation sand mixed in reservoir fluid can cut or plug flow lines & can cause
excessive damage to down hole production equipment & wellhead. In addition to
other factors the formation sensitivity to high flow rates remains the major reason for
sand production. Two most commons methods used for sand control are gravel
(sand) packing & use of plastic resins for sand consolidation. Gravel packing involves
running of screen or slotted liner opposite the production zone, cleaning out the well
& pumping selected size gravel (it should preferably be round & contain only small
percentage of angular grains) between the screen & the formation. After a reasonably
tight gravel pack has been formed the well can be produced relatively sand free as
the gravel pack shall hold the formation sand in place.
Plastic resin consolidation too is an effective method of sand control in certain zones
especially where fine sand is produced & gravel packing is not very useful. Since the
reservoirs that produce sand normally have poor consolidation, the use of plastic
resin or glue is to increase the strength of the formation around the well-bore so that
the sand grains are not dislodged by reservoir fluids flowing at high rates.
Figure Gravel packing
Acidizing
This is a well stimulation technique widely used for reservoirs having low production
rates either due to initial low permeability or reduced permeability because of
formation damage. For those cases where the formation permeability is damaged
due to poor drilling practices, the process is known as matrix acidization & involves
Page....283
treating the formation with acid keeping the pumping pressure below the fracture
pressure. If the formation has natural low permeability, the pumping pressure is
allowed to exceed the fracture pressure so as to create a large flow area by
dissolving some of the formation matrix; this process is called acid fracturing.
Perforating
Perforation is the process of making holes in casing & cement so as to have an

access to the producing formation. Though it is a part of initial well completion but at
times additional perforations are required to increase the flow area & may require a
work-over operation
Hydro-fracturing
This too is a stimulation technique & is useful for some formations such as limestone
or dolomite which have naturally occurring low permeabilities. Hydro-fracturing is
most common method used for these rocks to increase well productivity by creating
paths or fractures extending some distance into the formation. Propping material
usually sand or glass or metal beads are used along with the fluid to keep the
fracture open. The most common hydro-fracture fluid is salt water.
Figure Hydro Fracturing
Page....284
Side Tracking
Side tracking operation in a previously producing well may be required for the
following reasons:
To bypass the junk which could not be retrieved

To bypass damaged or collapsed part of casing
To re-complete in a new zone
Figure Side Tracking
Plugging
After a well has flown for certain period of time a stage may reach when either it shall
stop producing or become un-economical to produce. Such wells require plugging
before abandonment due to various reasons e.g. to avoid contamination of fresh
water zones due to deteriorated casing & to avoid navigational hazard in off-shore
locations etc.
Cement Squeezing
Cement squeezing may be required in an already producing well as a work-over

operation due to following reasons:
To improve the primary cement job of producing interval

To allow a new zone (having poor primary cementation) to be re-completed
To repair corroded or damaged casing
To isolate / block water or gas zone
Page....285
Various cement squeeze techniques used in the field are:
Hesitation Squeeze
Bullhead Squeeze
Bradenhead Squeeze
High Pressure or Low pressure Squeeze
Circulation Squeeze
Set through Squeeze
TYPES OF WELL COMPLETIONS
Cased & Perforated Completion

In this type of completion, casing is set into the producing formation & cemented.
The casing is then perforated to provide communication between the well bore &
formation.
Advantages:
Selective completion & work over in the producing intervals only

Very effective for controlling gas & water production by selective perforation &
isolation
Effective control & monitoring of selected zones
Permits multiple completion
Permits selective stimulation
Wells can be deepened
Suitable for sand control
Disadvantages:
Expensive for longer intervals

Reduced productivity for limited drainage area
Effectiveness largely depends on good cement job
Expensive compared to open hole completion
Open Hole Completion

In this type of completion last casing is set just above the production zone or slightly
covering the completion zone. Because the open hole completion depends upon the
strength of the rock, it is commonly used in basement and carbonate formations.
Advantages:
Special drilling techniques for minimum formation damage can be used

Larger hole diameter is available for flow
No perforation is required in most of the cases
Hole can be easily deepened
Suitable for multilateral completion
Log correlation of pay zone is not critical
Gravel packing is easy
Page....286
Disadvantages:
Fluid flow from or to the pay zone can not be regulated.

Selective water or gas production or shut-off is not possible
Not suitable for vertical well multiple reservoir completion
Periodic cleaning of well-bore is required due to possible formation collapse
Liner Completion
In liner completion, the casing is set above the pay zone & liner is lowered against
the pay zone. Depending upon the requirement, the liner may be cemented & then
perforated or it may be un-cemented, slotted liner.
Page....287
CHAPTER-2 DEFINITIONS AND CALCULATIONS
PRESSURE
The term „pressure‟ is defined as force exerted per unit area. The field unit for
pressure is psi. Various pressure terms used in well control are discussed below:
It is the pressure exerted by a static column of fluid by virtue of its density. Or it can
be termed as the pressure due to static effect of a fluid column. It depends on the
vertical height (TVD) of the column and the density of the fluid.
Hydrostatic pressure (psi) = Depth ( TVD-feet ) x Fluid density (ppg) x 0.052

( 0.052 is a conversion constant )
Note : The density of crude oil ranges from 10 API ( i.e equivalent to 1.00 sp gravity or
8.33 ppg) to 60API ( i.e. equivalent to .7389 sp gravity or 6.16 ppg). The density of
crude oil observed at surface shall not give the correct crude oil hydrostatic in the
well as it is thermal sensitive. Therefore, its observed density reading should be
corrected to as follows :
For observed temp greater than 600 F
API gravity corrected =
Observed density - (Observed temp. – 60)

10
For observed temp less than 600F :
API gravity corrected =
Observed density + (60 -Observed temp.)

10
After the density temperature correction, the hydrostatic pressure can be calculated
as:-
= 14.15 X 0.433 X Length Vertical

(13.15 + API corrected
Pressure Gradient
When pressure of fluid of a given density is measured over a given unit depth, the
term is known as Pressure Gradient.
For example, fresh water has a density of 8.33 ppg & one foot column of it shall exert
a pressure of :
8.33 x 1 x 0.052 =0.433 psi
Page....288
Therefore pressure gradient of fresh water is 0.433 psi /ft. If this fluid is used in well
bore of 10,000 feet depth, it will exert a hydrostatic pressure of:
0.433 ( psi /ft ) 10,000 ( feet ) = 4330 ( psi )
Similarly for saline water having a density of 8.92 ppg ( 1.07 gm /cc ), its one foot
column shall exert a pressure :
8.92 1 0.052 = 0.465 psi
Therefore, pressure gradient of saline water of density 8.92 ppg is 0.465 psi/ft.
Capacities & displacement :
Annular capacity (bbl/ft) = ( Dh2 – OD2 ) ÷ 1029
Tubular capacity (bbl/ft) = ID2 ÷ 1029
Mud Tank Volume (bbl) = L X B X H ÷ 5.614
Displacement of tubular (bbl/ft) = Steel displacement (bbl/ft)
Close end Displacement (bbl/ft) = Steel displacement of tubular (bbl/ft) + Inside

capacity of tubular (bbl/ft)
Where :-
Dh = Diameter of hole, inch

OD = Outer dia of string, inch
ID = Inside diameter of string, inch
L = Length of mud tank, ft
B = Breadth of mud tank, ft
H = Height of mud tank, ft
Force
Force can be defined as a pull or push. A well bore experiences forces due to
buoyancy, hydrostatic pressure of well fluid, surface imposed pressure or formation
pressure.
Force = Pressure x Area
Buoyant Force
When a body is wholly or partially submerged in a liquid, it experiences an up-thrust
which is equal to the weight of the liquid displaced by the body. This up-thrust is
called buoyant force.
Due to the buoyant force weight of the tubular when submerged in well fluid is
reduced as compared to the weight in air, it can be worked out as follows :
Page....289
Buoyant Weight =
Density of tubular material - density of well fluid

Tubular Weight in air x ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Density of tubular material
Differential force across Packer

A packer set in the well bore experiences an upward force acting at the bottom of the
packer ( force equivalent of tubing hydrostatic + surface pressure if any ) & a
downward force acting on the top of the packer due to hydrostatic pressure of
completion fluid in the annulus. At any given time the differential force on the packer
is the difference of above two forces.
BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE ( BHP )
It is defined as sum total of all pressures i.e. static , surface as well as dynamic
pressures that are being exerted at the bottom of the hole :
BHP = Hydrostatic Pressure + Surface Pressure Dynamic Pressure
Dynamic pressures are exerted by either due to fluid movement (Annular pressure
losses) or string movement in the well bore ( Swab/ Surge pressure).
BHP in different well situations:
a) When not circulating

BHP = Hydrostatic Pressure due to fluid column
b) While circulating
BHP = Hydrostatic Pressure + Annular Pressure Losses
c) Shutting the well after a kick
i) In Tubing String
BHP = Tubing Hydrostatic Pressure + Shut-in Tubing Pressure
ii) In Annulus
BHP = Annular Completion/Drilling fluid Hydrostatic Pressure + Kick
fluid Hydrostatic Pressure + Shut-in casing Pressure
d) While killing operation
BHP = Sum of hydrostatic Pressure of various fluids in the annulus

+ Annular Pressure Losses + Casing Pressure
e) While tripping in
BHP = Completion/Drilling fluid Hydrostatic Pressure + Surge Pressure

f) While tripping out
BHP = Completion/Drilling fluid Hydrostatic Pressure – Swab Pressure.
Page....290
FORMATION PRESSURE
Formation pressure or pore pressure is the pressure exerted by the fluids trapped in
the pores of the formation. Formation pressure is categorised as normal or abnormal
depending upon the formation pressure gradient. When the bottom hole pressure is
equal to the formation pressure the well is said to be the balanced. Whereas the well
is said to be under balanced when the bottom hole pressure is less than formation
pressure & overbalanced when the bottom hole pressure is more than formation
pressure.
Normal & Abnormal Formation Pressure
As the rock layers are deposited one upon another, formation water is squeezed out
of the pores due to the overburden. This process is called compaction. As long as the
formation water has escape avenues, the formation pressure bleeds down to the
„normal value‟. The normal value generally accepted is 0.465 psi/ft determined from
studies done in the basins of Gulf Cost areas of United States. This is equivalent to
hydrostatic pressure gradient of a column of saline water.
When formation water, which is trying to escape due to overburden is trapped by
impermeable formations which do not allow its normal escape, it results into
development of abnormal formation pressures. This is because the formation water
now supports more of the overburden than in the normal case.
Basically, in any given situation the overburden is supported by both the formation
fluid & the matrix of the rock
or Overburden pressure = matrix stress + pore pressure
Matrix stress is the amount of overburden pressure that is supported by the rock itself
& pore pressure is the amount of overburden which is supported by the fluid in the
pore spaces of the rock. The sum of the two is necessary to support the overburden.
If the normal overburden gradient is taken as 1.0 psi/ft (assuming average rock
density of 19.66 ppg, though it is somewhat less at shallow depths ) and the normal
pore pressure gradient as 0.465 psi/ft then the normal matrix stress gradient works
out to be 0.535 psi/ft.
Abnormal pore pressure gradient ranges from 0.465 psi/ft to 1.0 psi/ft. Whereas,
subnormal pressure are pore pressure gradients less than 0.433 psi/ft, such pressure
are usually found in depleted reservoirs.
HYDROSTATIC EFFECTS
Hydrostatic effects due to different densities fluid in the borehole can be realised by
following example.
Example :
Find out the hydrostatic pressure of different density fluids in a well of depth 8,000 ft
as shown in figure below
Page....291
0 ft
10 ppgfluid
3,500 ft
9 ppgfluid
11 ppgfluid 7500 ft
8,000 ft
Solution :
Fluid column Density Hydrostatic pressure
1. 3,500 ft 10 ppg 3,500 10 0.052 = 1,820 psi
2. 4,000 ft 09 ppg 4,000 9 0.052 = 1,872 psi
3. 0500 ft 11 ppg 0500 11 0.052 = 286 psi
Total hydrostatic pressure = 1,820 + 1,872 + 286 = 3,978 psi
CAUSES OF REDUCTION IN HYDROSTATIC HEAD

The various causes of reduction in hydrostatic head are listed below.
Failure to fill the hole (During tripping )

The failure to fill the hole during tripping out is one of the main causes of reduction in
hydrostatic head. Should the reduced hydrostatic head becomes less than the
formation pressure, an influx of formation fluid can enter the well, if a permeable
formation is exposed in the borehole. During tripping out the hole can be kept full by
using any of following means :
a) Rig Pump b) Gravity Fill Trip Tank c) Re-circulating Trip tank
A trip sheet should be filled in while tripping & in case the fill in volumes do not
correspond to calculated volumes further tripping should be stopped & causes
investigated.
Let us calculate the reduction in hydrostatic pressure due to failure to fill the hole both
in case of dry & wet pull out.
Example:
A 2 3/8”, N-80, 4.7 ppf tubing string is being pulled out from a depth of 10,000 ft.
Fluid density is 10 ppg and formation pressure at 10,000 ft is 5,000 psi. What shall
be the effect on bottom hole pressure after pulling out dry 20 stands (90 ft each)
without filling the hole.
Metal displacement of 2 3/8”, 4.7 ppf tubing - 0.0016 bbl/ft
Tubing capacity - 0.00387 bbl/ft
Casing capacity - 0.036bbl/ft
Annular Capacity - 0.030 bbl/ft
Page....292
Solution:
Level drop in annulus and tubing due to failure of filling fluid after pulling out 20
stands dry:
Metal Displacement (bbl/ft) Length of tubing pulled out(ft)
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
{Casing Capacity(bbl/ft) - Metal Displacement(bbl/ft)}
0.0016 90 20 stands 2.88

= ------------------------------------- = ------------ = 83 ft
{0.036 – 0.0016} 0.0344
Hydrostatic pressure of this column = 83 10 0.052 = 43 psi
Therefore, failure to fill hole after pulling out 20 stands of tubing dry shall cause a
reduction of 43 psi in hydrostatic pressure.
Example:
In the previous example, if the string is pulled out wet without filling the hole then
reduction of hydrostatic head will be more .This can be calculated as follow:
Solution:
Level drop in annulus due to failure of filling fluid after pulling out 20 stands wet
{Metal Displacement + Tubing capacity} Length of tubing pulled out(ft)

= ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annulus Capacity(bbl/ft)
(0.0016+ 0.00387) 90 20 stands 9.84

= ----------------------------------------------- = ---------- = 328 0.030
0.030
Hydrostatic pressure of this column = 328 10 0.052 = 171 psi
Therefore failure to fill hole after pulling out 20 stands of tubing wet shall cause a
reduction of 171 psi in hydrostatic pressure.
Cement Setting
Cement setting, in addition to other factors, is a function of formation temperature.
Since maximum circulating temperature occurs at about one third from bottom, it
makes cement to initially set on the upper zone. As the cement sets on upper zone it
begins to partially support the hydrostatic pressure. Moreover, the cement setting
results in water loss from the slurry, this may cause hydrostatic pressure to fall below
the formation pressure thereby allowing a kick. To prevent this to happen, the fluid
loss from the cement should be reduced as low as possible. After the cementation is
over, the well should be monitored for any abnormal flow back.
Page....293
Settling of Weighing Material
Settling of weighing material in drilling/completion fluid is related to suspension
characteristics which in turns depends upon the thermal stability of the additives
used. Whenever the bottom hole temperature exceeds the thermal stability of the
additives it causes the viscosity to decrease & water loss to increase. This causes
settling of weighing material & reduction in hydrostatic pressure.
Circulating Pressure
While circulating, frictional pressure losses are experienced across the flow path e.g.
work string, annulus etc. This pressure is read on stand pipe pressure gauge & is
called circulating pressure. Part of this circulating pressure adds up to the B.H.P.
While doing forward circulation, the frictional pressure loss taking place in the
annulus is added to the BHP whereas in case of reverse circulation the work string
pressure losses are added to the BHP.
Calculation of approximate circulation pressure changes due to pump speed

and fluid density changes :
Circulating pressure are related to pump discharge by following equation :
P = KQn
where P - Circulating Pressure

Q – discharge
„K „ is a proportionality factor involving fluid characteristics and system dimensions &
„n‟ has a value of 2 for bit nozzle & approximate 1.73 for tubing. For determining
combined losses (Tubing, bit & annular) value of „n‟ is taken as 1.86. Therefore above
equation can be modified as:-
P Q1.86
For practical purposes it can be approximated as :
P Q2
or P (SPM)2, Since Q SPM
Approximate pressure changes due to change in pump speed can be calculated by
using this equation. If P1 is slow circulation rate pressure recorded at pump rate
SPM1, than P2 circulation pressure at SPM2 can be calculated.
(SPM2)2
P2 = P1 -------
(SPM1)2
Example:-
A pump pressure of 1,000 psi was recorded at pump speed of 40 SPM. What is the
new pump pressure at a speed of 30 SPM.
Solution :-
(SPM2)2 (30) 2
P2 = P1 -------- = 1000 x ----------- = 562 psi
(SPM1)2 (40) 2
Page....294
Similarly, if the fluid density has been changed and slow circulation pressure has not
been recorded after fluid density change, the same can be calculated :
New Fluid density
New circulating Pressure = Old circulating pressure -----------------------
Old Fluid density
Example:
A pump pressure of 1,000 psi was recorded with fluid density of 11 ppg at 40 SPM.
Calculate pressure at 40 SPM if the fluid density is increased to 13ppg.
Solution:
13
New pump pressure = 1,000 ----- = 1,182 psi
11
EQUIVALENT FLUID DENSITY IN THE ANNULUS

During drilling, due to suspension of cuttings, equivalent fluid density in the annulus
happens to be more than that of tubing. Though in deep hole sections the effect is
not much pronounced but in top holes where the cuttings accumulation is enormous
this increase may at times lead to total loss situation.
EQUIVALENT CIRCULATION DENSITY (ECD)

Bottom hole pressure during circulation is more than that of static condition by an
amount equal to annular pressure losses. Fluid density equivalent of circulating BHP
is called Equivalent Circulating Density & can be worked out as follows.
ECD(ppg) = Fluid Density(ppg) + Annular losses(psi) { 0.052 Well TVD(ft)}
Fluid in use 10 ppg Friction Losses in the annulus

120 psi
10,000ft
Figure Equivalent circulation density
a) Hydrostatic Pressure when static = 10,000 10 0.052 = 5,200 psi

b) Hydrostatic Pressure when circulating = 10,000 10 0.052+120 = 5,320 psi
c) Equivalent circulating density = 5,320 {0.052 10,000} = 10.23 ppg
Hence while circulating the effective fluid weight is 10.23 ppg
Page....295
THE U TUBE CONCEPT
Work string in a well bore can be compared to a U-tube, where the work string is one
limb of the U-tube & annulus is the other limb. The U–tube shown below describes
the well system where the bit along-with scrapper is on bottom and it is possible to
circulate. As illustrated in the figure the left side of U–tube represents the work string
while the right side of the U–tube represents the annulus. As per the U-tube principle
the pressures in both the limbs balance each other.
For example, in the figure below if the density of the fluid in the two limbs is different
& if the tube is closed at the top, then the pressure gauge of that limb whose density
is less shall show some back pressure equivalent to the difference of fluid hydrostatic
pressure of the two limbs. As a result the combined pressure (surface back pressure
& hydrostatic) acting at the bottom of the two limbs shall balance each other. This
principle helps in comparing the shut-in tubing & casing pressures and working out
the density of influx when a well is closed on a kick.
520 psi 0psi
Tubing String Annulus

(Left limb) 10 ppg 11 ppg(right limb)
BHP
Figure U-tube effect
Well TVD - 10,000 ft
Hydrostatic Pressure Back Pressure BHP

Left Limb 5200 psi 520 psi 5720 psi
Right Limb 5720 psi 0 psi 5720 psi
Page....296
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ANNULAR SURFACE PRESSURE (MAASP)
MAASP is the maximum surface pressure that can be held on the casing with
complete safety. MAASP is the minimum of the following two :
The maximum surface pressure that the casing / well head will hold.
The maximum surface pressure that the casing shoe will hold
SWAB AND SURGE EFFECTS

Movement of work string in the hole creates pressure surges in the borehole. These
pressure surges could either add to the BHP (+ve surge) or reduce the BHP (-ve
surge) depending upon whether the string is being lowered or pulled out of the well.
The +ve pressure surges commonly known as „surge pressures‟ if excessive can
cause formation to fracture & lost circulation. The -ve surge pressure known as „swab
pressure‟ may reduce the BHP enough to permit the entry of formation fluid into the
well.
Though accurate calculations of these swab & surge pressures are complicated, but
since they are caused mainly by friction while „moving the tubing through fluid, they
are function of
a) String speed
b) Fluid properties such as viscosity & gel strength.
c) Annular clearance (string/hole diameter)
An acceptable rough estimate of swab pressure or decrease in BHP while pulling the
string can be obtained by considering the friction effect values same as the
circulating annular pressure losses. Or we can say that the minimum BHP while
pulling string could be static BHP minus the circulating annular friction losses.
Though as the string is pulled up, some loss in BHP due to swabbing effect can not
be avoided, however, adequate measures should be taken to check that the pressure
reduction should not exceed the overbalance pressure especially against permeable
zones. Swabbing during trips could be detected by filling the trip sheets. If the
swabbing remains undetected during initial stage, more and more formation fluid will
reduce the BHP continuously and a stage will come when the well will start kicking
and unloading the fluid from the well.
Swab pressure can be very low but are compounded if :-

i) Well fluid viscosity and gel strength is high
ii) String movement is rapid
TRIP MARGIN
During pulling out, upward motion of the work string in the borehole creates a swab
pressure. This decreases BHP when string is in motion. One way of minimising this is
to use safe tripping speeds and having close monitoring of string volume pulled out &
fluid volume pumped in to keep the hole full. Another practice to tackle the problem is
to keep fluid gradient greater than the formation pressure gradient. The resulting
overbalance permits safe tripping and connection operations. This extra fluid weight
is called trip margin.
Page....297
Exercises of fluid gradient, hydrostatic & formation pressure & BHP
Exercise : 1
Consider Following Well Data :
Well Measured Depth - 9,800 ft
Well TVD - 8,200 ft
Well fluid Density - 11.5 ppg
Calculate :
a) Well fluid Gradient
b) Hydrostatic Pressure
c) Hydrostatic Pressure if 11.5 ppg fluid in the well is replaced as below :
0 – 7,000 ft TVD - 12 ppg

7,000 – 8,200 ft TVD - 11.5 ppg
Solution :
Page....298
Exercise : 2
Consider Following Well Data :
Well Measured Depth - 11, 900 ft
Well TVD - 9, 600 ft
Formation Pressure Gradient - 0.65 psi / ft
Well Fluid Density - 12.4 ppg
Annular pressure Loss @ 40 SPM - 90 psi
Minimum Swab Pressure( while lifting string ) - 80 psi
Calculate :
a) Formation Pressure.
b) Bottom Hole Pressure while making a connection ( string is idle)
c) Bottom Hole Pressure during circulation @ 40 SPM.
d) Bottom Hole Pressure during lifting the string with pump off.
Solution :
Page....299
CHAPTER-3 KICK FUNDAMENTALS
KICK
It is defined as an influx or flow of formation fluid into the well-bore & can occur any
time the formation fluid pressure is greater than the pressure exerted by the drilling
/completion fluid in the well bore.
BLOWOUT
It is an uncontrolled flow of formation fluid at the surface or sub surface from the well
bore. A blow-out is the result of an uncontrolled kick.
PRIMARY WELL CONTROL

During normal drilling, work-over & well completion operations the hydrostatic
pressure of well fluid is greater than the pressure of the fluids in the formation. The
maintenance of sufficient hydrostatic head exerted by well-bore fluid to hold back the
formation fluid pressure is termed as “Primary Well Control”.
SECONDARY WELL CONTROL

If due to any reason hydrostatic pressure in the well bore falls below the formation
pressure, formation fluid may enter in the well bore & if so happens, the primary
control may be temporarily lost and a proper use of blow out preventers & kill
procedures will provide Secondary well control, or in other words secondary well
control involves detection & safe handling of kicks so as to re-establish primary well
control .
TERTIARY WELL CONTROL

It involves the techniques used to control a blow-out once the primary & Secondary
Control are lost. This primarily involves a re-establishment of the secondary control
system such as : the well bore conduit, well head & BOP equipment & subsequently
establishing the Primary Control.
CAUSES OF KICKS
Kicks occur as a result of formation pressure being greater than hydrostatic pressure
in the well-bore which causes fluid to flow from the formation into the well-bore. The
main factors which can lead to this condition can be classified as :
Improper hole fill up on trips.
Swabbing.
Insufficient fluid density.
Lost circulation.
Improper hole fill up on trips

When the work string is pulled out of the hole, the fluid level decreases by a volume
equivalent to the steel volume. If the hole does not take the calculated volume of
fluid, it is assumed a formation fluid has entered the well-bore. Therefore, while
pulling out the well should be filled continuously by using trip tank and differences of
calculated and actual fluid volume be recorded at regular interval. Similarly while
running in the string, trip tank should be used to monitor displacement volume
correctly at regular intervals.
Page....300
If the hole is not filled to replace the steel volume, the fluid column in the well-bore
shall go down and reduce the hydrostatic pressure. At the same time the pulling out
of string causes a reduction in BHP due to swabbing effect. Hence, to avoid the
possibility of any formation fluid entering the bore hole due to combination of above
two factors the hole should be properly / regularly filled during tripping out.
In the field normally the practice is to fill up the hole either on a regular fill up
schedule or to fill up continuously with a re-circulating trip tank. Irrespective of the
practice being used an accurate method of measuring the amount of fluid actually
being taken by hole should be monitored and an accurate record of actual volume v/s
theoretical volume should be kept. If at any stage during pulling-out it is observed that
the actual filled in volume is significantly less than volume of steel that has been
removed, it means that some formation fluids must have entered the well-bore.
Swabbing
Swab pressures are created by pulling out the string from the borehole. It reduces the
bottom hole pressure. If the reduced bottom hole pressure becomes less than the
formation pressure, a potential kick may enter the well-bore. Various factors
conducive to swab pressures are string pulling speed, fluid properties & annular
clearance.
Abnormal pressure
In case of wild cat or exploratory drilling, most often the formation pressures are not
known accurately. While drilling, sometimes the bit suddenly penetrates an abnormal
pressure formation. As a result the fluid hydrostatic pressure becomes less than the
formation pressure and may cause a well kick. There are various geological reasons
for abnormal pressures, some of these are discussed in 1.8 of this book.
Insufficient fluid density

If a formation is drilled using a fluid density that exerts less hydrostatic pressure than
the pore pressure, the formation fluid may begin to flow into the well-bore. Kicks
caused by insufficient fluid density seem to have the obvious solution of drilling with
high fluid density. The best solution is to maintain the fluid density slightly greater
than that required to balance the formation pressure in order to avoid fluid loss.
Lost Circulation
Lost circulation is another factor which reduces the hydrostatic pressure. When a kick
occurs due to lost circulation, the problem may become more severe. A large volume
of kick fluid may enter the hole before the fluid level increase is observed at the
surface. It is a recommended practice to keep the annulus always topped to avoid
considerable reduction in BHP when lost circulation is encountered.
KICK DETECTION
Following are the kick indicators (or positive kick signs) & warning signs
Kick Indicators ( positive kick signs)
Increase in return flow (Pumps On)
One of the most positive kick indicator is increase in flow rate at the flow line with
pumps on. The entrance of any fluid into the well bore causes the flow rate to
increase.
Page....301
Flow from well (Pumps Off)
Stopping the pump causes a reduction in bottom hole pressure equivalent to the
annular pressure drop, so flow check is a reliable method of checking for a well kick.
If the well does not flow when the pump is shut off and remains static for two or three
minutes, then no well kick is entering.
Pit Volume Increase

An increase in pit volume is obvious & another positive indication of flow into the well
bore & can be easily verified. If an increase in pit volume is seen, shut off the pump
and make a flow check. If the well does not flow, no kick is entering.
Decrease in Pump Pressure and Increase in Pump Stroke

In case of kick there is under balanced condition between the fluid in the string and
the mixed column of fluid and influx in the annulus. Therefore, circulating pressure
gradually decreases and unless the pump throttle is changed, pump speed slowly
increases.
Hole remains full or does not take proper amount of fluid while pulling out
When the pump is switched off, a reduction in BHP equal to annular pressure losses
occurs. To prevent kick while tripping, basic requirement is that hole must be kept full
of work fluid and the volume of fluid required to fill the hole must be equal to the steel
displacement of string pulled out. Therefore, while tripping out whenever it is noticed
that the hole is not taking proper amount of fluid, a flow check should be done.
Volume displacement change during tripping-in
The sequence of events leading to a kick while tripping-in the hole is :
The hole does not stop flowing during making connection between the stands.
Increase in pit volume more than steel volume displacement.
Note: In order to avoid well kicks while tripping, trip schedule must be made and trip
tank must be used to monitor the hole fill up (in case of tripping-out) and fluid
displacement (in case of tripping-in).
Change In String Weight

Due to entry of lighter formation fluids in the event of a kick, there is loss in buoyancy
& this shall show a definite increase in string weight at surface.
Oil or Gas Show During Circulation

During circulation any oil or gas shows are indicators of entry of formation fluid. A flow
check should be made to check whether the well has become under-balance or not.
Increase in Trip, Connection and Back-ground Gas

An increase in trip and / or connection gas should be considered as an indication that
the well could have become under-balance. Connection gas will normally occur on
bottoms-up (calculated lag time). Gas analysers are used to establish trend line
which is called background gas. A gas feed in from a permeable zone will change this
trend line. The amount of feed in will determine the intensity of the trend change. Gas
Page....302
readings are arbitrary and are not proportional to actual gas concentration in the well
fluid.
The most common error with gas cutting is the tendency to maintain the fluid weight
at its original value with addition of weighing material and without removing all the
gas. Since moderate gas cutting contributes so little to bottom hole pressure
reduction, the addition of weighing material may increase the fluid density enough to
cause lost circulation.
Surface Pressure
The above two indicators do not necessarily mean that the well has become under-
balance. The only means of checking the under-balance is to shut-in the well &
record the surface pressure. A small shut-in casing pressure with no shut-in tubing
pressure clearly indicates that the well is not under-balance.
Change In Fluid Properties

In the event of entry of formation fluid in the well-bore, the properties of well-bore fluid
such as viscosity & chloride content may change. Therefore the properties of the
circulating fluid should be monitored regularly.
GAS CHARACTERISTICS & BEHAVIOUR

Influx in a well-bore consists of water, oil or gas, or combinations of these three.
Since gases are compressible, they behave differently as compared to oil or water
kicks. The volume occupied by gas depends upon both pressure & temperature.
Gases also exert same pressure in all directions. Therefore as a gas kick is circulated
out of the well-bore, it must be allowed to expand so as to decrease its pressure in
order to keep the bottom hole pressure constant.
Gas Expansion:
As per the Gas law, ignoring gas compressibility, the gas expansion follows following
equation :
PV
= Constant
T
or
P1 V1 P2 V2
=
T1 T2
A gas kick of one barrel at a depth of 10000 ft & bottom hole temperature of 200 o F
in a well having fluid density of 10 ppg, shall expand to 179 bbls ( assuming surface
atmospheric pressure of 14.2 psi & temperature of 98 o F) if the well is not shut-in &
gas is allowed to expand freely. During well killing, the gas is not allowed to expand
freely as it shall result in unloading the well fluid at the surface & shall result in
considerable reduction in bottom hole pressure. The diagram below shows the
relationship between the free expansion of gas v/s well depth.
Page....303
SURFACE Gas Volume
(Pressure)
RAPID GAS EXPANSION
NEAR THE SURFACE
10000 FT Well Depth
GAS IN WELL-BORE FLUID
Figure Free expansion of gas as it rises to the surface
Gas Migration :
After the well has been shut-in on a gas kick, the gas being lighter fluid can start
migrating or percolating up in the hole as the well remains shut-in. The average
migration speed accepted by the industry world-wide is about 1000 ft/hr, though in
some cases it could be more or less then this value since the migration speed
depends upon several factors which are listed below ;
a) Degree of mixing : The rate of migration depends upon the degree of mixing of
gas with well-bore fluid as it enters the well. For example, a swabbed in gas
kick being largely in continuous phase shall migrate faster as compared to a gas
kick taken during drilling as in this case the gas gets dispersed in the drilling
fluid till the time the pumps are stopped.
b) Density difference: The rate of migration also depends upon the difference in
densities of well-bore fluid & gas influx, the larger the difference the faster shall
the gas migrate.
c) Viscosity of drilling fluid: The higher the viscosity the lower shall be the gas
migration rate.
d) Annular Clearance : The gas percolates in the annulus on one side whereas
the well-bore fluid falls below the gas on the other side. The smaller the annular
clearance the lower shall be the migration rate.
Page....304
It may also be noted that even during well killing the gas percolation occurs & the gas
reaches the surface earlier then the estimated time lag. The higher the annular
velocity of well-bore fluid the faster shall the gas migrate during killing.
Open Well Migration
In open well situation, gas influx after entering the well bore will start migrating &
expanding to the surface. This will reduce bottom hole pressure and a point will be
reached when the overbalance on the bottom of the hole is lost.
0 16 bbl
(288ft)
8 bbl
(144ft)
2500 ft 4 bbl
(72ft)
5000 ft 2 bbl
(36ft)
7500 ft
10000 ft 1 bbl
(18ft)
BHP (psi) 5200 5181 5163 5125 5050

EMW(ppg) 10.0 9.96 9.92 9.85 9.71
Figure Open well gas migration
The effect of gas migration in an open well will be as below:
a) Bottom hole pressure reduces.

b) Gas bubble pressure reduces.
c) Pressure below the bubble reduces.
d) Pressure above the bubble remains constant.
Closed in condition migration

If gas is allowed to migrate in a well-bore that is closed in, there will be no room for
expansion. The gas will carry its original pressure with it while moving up in the well-
bore. As a result there shall be a pressure rise on both SICP and SITP gauges. This
causes the well to pressure up in all directions creating extra pressure at the shoe
and on the bottom of the hole, whilst the gas bubble pressure remains unchanged.
The effect is summarised as below :
Page....305
a) Gas influx pressure remains same.
b) Bottom hole pressure increases.
c) Pressure at any point below or above the influx increases.
500 psi 3100 psi 4400 psi 5050 psi 5700 psi
0 5700psi
)
5700psi
)
2500 ft 5700psi
)
5000 ft 5700psi
7500 ft
10000 ft 5700psi
BHP (psi) 5700 8300 9600 10250 10900
Figure Closed well gas migration
Example:
Gas migration without expansion ( When gas is at bottom).
T.D. = 9,000 ft Fluid density = 12 ppg

Formation Pressure = 6,000 psi Influx volume = 10 bbl
Influx height = 570 ft Influx gradient = 0.12 psi/ft
Pressure at bottom of bubble = 6,000 psi

Pressure at top of bubble = 6,000 - (570‟ 0.12)= 5,931 psi
` SITP = Formation Pressure – Hydrostatic Pressure in string

= 6000 - 0.052 9000 12 = 384 psi
Page....306
SICP = Formation Pressure – Hydrostatic Pressure in annulus =
6000 - ( 570 0.12 +.052 8,430 12) = 671 psi
BHP = Formation Pressure = 6,000 psi
Gas percolation without expansion ( when gas top is at 4,000 ft )
As per Boyle‟s Law, P1 V1 = P2 V2 = Constant

Therefore, during migration as the gas is not allowed to expand its volume &
pressure will remain same.
Gas Pressure = 6,000 psi
SICP = Pressure at top of bubble - Hydrostatic Pressure above bubble

= 5,931- (0.052 4,000 12) = 3,435 psi
Increase in SICP due to migration = 3435 – 675 = 2,764 psi
BHP = SICP + Hydrostatic Pressure in annulus

= 3,435 + ( 570 0.12 +.052 8,430 12)
= 8,764 psi
Increase in BHP due to migration = 8764 – 6000 = 2,764 psi
SITP = BHP – Hydrostatic Pressure in string

= 8,760 – ( 0.052 9,000 12 ) = 3,148 psi
Increase in SITP due to migration = 3,148 – 384 = 2,764 psi
From the above example the following can be concluded :
Gas influx pressure remains constant during closed well gas migration.
SICP, SITP, BHP & pressure at any point above or below the influx
increases
by same amount.
SOLUBILITYOF GASES
Water Base Fluid

Solubility of hydrocarbon gases in water base fluids is very poor & therefore gases
tend to migrate up in the fluid rather than getting dissolved. A gas kick detection in
water base fluid can be easily noticed provided surface indicators are carefully
observed.
Oil Base Fluid

It is very difficult to detect a gas kick in oil based fluid due to high gas solubility. Gas
may dissolve completely in oil base fluid instead of migrating upwards as happens in
Page....307
water base fluid. Pit gain may not be significant unless the producing formation
becomes considerably under balance. In this case when the gas saturated fluid
reaches a location where hydrostatic pressure falls below the bubble point, the gas
will suddenly start coming out of solution causing a rapid increase in flow. This results
in unloading the annulus thereby causing large pit gains. Therefore, it is essential to
detect the kicks when they occur and not when the bubble reaches the surface.
Page....308
CHAPTER-4 COMPLETION & WORK-OVER FLUIDS
Work-over fluids are the fluids used during reworking operations such as
cementing, perforating, acidizing, fracturing, plugging back to complete in shallow
zone, well killing & cleaning etc. which are carried out in the well after initial
completion. Depending upon the requirement, these fluids could be nitrogen, brine
or fluid.
Completion fluids are used for a short period when communication is being
established between the productive zone & well bore e.g. while perforating. The
primary function of these fluids is to contain reservoir pressure & at the same time not
to damage the pay zone.
Packer fluids may be same as completion fluid & is placed in the annulus above the
packer. The packer fluids should remain stable for a long period, should be non-
corrosive and be able to maintain pressure control.
CHARACTERISTICS OF COMPLETION AND WORK-OVER FLUIDS
It should have sufficient weight so as to balance reservoir pressure but not to

exceed formation fracture pressure.
It should have as less solids particles as possible so as to avoid plugging of
perforations and the producing formation.
It should be of non-corrosive nature.
It should remain stable if required to be placed in the well for a long period.
It should be environment friendly.
It should have reasonably good suspension & proppant transport properties.
Given below are two basic groups of brines.
Monovalent cations
These are Sodium Chloride, Sodium Bromide, Potassium Chloride & Potassium
Bromide and are used especially in wells where formation is sensitive to Calcium or
where presence of carbon dioxide gas can cause insoluble precipitation with calcium.
The maximum density of these brines is up to 12.7 ppg
Divalent cations
They are Calcium chloride, Calcium bromide& Zinc bromide & a maximum of density
of 20.2 ppg can be achieved with theses brines.
TYPES OF COMPLETION AND WORK-OVER FLUIDS

Various types of completion & work-over fluids are :
Water Base Fluids

Gas fluids
Oil Fluids
Page....309
Water Base Fluids are of three types viz. Fresh water, Low solid Salt water and
Water base fluid.
Fresh water or low salinity (less than 5000ppm) water is rarely used as it can cause
clay to hydrate which can damage the formation.
Low solid salt water fluids generally known as brines, have the advantage of high
density with very little solids. Salts added to water base fluids have many benefits
such as they minimise clay hydration, result in least formation damage and at the
same time facilitate increase of fluid density so as to have adequate pressure control.
Most of these fluids are single salt brines in which only one salt e.g. sodium chloride (
NaCl ), potassium chloride (KCl), calcium chloride (CaCl2), calcium bromide (CaBr2),
zinc bromide (ZnBr2) etc. are added to fresh water.
Single Salt Brines

Potassium brines are very useful in water sensitive formations, they have low
corrosion property if the pH value is maintained between 7-10 & can give a maximum
density of 9.7 ppg.
Sodium brines are widely used brines. Though these brines can be easily prepared
up to a density of 9.7 ppg, but for preparing a density of 10 ppg (at 60 0F) additional
salt dissolves very slowly.
Calcium brines up to density of 11.6 ppg can be easily prepared though for higher
density operating problems may be encountered in winters due to freezing of the
solution at about 44 0F. These brines too have low corrosion property like sodium
chloride & potassium chloride.
Mixed Salt Brines

This is used if the brine densities more than 11.6.ppg are required & usually two-salt
brines are used. Mostly it is calcium chloride/calcium bromide (CaCl 2/CaBr2). In
CaCl2/CaBr2 brine the base ingredient is a calcium bromide solution of about 14.1 to
14.3 ppg with pH ranging from 7.0 to 7.5. Calcium chloride pellets or flakes are added
for increasing density of CaBr2 brine to 15.1. In CaBr2/CaCl2 brine the corrosion is
minimum as because the pH is usually between 7 to 9.
Brine Type & Density Range
BRINE TYPE DENSITY RANGE

KCl 8.4 – 9.7
NaCl 8.4 – 10.0
CaCl 2 8.4 – 11.6
NaBr 9.0 – 12.4
NaBr/KCl 8.4 – 10.0
KBr/KCl 8.4 – 10.9
NaBr/NaCl 8.4 – 12.7
NaCl/CaCl2 10.0 – 11.7
CaCl2/CaBr2 11.7 – 15.0
NaBr/ZnBr2 12.8 – 18.0
CaCl2/CaBr2/ZnBr2 15.2 – 19.2
CaCl2/ZnBr2 15.5 – 20.2
Page....310
BRINE DENSITY MEASUREMENT
Since the density of brine decreases in well-bore due to increase in bottom hole
temperature then the following equation can be used to calculate the required
surface density to get a specified density in the well-bore :
PPGDesired = {( BHT – Surf temp) X Thermal factor} + PPGFormation pr + PPG Overbalance
where
PPGDesired - Brine density at the surface at surface temperature ( including any

desired overbalance)
BHT - Formation temperature in degrees F
Surface temp - Surface temperature in degrees F
Thermal factor – From the chart below( based on brine densities)
BRINE DENSITY THERMAL FACTOR

8.4 TO 9.0 .0017
9.1 TO 11.0 .0025
11.1 TO 14.5 .0033
14.6 TO 17.0 .0040
17.1 TO 20.2 .0048
The conventional mud balance gives only tentative estimate of the density as it can
not take into account the difference due to the temperature. The higher the brine
density the significance of temperature measurement and correction increases.
Figure Mud Balance
The brine hydrometer is the equipment used to measure the specific gravity as well
as temperature. It is a more accurate tool as with the help of temperature
measurement, the density can be corrected.
Page....311
Brine density in PPG
PPG Brine = Sp. Gravity X 8.33 X Temp. Conversion
Water–Base Fluids
These are combination of water, clays and chemicals that are sometimes used in
completion and workover operations. Solids in some water base fluid can damage
the formation extensively but still it is used sometimes because of its low cost and
ease in handling. Also it is easier to control high pressure and high permeable gas
wells with water base fluids.
Gas Fluids
In low pressure reservoirs gas such as Nitrogen & Natural Gas can be used as
completion & work-over fluids. While using these fluids bottom hole pressure (BHP)
during operation is maintained by applying back pressure from the surface. Use of
Nitrogen over Natural gas has following advantages:
1. It is non-combustible
2. It is inert & does not react with metal & rubber parts in the well-bore
3. It has good hole cleaning & carrying properties
Page....312
Oil Fluids
Oil fluids too can be used as completion & work-over fluids especially in low pressure
reservoirs since they have low density of about 7 ppg. These fluids have following
advantages & disadvantages:
Advantages
1. Easily available, Non-corrosive & Economical
2. Do not cause swelling of clays
Disadvantages
1. May contain solids that can damage the producing formation
2. Can not be used for high pressure wells
3. Inflammable
4. Have corrosive properties if H2S or CO2 is present
PACKER FLUIDS
The fluids placed in the tubing-casing annulus above the production packer before
putting the well on production are referred to as packer fluids. The main functions of
the packer fluids may be summarised as follows:-
1. To provide sufficient formation pressure control.
2. To prevent the casing from collapsing & work string & tubing from bursting.
The desired properties of a good packer fluid are :-
1. Non corrosive
2. Stable with time and temperature
3. Economical
4. Easily pumpable
5. Capable of controlling well pressures and solid suspension
6. Packer seal compatible.
The clays in the fluid may become cement like substance causing the tubing string to
be stuck in the well. Such complications have led to development of many good
packer fluids overcoming all the above difficulties. Any fluid in which the solids
separate out from fluid and settle down should not be used as packer fluid.
Figure : Placement of Packer fluid
Page....313
CHAPTER-5 WORK-OVER AND COMPLETION EQUIPMENT
For the purpose of taking production from a well, many tools are used both above &
below the surface e.g. production tree, flow couplings, surface & sub-surface safety
valves, mandrels, landing nipples, packers, sliding sleeves, gas lift valves, bridge
plugs etc. Some of these are discussed below.
PRODUCTION TREE
It is the top most equipment on the well head & consists of a set of valves to control
the flow of oil/gas from the well. An illustrated figure of a typical production tree &
description of various parts is given below.
Figure : Production Tree schematic
Page....314
Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauges are provided at various places on a production tree & are used to
monitor tubing head, casing & annulus pressure.
Gauge Flange or Cap

It seals the top of the tree & also has provision for connecting pressure gauge.
Tubing can be accessed & bottom hole test equipment as well as lubricator can be
installed after removing the cap.
Crown or Swab Valve
It is the top most valve on a tree & is used to shut-off tubing pressure for rigging up
coil tubing or wire-line equipment.
Flow or Cross Tee
It facilitates the lowering of wire-line or other tools down the tubing while the well is
producing.
Wing Valve
This valve is used to shut-in production for routine repair operations after the wing
valve.
Choke
It is used to control the flow from the well.
Master Valve
There are two master valves i.e. lower & upper master valve. These valves remain
open for most of the time & are sparingly used to avoid the wear & tear.
Surface Safety Valves
These valves are installed in the production tree & provide a means to shut the well
at surface in case of any emergency.
TUBING HANGER
Tubing head is screwed on top of the work string (i.e. tubing) & serves as anchor for
tubing & control lines of sub surface safety valves. It rests in the tubing head & also
has provision for installation of back pressure valve.
Figure Single string Tubing hanger
Page....315
BACK PRESSURE VALVE
The purpose of a back pressure valve is to allow the removal, repair or testing of
production tree without killing the well. There are two types of back pressure valves
which are described below.
One way valve
It allows fluid to be circulated down the tubing but closes against the well bore
pressure from the bottom & is normally used when the removal or repair of
production tree is required. Care should be taken to use a lubricator while installation
or removal of the valve. Cameron Type H one way back pressure valve is shown in
the figure.
Figure : Cameron Type H one way back pressure valve

Two way valve
It holds pressure from both top as well as bottom & is normally used when the tree is
to be pressure tested. Cameron Type H two way back pressure valve is shown in the
figure.
Figure : Cameron Type H two way back pressure valve

Page....316
BLOWOUT PREVENTOR EQUIPMENT
Wire-line Lubricator
Wire Line Operations
Wire Line units are used to carry out many task during well completion & work over
operations such as
Setting & retrieving down hole equipment e.g. packers/plugs, gas lift
valves, SSSV etc.
Clearing the tubing flow path of paraffin / sand etc.
Well logging, perforation, depth measurement
Open & Close sliding sleeves & circulating ports
Fishing/retrieving stuck tools in tubing string
Lubricator
A lubricator provides seal around the wire-line. The major components of a lubricator
are :
Stuffing box
Riser
Wire-line valves
Quick unions
The stuffing box provides the seal against the well pressure. The riser is made up of
pup joints of tubing having rated working pressure greater than the well-head. Quick
unions are made up by hands to facilitate easy rigging up. Lubricators are installed
directly above the master valve or above wire-line BOP.
Figure : Lubricator
Page....317
Wire Line BOP
Although usually stuffing boxes are used for carrying out wire-line operations as they
effectively seal around wire-lines but as they have limited pressure ratings, wire-line
BOPs‟ are used when the well-bore pressures are expected to be more than the
ratings of the stuffing boxes.
Figure : Wire-line BOP
Coil Tubing Stripper Assembly

Coil tubing equipment consists of tubing roll, injector head to move pipe in or out of
the well, power pack, stripper assembly, BOP, operating console etc. It finds
application in variety of work-over operations such as :
Paraffin removal
Sand cleaning
Stimulation operation
Cementing
Limited Drilling with down-hole motors
Page....318
Figure Coil Tubing Unit
Coil Tubing Stripper are used for sealing against well pressure & is attached to the
lower part of injector assembly. The three main components of a stripper are packer
inserts non-extrusion ring & energizer. Two split rubber (urethane, nitrile or viton
elastomer) strippers are fitted in the cylindrical bore of stripper body. To complete the
pack-off, the energizer or hydraulic piston moves upward & makes contact with the
seal elements. A stripper assembly may consist of a conventional stripper along-with
tandem stripper or conventional stripper with a BOP/ lubricator.
Figure Conventional Stripper Tandem Stripper
Page....319
SUB-SURFACE EQUIPMENT
Work-string & Production Tubing

A work string is a length of tubing or drill pipe which is used during completion or
work-over operation. Majority of the wells are produced through tubing because it
protects the casing string from corrosion. The drill pipes are also used sometimes to
carry out a work-over operation such as fishing, milling etc. The most common sizes
of tubing are 3-1/2”, 2-7/8” & 2-3/8”. A tubing string is classified by size, weight (ppf) &
grades (N-80, J-55 etc.). While designing a tubing string for a well the criteria such as
tubing burst & collapse are considered which are provided at the end of the book.
Figure : Schematic Sub-surface equipment Assembly
Page....320
Completion equipment
Sub-surface completion equipment consists of following.
Packers
Sub-surface Control Equipment e.g. SSCSV,SCSSV, Bottom hole
chokes & regulators, Injection safety valves
Circulating Devices e.g. Side pocket mandrel, sliding sleeves
Expansion Joints
Safety Joints
Landing Nipples
Polished Bore Receptacles
Flow Coupling & Blast Joint
Packers
There are many packers to choose from, for both conventional and specialized
applications. There are many factors to be taken into account for selection of packers
for a particular well.
The packers can be single, dual or triple bore and are mainly classified as:
Retrievable
Permanent
Permanent – retrievable
Retrievable Packers:
They are run as an integral part of the tubing string. They are set either
mechanically or hydraulically and can be released by pulling or rotating the
tubing.
The advantages of retrievable packers are:
Tubing can be landed and the Christmas tree installed.

The packer does not have to be milled out if it becomes necessary to remove
it, thus saving rig time.
Packer can be reused in other applications.
Mechanical retrievable packers can be reused in the same well without
redressing.
Most of testing and completion packers are retrievable type.
The disadvantages of this type of packer are:
Pulling may swab the well in if packer is not fully released.

They have lower differential pressure rating unless otherwise called for
Equalization of pressure across the packer may be difficult.
Sand or other deposits above the packer may make it difficult to retrieve.
Inclusion of a safety joint to counter this, introduces a weak point in the tubing
string and an additional possible leak source.
Page....321
Rotational release should be avoided in highly deviated wells, as it can be difficult to
get the rotational torque transmitted to the packer and can damage the control line for
the SC-SSV.
While stimulating the well with cold fluids, excessive contraction of the tubing may
shear the packer release studs, of straight pull release type packers, if the hold down
buttons are not holding (when expansion joint has not been provided in the string to
take care of tubing length changes).
Permanent Packers:
This type of packer once set, can be regarded as part of the casing and can
only be removed destructively by milling.
Tubing can be released from, and run back and sealed into, this type of
packer.
Permanent packers can be set mechanically, hydraulically or electrically (wire
line or explosive set) is required.
They are recommended for use where:
* Long term completion (i.e. retrievability is less possible) is required.

* High pressure differential is required.
* Maximum dependability is required.
* Large packer bore is required.
* Exact location of the packer is critical and wire line set is used.
Bottom extension below the packer is required to accommodate down hole tools for
isolation of the bottom producing formation in case of tubing retrieval, wellhead
damage or casing leak. The bottom extension should include the following:
A landing nipple to land a plug or safety valve.

A flow coupling directly above the landing nipple to safeguard against
erosion failure from turbulence caused by the safety valve.
A tubing section to enable the tail pipe to be cut-off, should a plug
become stuck in the landing nipple.
A packer milling extension of approximately six feet to provide space for
the catch sleeve of the packer milling tool:
The locator tubing seal assemble is designed with external seals which pack off in
the polished bore of the permanent packer to seal off the annulus at the packer.
Basic seal units include two seal stacks, but any number of seal units can be
screwed together to increase the length of the assembly. It is not recommended to
use a long continuous series of seals in a seal bore/seal bore extension because of
excessive seal friction and possible concentricity problem of packer bore and seal
bore extension. Spacer type seal units should be considered in these cases.
When locator spacer seal assemblies are used, it is recommended that a seal bore
extension or seal protector be included between the packer and milling extension to
confine the seals when tubing movements occur.
Page....322
The tubing seal assembly does not hook into the packer. Because it is free to move, it
does not allow the tubing string to be landed in tension except that of its own weight.
As the top collar of the assembly seats on the top of the packer body, the tubing can
be landed with set down weight.
Tubing contraction, caused by well shut-in or injection of cold fluids, should be

carefully calculated to ensure that with maximum shortening of the tubing, the seals
still remain in the packer bore. Tubing expansion above the original design estimate
is liable to cause buckling.
The anchor tubing seal assembly is latched to the packer, enabling the tubing string
to be landed in tension in order to counter expansion during production. This has the
advantage of preventing helical buckling if sufficient tension is applied, resulting in
easier wire line work. Because there is no movement between packer and tubing, the
risk of leakage is reduced.
There are several methods of latching the tubing (collet, rotation, sleeve), but all of
them can produce problems in tubing recovery, especially:
In deviated holes,
In corrosive wells,
In wells where a zone produces above the packer,
When solids have settled out in an annulus containing `weighted‟ fluid.
If packer fluid is to be used with latched tubing, care must be taken to specify a
solid –free fluid.
There are two main forces acting on a packer:
The hydraulic pressure forces that act directly on the packer

The tubing to packer force
The hydraulic force is usually in the form of differential pressure acting from above
or below. This is determined by the difference between well pressure acting upward
and annular pressure acting downward. One of the factors to be taken into account
when selecting a packer is the kind of force it will be required to resist to prevent
unseating.
Permanent packers can withstand pressure differentials from above or below. The
differential pressure rating for retrievable packers depends on whether they are
compression, tension or tension/compression types. Compression packers will not
become unseated by a downward force applied either by tubing weight or annular
pressure from above. This type therefore resists a downward pressure differential.
Tension packers are the reverse of the compression type and cannot be unseated
by an upward pressure differential exerted by tubing tension or by pressure from
below. Tension /compression packers will not become unseated by pressure from
either direction and can withstand a differential from above or below.
Page....323
To determine whether weight–set or tension-set packers will become unseated under
given operational conditions, a simple force–balance calculation should be
adequate.
In a high pressure well, differential pressure across the packer can be reduced by
loading the annulus with fluid of the correct weight. It should be noted that, for design
purpose, the tubing to packer forces need to be calculated for the various operating
conditions.
MG Retrievable Casing
Packer
MR-3 Single grip

M1-X Production Retrievable Casing Packer
Packer
MDFBB Permanent Packer
MDF Permanent Packer MAD-1 Tension packer
Figure: Few Packers ( Courtesy Smith Oil Tools)
Page....324
The M1-X Production Packer is a mechanical set, retrievable packer that effectively
meets the requirements for zone isolation, injection and production. The full opening
ID permits unrestricted flow and passage of full gage wireline tools and accessories.
Mechanical lock-set action closes an internal bypass and allows application of
pressure above or below the packer. The large internal bypass reduces surge and
swab pressure when running or retrieving the packer. The bypass closes during
setting of the packer and opens to equalize pressure before releasing the slips.
The MG Retrievable Casing Packer is a setdown, weight activated, production

packer. When combined with an unloader and a hold down assembly, the MG can be
used for will stimulation, testing or other pressure operations.
The MR-3 Retrievable Production Packer is a multi-use, dependable set down

packer used for production, stimulation and testing operations. The MR-3 is available
in both single and double grip configurations.
The MDF and MDFBB Permanent Production Packers are high performance
completion packers for the most demanding well conditions. The MDFBB features a
larger bore than the MDF for use with larger diameter production tubing.
The MAD-1 Retrievable Tension Packer is a tension set packer designed for
applications where weight set packers are not practical. The MAD-1 is ideal for
shallow well applications such as water floods where landing production tubing in
tension is preferred. This economical packer is compact and simple to run and set.
SUB SURFACE CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Subsurface control is executed by a number of devices-
Safety valves
Bottom hole chokes and regulators
Injection safety valves
Subsurface controlled subsurface safety valves (SSCSV)
These are of two types-
Differential pressure or velocity type which is spring operated and normally

open,
The pressure actuated type, which is dome pressure operated and normally
closed until acted upon by pressure greater than the pre-set dome pressure.
The differential pressure design valve shuts in the well automatically when abnormal
production flow results in higher pressure differential than the valve‟s spring setting.
This situation would arise if a rupture has occurred in the surface equipment. These
valves are usually wire line set, therefore, reduces flow area through the valve. This
Page....325
may be detrimental to down hole wire line jobs and to higher flow rates. These valves
are reopened either by application of tubing pressure or by wire line. It is normally
recommended that closing differential be selected at least 75 psi below the expected
emergency differential.
There are two main designs of this type of valve-
Valve and seat

Rotating ball
The ball-type valves have two advantages:
Through–conduit flow has less turbulence and permits higher

flow rates,
The metal to metal ball and seat are protected from erosion in
the operating condition.
Since pressure-differential type valves are designed to shut-in a well under

predetermined conditions, i.e. excess flow, they are not suitable for use:
When the increased flow rate necessary to shut the valve cannot
be obtained due to smaller tubing size in high volume wells.
If well conditions change to the extent that the well is not capable
of producing the flow rate for which the valve is set, so that the
valve can never close.
Where high production rates require maximum flow area through
the valve.
Downhole wireline requirements are not achievable.
The pressure actuated valves are pre-charged with a set dome pressure and held
open by well pressure. When the flowing pressure of the well drops, the valve closes
to shut – in the well. When tubing pressure is equalized with dome pressure, it will
open the valve automatically. These valves have limitation similar to those of the
pressure-differential type valves.
Surface controlled subsurface safety valves (SC-SSV)
There are two main categories of SC-SSV,
Wireline retrievable
Tubing retrievable.
Both these valves are controlled from the surface by hydraulic pressure through
external control lines. The valves are normally –closed type and are held open
against spring pressure by maintaining hydraulic pressure. The loss of hydraulic
pressure will cause the valve to close and shut-in the well. Surface control units,
which supply the hydraulic pressure, also monitor any abnormal increase or decrease
in flow line pressure.
Page....326
The main advantages of SC – SSV are:
Operation of the valve is controlled from the surface, avoiding the

dependence on subsurfce uncertain flow characteristics of a well.
Valve are designed to close regardless of tubing pressure .
They are independent of the well, being insensitive to pressure and
fluid surges.
Most types have a large bore and therfore permit high flow rates .
However, if they are tubing retrievable type, would require tubing pulling for repairs.
This involves costly worover. The tubing retrievable valves incorporate a landing
nipple which can receive a wire line retrievable valve (insert valve), to take over the
duties of a failed valve, thus enabling the pulling of tubing to be postponed until
convenient.
The wire line retrievable insert valve is usually controlled by the same hydraulic
system as the tubing integral valve. Obviously, if the malfunction is in the control line,
then the insert valve must be a subsurface controlled type valve.
An alternative redundant back-up system for greater safety includes a separate

safety valve landing nipple, or a separate tubing retrievable valve with its own
independent control line ( i.e. dual SC-SSV design), instead of a landing nipple
incorporated in the tubing integral safety valve itself. Such a system ensures that a
failed tubing retrievable type can always be locked out and its safety role replaced by
another surface controlled valve and tubing pulling is not required.
Subsurface control valves must be selected, designed, manufactured and tested to
withstand the expected producing conditions.
API RP 14A and 14B on the selection of safety valves; and the manufacturing and
test requirements for safety valves should be referred to for this purpose.
The well completion and test data constitute major input to valve selection and
design. Presently, accurate computer solutions are available for its design and
evaluation for changing reservoir parameters, variations in wellhead pressure and
different emergency conditions. It also helps in evaluating the problem of premature
closure.
Bottomhole chokes and regulators:
The fixed type choke or the spring –loaded regulator has a calibrated orifice,
restricting fluid flow to:
Prevent hydrate formation .

Prolong the self flowing life of a well by maintaining bottomhole
pressure.
Control water encroachment .
Bottom hole chokes are used in:
Commingled completions to control the fluid flow from each zone

In high pressure wells to reduce wellhead pressures
Page....327
Regulators usually consist of a valve and spring-loaded seat. The spring tension is
selected according to the amount of pressure differential required. When this
differential is reached, the seat moves away from the valve and the well is allowed to
flow. Chokes and regulators are normally wireline retrievable.
Injection safety valves:

These are used in injection wells to automatically shut-in the tubing in the event of
injection stoppage or flow reversal. They are wire line run/retrieved and can be ball,
flapper or stem and seat type valves.
CIRCULATION DEVICES
Side Pocket Mandrels

Side pocket mandrel has a polished receptacle/pocket at one side which receive
down hole tools lowered by wire line.
Side pocket mandrels are fitted anywhere in the tubing string where it is necessary
to:
Install a gas lift valve.

Install chemical injection valves.
Install downhole choke.
Install water injection flow regulators.
Complete the well dually or in multiple zones.
Test or treat selectively.
Provide communication between the tubing and the annulus
when required.
Either a working or a dummy valve or tool is installed in the mandrels. All valves,
regulators, other tools and dummies are installed and retrieved by wire line in side
pocket mandrel.
Figure Side pocket mandrel
Page....328
Sliding sleevs
Sliding sleeves are part of the tubing string and provide communication between
tubing and the annulus. They are also used for the following applications:
Displacing fluids.
Selective testing, treating or production in multiple completion
Killing by circulation.
Prressure equalizing
Using the tubing to `kick-off the second string in a dual
completion
Install valve or choke, flow regulator.
Figure Sliding Sleeve

Page....329
Methods of operating sliding sleeves include:
By wireline jarring up/down to open/close

By pressure, to open and close.
By pressure to open, wireline to close.
Jar up to open sleeves, as opposed to jar down to open, has the advantage that a
greater force can usually be exerted by upward jarring using hydraulic jars.
Downward jarring force, especially in deviated wells,, is limited to stem weight. Where
a large differential pressure, annulus to tubing, is expected, jar down to open sleeves
may be preferable. Any number of sliding sleeves may be incorporated in a tubing
string if they are the wire line –operated type, and they may all be opened or closed
with one wire line trip. Selective opening/closing of individual sleeves is also possible.
The use of the pressure-operated type is best restricted to that completion string
which requires only one sleeve. Most sliding sleeves incorporate landing profiles,
enabling a selection of control devices, including straddle tools to isolate a leaking
sleeve, to be looked in.
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are designed to be used in single and multi string completion when
tubing movement is expected because of temerature and/or pressure changes during
treatment or production. These are available with various stroke lengths. Opening
and closing strokes are fixed as per the operating requirements in a particular well.
Landing Nipples
Landing nipple in a tubing string enables the installation of various control equipment
with wire line. The landing nipples, with their variety of profiles, allow the
incorporation of an unlimited number in a tubing string, with complete selectivity for
setting and locking of the appropriate mandrels.
With certain makes of selective landing nipples it is important that they are installed in
a particular order from bottom to top.
The wells may have at least one landing nipple in the tubing string if wireline facility is
available. This is usually a `no-go‟ nipple at the bottom of the string. It performs a
dual function:
It prevents wire line tools larger than the no-go dimensions from being run
below the tubing.
It permits re cocking of hydraulic jars when trying to open or close sleeves
(jarring upwards).
It is important to ensure that the no-go nipple selected is compatible with the
equipment installed higher in the tubing string and will permit passage of any
equipment intended to be run below it.
Ported landing nipples are similar to conventional landing nipples with the addition of
ports for tubing/annulus communication. The flow path through the ports is
Page....330
determined by the wireline –run tool, usually a separation sleeve, landed and locked
in the nipple. In this way they perform the same function as sliding sleeves, with
disadvantage that the separation sleeve reduces the effective bore tubing.
Figure : Landing Nipples

Safety Joints
These are used between packers in dual and triple completions and in selective
completions using hydrostatic single-string packers. The shear pin safety joint is a
device that enables stuck tubing to be sheared off. But because it introduces a weak
joint, its use should be restricted wherever possible.
FIGURE Safety Joint
Page....331
Tubing cutters can be used to cut the tubing at any desired depth in most wells, but
where internal sanding is a problem, preventing the cutter reaching the desired
depth, then a safety joint is to be considered.
Polished Bore Receptacles
Polished bore receptacles (PBR) are used in liner completions and are run as part of
the liner above or below the liner hanger. A seal mandrel is run as part of the
production string and packs off in the PBR. This type of completion eliminates the
need for a production packer and is suitable for high pressure, high tempeature,
deep completions and for large vaolume producers.
Blast Joint & Flow Coupling
A flow coupling is, in fact, a length of tubing, usually with enhanced wall thickness,
the inner surface of which is specialy hardened. An adequate length of flow coupling
is twenty times the inside diameter, although a minimum of 36 inches is
recommended.
The flow coupling minimizes erosion due to velocity impact & turbulence of fluid
flowing inside tubing, whereas blast joint minimizes erosion due to flow impact of
fluid on outside of tubing string. Flow coupling are used in the tubing string of a
flowing well to protect the tubing, above and below such turbulence – equipment as
safety valves, from the abrasive action of the turbulence.
A blast joint is also a length of tubing with enhanced wall thickness, but is usually
manufactured from a heat treated alloy. Blast joints are used in the tubing string
opposite the perforations in producing zones where the jetting action of the fluid can
erode the outside of the tubing.
Figure Blast joint

Page....332
TESTING
Testing procedures of completion pressure control equipment are given below.
Packers :
Packers are pressure tested in the following two ways :
Internal testing though the tubing

For conducting internal test, a plug ( bull plug or wire set plug) is placed below
the packer & pressure is applied through the tubing while the annulus is
monitored for any pressure build up. In case there is any pressure build up on
the annulus, the packer is pulled out, redressed & again run-in for testing.
External testing down the casing

For conducting external testing, pressure is applied on the annulus while
monitoring the tubing. In case of any pressure build up in the tubing the seal
assembly or the packer is pulled out, redressed & again run-in.
Whenever there are repeated failed tests, it may be an indication of a bad spot in the
casing for which the packer can be set slightly above or below.
Lubricators
After the visual inspection of various sealing elements the wire line valve should be
function tested prior to the installation. After rigging up, pressure testing can be
conducted either by test pump or by exposing the lubricator to the well bore pressure.
While testing with a test pump, the pressure can be applied through the wing valve to
all the components after isolating the well by closing the master valve. The pressure
can also be applied through the pump-in sub or needle valve.
X-mas Tree
Prior to testing of the tree, a two way back pressure valve should be installed in the
tubing hanger. Pressure can be applied to the tree either by connecting the pump line
to the tree top or to the wing. The test fluid should be clean & free of solids. The trees
are normally tested to their rated working pressure. All the valves of the tree should
be closed one by one & tested. Leaking connection, if any, should be broken,
repaired & again tested.
Page....333
CHAPTER-6 SHUT IN PROCEDURES
LINE UP FOR SHUT IN
When one or more positive kick signs are observed, flow check is made. In case of
self flow well can be shut-in in two ways:
b) Soft shut-in
c) Hard shut-in
Line up for soft shut-in :
MGS
Manual choke
B
U
F
Distribution Block F
E
Drilling R
Spool T
HCR Manual
A
valve N
HCR Bleed/Vent K
Line
Remote choke
Shale shaker
Figure Line-up for soft shut-in
Choke line manual valve : Open

HCR : Close
Line between HCR & Choke : Open
Remote choke : Open (partially)
Line from choke to MGS : Open
Page....334
-in : MGS
Line up for hard shut
Manual choke
B
U
F
Distribution Block F
E
Drilling R
Spool T
HCR Manual
A
Valve Bleed/Vent N
HCR Line K
Remote choke
Figure Line-up for hard shut-in

Shale shaker
Choke line manual valve : Open
HCR : Close
Line between HCR & Choke : Open
Remote choke : Close
Line from choke to MGS : Open
SHUT IN PROCEDURES (As per API RP 59)

As per API following are the shut-in procedures for land/jack-up rigs & floating rigs.
While drilling on land and jack up rigs
a) Stop rotary.
b) Pick up kelly to clear tool joint above rotary table.
c) Stop fluid pump, check for self flow. If yes, close the well as follows:
Sl.No. Soft Shut in Hard Shut In

i) Open hydraulic control valve (HCR Open HCR / manual valve on
valve) / manual valve on choke choke line when choke is in fully
line. closed position.
ii) Close Blow Out Preventer Close Blow Out Preventer
(Preferably Annular Preventer) (Preferably Annular Preventer)
iii) Gradually close adjustable choke, Allow pressure to stabilise and
monitoring casing pressure. record SITP, SICP and Pit Gain.
iv) Allow the pressure to stabilise and
record SITP, SICP and Pit gain.
Page....335
While tripping on land and jack up rig
While tripping if hole is not taking proper amount of fluid , make a flow check. If the
well flows, install FOSV on the tubing, close it and close the annulus.
a) Position tool joint above rotary table and set string on slips.
b) Install full opening safety valve (FOSV) in open position, close it &
remove the slips. Following methods are recommended for shut- in
Sl.No. Soft Shut In Hard Shut In

i) Open HCR Valve / Manual valve Open choke line HCR valve with
on choke line. choke is fully closed position.
ii) Close Blow Out Preventer Close Blow Out preventer
(Preferably Annular Preventer) (Preferably Annular Preventer)
iii) Gradually close adjustable choke, Make up kelly and open FOSV
monitoring casing pressure.
iv) Make up kelly and open FOSV Allow pressure to stabilise and
record SITP, SICP and Pit gain.
v) Allow the pressure to stabilise and
record SITP, SICP and Gain.
While string is out of hole on land and jack up rig

a) Open HCR valve on choke line.
b) Close shear or blind ram.
c) Close choke (if choke is lined up for soft shut in).
d) Record SICP and pit gain.
Verify Shut-in
After the well has been shut-in following either of the above procedures, it shall be
prudent to verify the same as below :
Annulus
Verify for shut-in at the flow line i.e flow should cease after shut-in. Check that
there is no leakage through the BOP.
Work- string
Check that the stand-pipe manifold valves are in order for the shut-in e.g. bleed
valve/ hole fill-in valve etc. should be closed.
Choke Manifold
Check that choke manifold valves for the choke selected for killing are in order for
shut-in.
Page....336
SLOW CIRCULATION RATE
During well control operations, to avoid further entry of formation fluid it is essential to
keep BHP minimum equal to formation pressure. This is done by imposing certain
calculated back pressure in addition to system pressure losses on the well bore as
long as old fluid is in the well. Kicks have to be circulated out at slow circulation rates
to ensure that the sum of this back pressure and system losses does not exceed the
rating of high pressure lines and other rig equipment. Various reasons for circulating
out the kicks at slow circulation rates are :-
a) To ensure that the slow circulation pressure plus the shut in tubing
pressure is a convenient total pressure for the pump and does not
exceed the surface line ratings.
b) To allow fluid returns to be weighted up and re-circulated within the
capabilities of available fluid mixing system.
c) To allow longer reaction time for choke adjustments.
d) To allow sufficient time for disposal of kick fluid /de-gassing at the
surface.
e) To reduce the annular pressure losses.
The common practice so far had been to select a rate which is about half the pump
speed at the time of drilling. This practice was fairly good with duplex fluid pump
earlier in use on drilling rigs. Now with the use of triplex pumps this convention gives
much higher speeds than the actual requirements. Theoretically speaking the kill rate
or slow circulation rate should be the minimum possible pump speed at which pump
can run smoothly without any knocking etc. But since at minimum pump speeds more
time will be required to kill the well, a compromise has to be made which can meet all
the requirements. Therefore slow circulation rate should be 1/2 to 1/3 of pump SPM
at the time of drilling.
Recording of slow circulation rate

It should be recorded near to the bottom for each pump at regular intervals and / or
when drilling conditions change such as :-
i) At the beginning of each shift.
ii) After change in drilling fluid density.
iii) After change in bit nozzle size or BHA.
iv) After drilling a long section of hole (500 ft.) in a shift.
v) After pump fluid end repair.
On the rig there are a no. of places where tubing pressure gauges are installed such
as stand string, fluid pumps, driller‟s console, choke & kill manifold and remote choke
panel. Slow circulation pressure should be recorded from the gauge that is to be
used for well killing operation. So, it should be recorded at remote choke panel, if
available on the rig.
SHUT IN PRESSURE INTERPRETATION
Shut -in Tubing Pressure (SITP)

The shut in pressure on the tubing side is the difference between the hydrostatic
pressure of drilling fluid and the formation fluid pressure. When a kick enters during
drilling, the tubing remains uncontaminated whereas annulus becomes contaminated
Page....337
with influx. If SITP is added to hydrostatic pressure of drilling fluid, the resultant
pressure will be the pressure of the formation.
SITP is used to determine the kill fluid weight required to balance the formation
pressure by using the equation given below –
SITP(psi)
Kill Fluid Density (ppg) = ---------------------------- + Original Fluid Density(ppg)
0.052 Well TVD( ft)
The shut in tubing pressure should be read & recorded from the gauge on the choke
control panel. Since true SITP is determined for the calculation of kill fluid density, it is
recommended to read and record the SITP immediately after the closure and
subsequently after every 3-5 minutes. The recorded values of SITP should be
tabulated/plotted to ascertained the true value of SITP . Once the well is closed
initially the SITP starts increasing till the BHP becomes equal to the formation
pressure. The time taken for stabilisation depends upon the permeability of the
formation. SITP may further increase but at a slower rate if the influx is gas/gas
mixture.
Shut -in Casing Pressure (SICP)

The shut in pressure on the annulus side is the difference between the combined
fluid hydrostatic pressures and formation fluid pressure. Since annulus is
contaminated with formation fluid (Oil, gas, salt water or combinations) therefore
SICP can not be used to calculate kill fluid density however it is used to determine
kind of influx which has entered the well bore. During kill operation casing pressure
will allow us to determine the pressure being exerted at various points in the well-
bore and also pressures on the BOP equipment and choke lines.
Example:
A well was shut in after a kick, given below are the tabulated values of SITP and
SICP. Find out the stabilised value of SITP .
Time SITP(psi) SICP(psi)
0600 100 150
0605 200 270
0610 275 370
0615 340 450
0620 400 520
0625 405 525
0630 415 535
0635 430 550
0640 450 570
Solution:
As evident from tabulated values, SICP is increasing faster than SITP up-to 0620 hrs
but later both the pressures are rising by same amount. This shows that the
pressures have stabilised at 0620 hrs and subsequently due to close well gas
migration both the pressures are rising by same amount. Therefore the value
recorded at 0620 hrs i.e. 400 psi is the true SITP. The proper recognition of stabilised
value of SITP is very important as this value is used for the calculation of kill fluid
weight and formation pressure.
Page....338
Example:
A well was shut in after a kick, given below are the tabulated values of SITP and
SICP. Find out the stabilised value of SITP .
Time SITP(psi) SICP(psi)
0800 150 200
0815 250 320
0830 340 420
0845 420 510
0900 500 600
0915 500 600
1000 500 600
1100 500 600
1115 505 605
1130 510 610
1145 520 620
Solution: As is evident from tabulated values, SITP and SICP were increasing
considerably up to 0900 hrs & later there is no change in the pressures up to 1100
hrs Therefore the value recorded at 0900 hrs i.e. 500 psi is the stabilised value of
SITP. Further increase in both the pressures is due to closed well gas migration.
Page....339
CHAPTER- 7 WELL KILLING METHODS
The operating conditions during work-over differ significantly from that of drilling. As a
matter of fact, Pressure Control during work-over & well completion is far more
complicated than during drilling. The work-over well control procedures from the point
of view of manner of implementation vary a great deal even though the basic
pressure principles remain the same. In a work-over well killing operation various
factors need to be considered before planning e.g. flowing status of the well,
formation pressure that is to be controlled, formation fracture pressure, casing burst
pressure, downhole conditions such as packer leaks, tubing holes, tubing / casing
status etc.
KILLING A PRODUCING WELL
In work-over operations often it is required to kill the well that is producing. The killing
procedure depends on various factors such as possibility of circulating fluid through
annulus, integrity of tubing & casing, formation pressure, type of completion &
formation characteristics. Well control procedure may vary from well to well.
Two non-circulating methods of killing a producing well are:
Bull-heading
Lubrication & Bleed
Whereas, the circulating methods of killing a producing well are :
Use of Coil Tubing

Snubbing
Reversing out
Pre-Recorded Well Information
Before starting well killing by any of above methods it is pertinent to collect pre-
recorded well information vital to these operations, such as;
Top & Bottom of perforations
Packer/tool locations
Tubing Dimensions, length & strength
Well head rating
Casing burst rating
Tubing collapse & burst rating
Production zone/perforations
Fluid density in well
Pore pressure based on last known bottom hole survey
Fracture pressure based on reservoir studies
Preparing For Well Entry
Before initiating any well killing operation, certain safety measures must be taken
such as:
Page....340
The production choke & master valve should be closed to stop the flow,
normally the upper swab valve is closed so that the work-over equipment i.e
lubricator, chicksen, BOP etc. can be rigged up on the x-mas tree
The control system for SCSSV should be locked out of operation
The work plan with detailed kill method including the control devices to be
used should be prepared
Depending upon situation, all well from same platform may be shut-in down
hole as well at the surface
In case high pressure are anticipated, the x-mas tree may be tested against
the tubing hanger check valve
Bull Heading
Bull heading means pumping producing fluids through perforations back into the
formation & filling the work string with kill fluid. Therefore, condition of perforations is
of vital importance while attempting bull heading. Other considerations are condition
of both casing & tubing and presence of any fluid in the annulus. In some cases
where tubing integrity is doubtful, it would be required to apply back pressure in the
annulus.
Gas migration while bull heading may be a constraint in cases where formation
characteristics do not allow high pump rates. However, addition of viscosifiers such
as polymers to work fluid can help in reducing the migration rates.
Following example describes how a bull heading operation can be carried out :
Example :
Depth Of Perforation - 10000 ft

Tubing O.D. - 2 7/8”
Grade - N-80
Tubing Weight - 6.4 ppf
Tubing Capacity - 0.0058 bbl/ft
Fracture Pressure - 8000 psi
Formation Pressure - 6240 psi
( from recent BHP studies)
Tubing Hydrostatic Pressure - 1000 psi
Shut In Tubing Pressure - 5240 psi
Using above data, make required calculations for carrying out a bull heading
operation.
Page....341
Solution:
Kill Fluid Density = Formation Pressure/( .052xTVD)
= 6240 / (.052 x 10000) = 12 ppg
Maximum initial tbg. pressure = Fracture Pressure – Tubing Hydrostatic Pressure

(fracture consideration)
= 8000 – 1000 = 7000 psi
Maximum final tbg. pressure = Fracture Pressure –Tubing Hydrostatic with kill fluid
(fracture consideration)
= 8000 – 6240 = 1760 psi
Tubing Volume = .0058 x 10000 = 58 bbls
Assuming no back-up in the annulus following are initial & final Tubing
Pressure with burst consideration
Tbg. Working Burst Pressure = 10,570 x.8 = 8456 psi

( from table) ( standard downgrade to 80% upto about 20%
wear, in case wear is more, appropriate correction
may be applied)
Maximum initial tbg. Pressure = Tbg. Working Burst Pressure – Tubing Hydrostatic
(Burst consideration) Pressure
= 8456 – 1000 = 7456 psi
Maximum final tbg. pressure = Tbg. Working Burst Pressure –Tubing Hydrostatic
(Burst consideration) with kill fluid
= 8456 – 6240 = 2216 psi

In case annulus back up is considered then the same may be added to above
worked out max. initial & final tubing pressures.
Step 1 : Plot a graph between Tubing Pressure & barrels of kill fluid pumped
as shown in figure.
Step 2 : On the graph mark initial & final pump pressure & join the two
Step 3 : Plot SITP (shut in tubing pressure) v/s bbls pumped as shown
Step 4 : Plot tubing burst pressure line
Step 5 : Start pumping kill fluid down the tubing taking care of tubing burst limit
Step 6 : During pumping monitor the casing pressure for any undesirable
pressure build up
Page....342
Step 7 : The pumping pressure will decrease as shown in the graph.
(If pressures are not decreasing as per the graph either gas is
migrating up or formation is getting plugged.)
Displaced tubing
8000 (7456) Tubing Burst
Limit
(7000)
(psi)
TUBING PRESSURE
6000 Maximum allowable

static tubing pressure
(5240)
for formation fracture
4000
Static tubing
displacement (2216)
2000 pressure
(1760)
10 20 30 40 50 60
Barrels Pumped
Figure Pressures in tubing
Lubrication & Bleed

This method too is a non circulating killing method used for removing gas especially
when the surface pressures approach the rated working pressure of surface
equipment & bull-heading can not be carried out. Another application of this method
is when either the tubing or the perforations are plugged
The basis of the volumetric method is that each barrel of fluid contributes a certain
pressure to the bottom of the hole. In lubrication process annular hydrostatic
pressure is increased by injecting a calculated volume of fluid through kill line while
the BHP is maintained constant by bleeding gas through choke and reducing surface
pressure by the same amount. The process may be repeated several times till all the
gas influx is fully removed from the wellbore and the surface pressure is brought
down to zero or at a level wherein surface pressures have been reduced to the
extent that bull-heading can be considered. Following steps explain the procedure :
A calculated & measured amount of kill fluid is pumped in the well.

The fluid is allowed to settle below the gas .
The dry gas is bled through the choke bringing down the surface pressure by
the amount equivalent to the hydrostatic increase caused by pumping of kill
fluid.
Page....343
The above process is repeated several times till all the gas is removed from
the wellbore and the surface pressure is brought down to zero or to level
wherein surface pressures are acceptable for bull-heading.
It may be noted that as fluid is pumped into the well, the surface pressure shall
increase due to gas getting compressed. Therefore, the resulting surface pressure
should be determined by subtracting the hydrostatic of fluid pumped from initial SITP.
Use of Coil Tubing

Coil tubing can also be used to kill a producing well in cases where bull-heading can
not be done due to tubing plugging caused by sand or junk. The small diameter coil
tubing is run down through the tubing upto the bottom & kill fluid is circulated up the
coil tubing annulus.
Snubbing
The well kill procedure using a snubbing unit is similar to that of coil tubing. By using
a snubbing unit the small diameter tubing is snubbed into the work string. This
method finds application in high pressure gas wells.
Reversing Out
Reversing out is one of the common methods of killing a producing well. This method
can be applied where annulus communication can be established. The kill fluid is
pumped down the tubing annulus & well bore fluid is displaced through the tubing.
The method has the following advantages :
Considerable reduction in well killing time

Casing is not exposed to high surface pressures
Higher burst strength of tubing can withstand higher surface pressures
The method has following disadvantages:
Possibility of plugging of circulating ports

Possibility of gas migration up the annulus due to slow pumping rates
The circulating pressure losses in tubing add up to the BHP
Excessive & rapidly increasing surface tubing pressures when gas nears
surface, thereby making choke control difficult
WELL KILLING DURING WORK OVER
The main principle involved in all well killing procedures during work-over is to keep
bottom hole pressure constant. The various kill methods are as follows:
a) Driller‟s Method
b) Wait and Weight Method
c) Reverse Out
d) Volumetric Method
Page....344
In the first three methods the influx is circulated out and the heavy fluid is pumped in
the well keeping the bottom hole pressure constant. The fourth method i.e.
volumetric method is a non circulating method in which the influx is brought out &
heavy fluid is placed in the well bore without circulation.
Start up Procedure
It is important to understand the start up procedure, irrespective of kill method, for
bringing the pump up to kill speed.
Pump should be brought to kill speed gradually maintaining casing pressure
constant. During this period if the casing pressure is allowed to increase it can cause
formation breakdown or if the casing pressure is allowed to decrease it can cause
entry of more influx into well-bore. To prevent this, following procedure is suggested.
a) Bring the pump to kill speed in steps holding casing pressure constant by
gradually opening the choke.
b) When the pump is at the desired kill speed follow the pressure schedule
according to the kill method being used.
Note : While bringing the pump to kill speed keeping casing pressure constant , there
might be slight reduction in bottom hole pressure due to expansion of gas but this is
compensated by the annular pressure losses.
Driller’s Method
The well is killed in two circulations in case the kick has entered due to dilution in
work-over fluid density & in one circulation if the kick has entered due to swabbing or
improper hole fill-up.
In first circulation the influx is removed from the well bore using original fluid
density.
In second circulation the kill fluid replaces the original fluid and restores the
primary control of the well.
Formulae required :
SITP (psi)
a) Kill Fluid Weight (ppg) = Old Fluid Weight + ----------------------------
(ppg) 0.052 TVD (ft)
b) Initial Circulating Pressure (ICP) = SITP (psi) + KRP (psi)
Kill fluid weight (ppg)

c) Final Circulating Pressure (FCP) = ---------------------------------- KRP(psi)
Original fluid weight (ppg)
Tubing volume( bbl)

d) Surface to bottom Strokes = -----------------------------------
Annulus Volume (bbl)

e) Annulus Strokes = ------------------------------------
Page....345
Killing Procedure( Drillers Method )
In this method the well is killed in two circulations.
First Circulation
a) Bring the pump up to kill speed in steps of 5 SPM, gradually opening the choke
holding casing pressure constant.
b) When the pump is up to kill speed, maintain tubing pressure constant .
c) Circulate out the influx from the well maintaining tubing pressure constant.
d) When the influx is out, stop the pump reducing the pump speed in steps of 5
SPM gradually closing the choke, maintaining casing pressure constant. Record
pressure, SITP and SICP should be equal to original SITP.
Note : In case recorded SITP & SICP are equal but more than original SITP value, it
indicates trapped pressure in well-bore. Whereas if SICP is more than original SITP,
it indicates that some influx is still in the well-bore.
Second Circulation
a) Line up suction with kill fluid.
b) Bring the pump up to kill speed in steps of 5 SPM, gradually opening the choke,
holding casing pressure constant.
c) When the pump is at kill speed, pump kill fluid in tubing from surface to bottom,
maintaining casing pressure constant.
d) Pump kill fluid in the annulus from bottom to surface, maintaining tubing
pressure constant equal to FCP.
e) When the kill fluid reaches surface, stop the pump reducing the pump in steps of
5 SPM , gradually closing the choke maintaining casing pressure constant.
Record pressures, SITP and SICP both should be equal to zero.
Tubing pressure
Casing pressure
Strokes
Figure Pressure profile- 1st cycle of driller‟s method
Page....346
P
R Tubing pressure
E
S
S
U
R
E
Casing pressure
Tubing strokes Annulus Strokes

STROKES
Figure Pressure profile- 2nd cycle of driller‟s method
Wait & weight Method

This method finds application in case increase in fluid density is required to kill the
well i.e if the kick has entered due to dilution in work-over fluid during working over.
In Wait and Weight method well is killed in one circulation using kill fluid.
In this method operations are delayed (wait) once the well is shut in, while a
sufficient volume of kill (weight) fluid has been prepared. As the kill fluid is
pumped to the tubing bottom the hydrostatic pressure in the tubing increases, this
causes the tubing surface pressure to fall. At the same time, influx which is on its
way up the annulus expands continuously and gains volume / height, thereby
causing the hydrostatic pressure in annulus to fall and casing pressure to rise.
Because of this, for maintaining BHP constant a calculated step down plan for the
tubing pressure must be used while pumping the kill fluid from surface to the
tubing bottom.
Formulae required :
SITP (psi)
a) Kill Fluid Weight (ppg) = Old Fluid Weight + -----------------------------
(ppg) 0.052 TVD (ft)
b) Initial Circulating Pressure (ICP) = SITP(psi) + KRP (psi)
Kill fluid weight (ppg)

c) Final Circulating Pressure (FCP) = ---------------------------------- KRP(psi)
Original fluid weight (ppg)
Page....347
Tubing volume( bbl)
d) Surface to bottom Strokes = -----------------------------------
Annulus Volume (bbl)

e) Annulus Strokes = ------------------------------------
ICP – FCP
f) Pressure drop / 100 strokes = ------------------------- 100
Surface to bottom strokes
Killing Procedure ( Wait and Weight Method )
a) Line up suction with kill fluid.

b) Bring the pump up to kill speed in steps of 5 SPM, gradually opening the
choke, holding casing pressure constant.
c) When the pump is at kill speed, pump kill fluid from surface to tubing bottom,
maintaining tubing pressure as per step down schedule( during this step
tubing pressure will fall from ICP to FCP ).
d) Pump kill fluid in the annulus from bottom to surface, maintaining tubing
pressure constant equal to FCP.
e) When the kill fluid reaches surface, stop the pump reducing the pump speed in
steps of 5 SPM, gradually closing the choke maintaining casing pressure
constant. Record pressures, SITP and SICP both should be equal to zero.
Tubing pressure
Casing pressure
Tubing Strokes Annulus Strokes

Strokes
Figure Pressure profile- wait & weight method
Page....348
Pressure behaviour during well killing in case of a gas kick
a) Pressure at surface is increasing and it will be maximum when top of gas

influx is at surface.
b) Maximum pressure at surface is more in case of driller‟s method as
compared to wait & weight method.
c) Pressure at any points above the gas bubble increases.
d) Pressure at any point below the gas bubble is constant for driller‟s method.
For wait & weight method pressure at any point below bubble remains
constant so long there is no kill fluid in annulus. Once kill fluid starts
entering in to the annulus the pressure at any point below the bubble starts
falling and it will continue to fall till the kill fluid reaches that point. There
after pressure at that point become constant.
e) Pressure of influx decreases due to expansion of gas.
Volumetric killing
The volumetric method is a non circulating killing method used for removing gas
influx when there is no string in the hole, a wash out in the string or when the hole
can not be circulated. It works equally well for a situation where the well is closed-in
and waiting on orders or equipment or for stripping in or out of hole. In this method
the influx is brought up to the surface by means of migration & controlled expansion.
This process involves bleeding of calculated volume of fluid at the surface till the
influx reaches the surface, thereby allowing the casing pressure to increase to
maintain BHP constant. After the gas influx is brought to the surface in this manner of
controlled expansion, the calculated volume of fluid is pumped in to the well & gas
influx is bled thereby allowing the casing pressure to decrease while maintaining BHP
constant.
The basis of the volumetric method is that each barrel of fluid contributes a certain
pressure to the bottom of the hole. This may be measured as psi/bbl. This term of
psi/bbl must be co-ordinated with pit volume or trip tank volume so that the number of
barrels can be read directly.
A record of casing pressure is kept, if the casing pressure rises fluid can be bled from
the well according to the psi/bbl value calculated to maintain a constant bottom hole
pressure.
The volumetric method works by bleeding off (or adding) fluid because the BHP is the
sum of the casing pressure & the pressure exerted by the fluid column.
The Volumetric method of well control should not be equated with classic well killing
methods. Volumetric method is used to control BHP within limits by co-
ordinating the increase (because of gas migration) or decrease ( because of
bleeding of gas ) in annulus surface pressure with the corresponding decrease
or increase in annular hydrostatic pressure ( by decreasing or increasing
height / weight of fluid column in the annulus ).
Volumetric method is implemented mainly in two steps namely the “bleeding” and
“lubrication” process. In the bleeding process the gas influx is allowed to migrate in
the annulus and thereby causing an increase in the annular surface pressure as well
Page....349
as the BHP. The goal of maintaining the BHP constant is achieved through
corresponding reduction in annular hydrostatic pressure by bleeding calculated
volume of fluid which in turns reduces the fluid column height in the annulus and
allows the gas to expand. The bleeding process has to be repeated several times till
the gas reaches the surface.
Once the gas is at the surface the process of lubrication starts. In lubrication process
annular hydrostatic pressure is increased by injecting a calculated volume of same
or heavy fluid through kill line while the BHP is maintained constant by bleeding gas
through choke and reducing surface pressure by the same amount. The process may
be repeated several times till all the gas influx is fully removed from the annulus and
the annular surface pressure is brought down to zero or at a level wherein tripping /
stripping of the string to the bottom or removing/ replacing of choked or damaged
string becomes feasible . Once the string is at the bottom, the well can be killed /
circulated with appropriate kill weight fluid .
Volumetric Kill Calculations
Example:
Perforation TVD = 10,000 ft
Influx = 20 bbl
Fluid weight = 10.0 ppg
Annular volume = 0.06 bbl/ft (9 5/8”x3 ½”)
SICP = 500 psi
SITP = 0 psi
As indicated by SITP value ( 0 psi ) the string is plugged, therefore the well
has to be killed by Volumetric method.
Calculations :
a) For Bleeding process

Let the incremental increase in casing pressure would be 100 psi
Fluid Gradient = 0.052 10 = 0.52 psi/ft
Height of fluid column for 1 psi of Hydrostatic pressure = 1 /0.52 ft

Height of fluid column for 100 psi of Hydrostatic pressure = 100 / 0.52 ft
= 194ft
Volume of fluid for 100 psi hydrostatic pressure = 194 0.06
= 11.64 bbl
b) For Lubrication process
Calculation of kill fluid weight for lubrication
SITP
KMW = OMW +
0.052 TVD
Page....350
As the SITP may not be known SICP may be taken in place of SITP. But if the value of
SICP is very high then SITP can be calculated by assuming some gas gradient by the
following formula :-
SICP – SITP
Influx gradient = Fluid Weight 0.052 – -------------------
Height of influx
Since kill fluid is to be placed only in the top section of the well which is being
occupied by gas, the height of gas column is to be calculated.
Total pit gain = Initial pit gain + Total amount of fluid bled
= 20 bbl + 100 bbl (say) = 120 bbl
120
Height of gas column when gas is at the surface = ------- = 2000 ft
0.06
500
KMW = 10 + = 14.8 ppg
0.052 2000
Kill fluid gradient = 14.8 0.052 = 0.77psi/ft
Height of kill fluid column for 1 psi of Hydrostatic pressure = 1 / 0.77 ft

Height of kill fluid column for 100 psi of Hydrostatic pressure = 100 / 0.77
= 129.8ft
Volume of kill Fluid for 100 psi hydrostatic pressure = 129.8 0.06
= 7.8 bbl
Killing Procedure ( Volumetric Method )
Volumetric killing is accomplished in two steps, namely „Bleeding‟ &„Lubrication‟.
Bleeding
a) Allow the casing pressure to increase to 650 psi ,this causes the BHP to
increase by 150 psi , don‟t start bleeding now ( this 150 psi may be kept as
safety margin).
b) Allow the Casing pressure to increase by another 100 psi to 750 psi , this
causes the BHP to increase by 250psi. Since it is planned to keep only 150 psi
extra pressure at the bottom as safety margin, we can now reduce 100 psi of
BHP by bleeding 11.64 bbl of fluid. While bleeding fluid the surface casing
pressure should not be allowed to reduce more then 100 psi which may
require the bleeding to be completed in number of steps.
c) Allow the pressure to increase by another 100 psi to 850 psi and bleed 11.64
bbl of fluid in the same way.
d) This procedure should be repeated until gas reaches surface . Thereafter,
Lubrication technique is to be used for reducing the casing pressure.
Page....351
C 1100
A
S 1000
I Bleeding is continued until gas is at top
N 900
G
800
P
R 700
E
S 600 Safety margin 150 psi
S Initial SICP 500 psi
500
11.64 23.28 34.92 46.56 58.20 69.84
Volume of fluid bled off from annulus (bbl)
Figure Fluid bleeding process
Lubrication
The lubrication technique is used to Kill the well / reduce the casing pressure when
gas is at the surface so that other operation such as tripping / stripping can be
performed.
1. Slowly pump the calculated volume of fluid (7.8 bbl ) which shall give 100 psi
equivalent hydrostatic pressure into the annulus. Allow the fluid to fall through
the gas. This is a slow process, but can be speeded up by using a low yield
point fluid.
2. Bleed gas from the annulus until the surface pressure is reduced by 100 psi or
the amount equal to the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid pumped in. In no case
fluid is to be bled off.
3. Repeat the process until all of the gas has been bled off and the well is killed
or the desired surface pressure is reached.
Note: During the pumping and gas bleeding process, it will usually be necessary to
decrease the volume of fluid pumped before gas is bled off particularly near the end
of the operation. This is because the annular volume occupied by the gas decreases
with each pump & bleed sequence. Watch the pumping pressure closely and when it
reaches 50-100 psi above the shut in casing pressure, stop pumping. Measure the
volume of fluid pumped, calculate the hydrostatic pressure of that volume in the
annulus and bleed sufficient gas to drop the casing pressure by the amount of
hydrostatic pressure plus any increment of trapped pressure because of pumping
operation.
Page....352
Table of volume and Pressures during Top Kill
(Assuming maximum surface pressure of 1900 psi at the end of bleeding
operation)
Volume to Pressure to Remaining casing

lubricate, bbl Bleed pressure
(cumulative) (psi) (psi)
0 0 1900
7.8 100 1800
15.6 100 1700
23.4 100 1600
31.2 100 1500
39 100 1400
46.8 100 1300
54.6 100 1200
62.4 100 1100
70.2 100 1000
78.0 100 900
85.8 100 800
93.6 100 700
101.6 100 600
109.4 100 500
117.2 100 400
125.0 100 300
132.8 100 200
140.6 100 100
148.4 100 0
Reversing out
Killing by reversing out the influx through tubing is a common practice in work-
over & completion operations. The fluid is pumped down the annulus & influx is
displaced up the tubing. Stand pipe choke is used to maintain the required casing
pressure. It minimises contamination of work-over fluid during killing & also
reduces the killing time. It requires rigging up of choke with stand pipe. Care
should be taken to install proper & tested equipment since substantially higher
surface tubing pressures increasing rapidly over a short span of time are
expected in case of a gas kick. Normally a full opening safety valve is installed on
tubing while reversing out, however it will be prudent to also install a low
torque/pneumatic actuator as a back –up.
The graph below compares the surface tubing pressure in case of reverse out &
surface casing pressure in case of direct circulation while circulating out a gas
kick.
Page....353
Figure Reverse Out
Figure Reverse Out Graph
Page....354
STRIPPING OPERATIONS
The operation is termed as stripping when the resultant of upward and downward
forces is acting downward, thus forcing the string into the well.
The operation is termed as snubbing when the resultant of upward and down forces
is acting upward, thus forcing the string out of the well. Additional force will be
required in this case to force the string into the well. The snubbing operations require
the use of a snubbing unit.
Selection of BOP for Stripping

S.N. Well pressure Length for stripping Preventer required
1. 1000 psi or less Any length Annular preventer
2. 1000 – 1500 psi 1000 ft Annular preventer
3. 1000 – 1500 psi More than 1000 ft Annular preventer +Ram
preventer
4, 1500 psi or above Any length Ram preventer +Ram preventer
While stripping in the hole to maintain bottom hole pressure constant, fluid is to be bled off at
regular interval. The amount of fluid which is to be bled off should be equal to the closed end
volume of the string striped in. If more fluid is bled off than the calculated volume the
hydrostatic pressure in the annulus decreases causing the bottom hole pressure to reduce.
The string is also to be kept full by filling fluid at regular intervals. Care should be taken when
the string starts entering into the influx, as the increase in height of the influx shall increase
the surface casing pressure.
Example:
A well started flowing after pulling out 20 stand of work string. It was shut in and after
analysing the pressures it was decided to strip the string back in to the hole and
circulate out the influx using Driller‟s method. Well data is as follow:
Well depth : 10000 ft

Fluid in use : 12 ppg
Tubing capacity : 0.0083 bbl/ft
Tubing Steel Displacement : 0.0036bbl/ft
Average stand length : 92 ft
Calculate : a) The amount of fluid to be bled off after stripping-in one stand.
b) The amount of fluid to be filled in after stripping-in one stand.
Solution:
Closed end volume of the string = 0.0083 bbl/ft + 0.0036 bbl/ft = 0.0119 bbl/ft
Length of one stand = 92 ft
Amount of fluid to be bled off after one stand = 0.0119 bbl/ft 92 ft = 1.1 bbls
Amount of fluid to be filled in the string after one stand = 0.0083 bbl/ft 92 ft
= 0.76 bbls
Page....355
Stripping using the Annular Preventer
Stripping into the hole using the annular preventer is a common practice but it is
limited to a surface pressure of 1500 psi and up to a maximum of 1000 ft of length.
Following points should be kept in mind while stripping into the hole using annular
preventer.
a) The pressure regulating valve of the annular preventer allows the hydraulic
fluid from the annular to pass back through it when a joint passes through the
annular preventer as the annular preventer has to open slightly. This valve
must be in good condition. The lines from the valve to the annular preventer
also have to be large enough to let the fluid come back.
b) Use closing pressure as low as possible. The operating pressure should be

reduced until the annular weeps when the string is being stripped in. Low
pressure on the annular preventer will prevent the packer from early wear or
destruction.
c) If the closed in annular pressure is too high, the pressure will push the string
out of the hole or prevent it from stripping-in without a push down. To strip-in
the hole with an annular preventer, the weight of the string must be greater
than the force acting upwards. If work string does not strip-in on its own
weight, additional downward force will be needed to push the string in the well.
Procedure
a) Adjust the pressure on the annular preventer until it weeps when the string is
going in the hole.
b) Run the string not faster than one foot per second and slower when passing
the joint through the annular preventer.
c) Maintain the annulus pressure constant with a choke as the string goes in the
hole. The fluid displaced out of the hole can be measured and corrections
made to get the exact annulus pressure changes as stripping in the hole
continues. For most stripping jobs, holding the casing pressure constant
should be adequate.
d) Every stand of string should displace fluid. If the stands do not displace fluid,
circulation has been lost.
e) If the pressure starts rising between stands, it means gas migration is taking
place, use the volumetric correction.
Stripping Using the Ram Blow out Preventers

Normally, the rams would be used in place of the annular preventer for stripping if the
annulus pressure is more than 1500 psi & stripping length of over 1000 ft.
Procedure
a) Select the two rams to be used and measure the distance from the rotary table
to the top of the upper ram and to the top of lower ram.
b) Reduce the closing pressure on the ram to 500 psi, or less.
c) With the upper ram closed, lower string slowly measuring it until the joint is two
feet above the upper ram.
d) Stop lowering, close the lower pipe ram.
Page....356
e) Bleed off the pressure between the rams and open the upper ram.
f) Lower the string, measuring it until the tool joint is between the two rams.
g) Stop lowering & close the top ram.
h) Pressurise up to well pressure between the rams with the test pump. Open the
bottom ram.
i) Continue by going back to step no. c
While doing this, maintain the casing pressure constant by bleeding fluid from
the choke. For most stripping jobs, if gas migration is not taking place holding
the casing pressure constant should be adequate. If the pressure starts rising
between stands it means gas migration is taking place, use the volumetric
correction.
Note : While stripping Ram to Ram, the preventer‟s opening ratio shall determine
the maximum well pressure that can be handled e.g. if the opening ratio for
the preventer being used for stripping is 2.3 and manifold pressure is 1500
psi, then the maximum well pressure at which ram preventer can be
opened would be:
2.3 1500 = 3450 psi
If the well pressure is more than the above value, the rams will not
open.
PLAN RESPONSE TO ANTICIPATED WELL CONTROL SCENARIO

Planning of a work-over kill procedure needs consideration of various known &
unknown variables e.g. well‟s present status ( flowing or not), formation pressure to
be controlled, formation fracture pressure, casing burst rating, packer leaks, condition
of packer fluid, hole in tubing & sand bridges etc.
Most of the work-over operations require to kill the producing well which can be
accomplished by bull-heading, snubbing a coil tubing, circulating ( forward or reverse)
after establishing annulus communication by perforating the tubing or shifting sliding
sleeve.
Killing to control a normal formation pressure can be achieved by bull-heading or

circulating. Whereas, killing a well with subnormal formation pressure where kill fluid
densities required shall be less than 9.0 ppg, even a small pressure overbalance
shall force clear work-over fluid in to the producing interval.
Page....357
Well Control School -IDT
WORK OVER KILL SHEET
Measured Depth = -------------- ft SITP = ---------------- psi
True Vertical Depth = -------------- ft SICP = ---------------- psi
Original Fluid Weight = -------------- ppg Pit Gain = ---------------- bbl
KRP Pump 1 at ------- spm = -------------- psi ICP = KRP + SITP = ---------- psi
KRP Pump 2 at ------- spm = -------------- psi

SITP
Kill Fluid Wt = Original Fluid Wt +
Pump out Put = --------------bbl/stks .052 X TVD
Annular Capacity = -------------- bbl/ft = ----------------- ppg

Annular Volume = -------------- bbl
Kill Fluid Weight
Annular Vol. FCP = X KRP
Annular Strokes = = --------- Stks Original Fluid Weight
Pump Out Put
Tubing Capacity = -------------- bbl/ft = ---------------- psi
Tubing Volume = -------------- bbl

Tubing Vol.
Tubing Strokes = = ------------Stks
Pump Out Put
Max. Allowable Surface Pr. = ---------------- psi
Max. Allowable Sub Surface Pr. = ---------------- psi
Stks TubingPressure
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
Strokes
Page....358
CHAPTER- 8 COMPLICATIONS AND SOLUTIONS
TRAPPED PRESSURES
Before planning a work-over operation, consideration should be given to the
possibility of encountering trapped pressures beneath the following :
Wire line plugs

Surface Controlled Subsurface safety valves (SCSSV)
Subsurface safety valves (SSV)
Bridge plugs
Sand bridges
Paraffin
Hydrates
Packers
Wire line plugs

In case of wire line plugs, the equalising port can provide the information about any
trapped pressure below it. A change in surface pressure would be seen in the
lubricator pressure gauge when the equalising prong is inserted into or pulled out
from a plug. No change in surface pressure is an indication of two possibilities i.e.
either the plug has failed or there is no differential across.
Based on the knowledge of formation pressure & hydrostatic pressure in the well the
pressures below the plug can be estimated. The differential pressure can be negative
(i.e pressure below the plug is more than above it) or positive.
If the differential is negative than additional pressure should be applied to balance it.
In case of positive differential it shall be difficult to pull out the plug, therefore it shall
be required to reduce the pressure above the plug.
Subsurface safety valves

The trapped pressures below the safety valves too are dealt with in the same fashion
as that of wire line plugs. However, in case of SCSSV the requisite hydraulic
pressure shall need to be applied so as to engage the pulling tool. Sometimes the
inner flow tube of the valve could be sanded up, in such cases the differential should
be calculated & neutralised.
Bridge plugs
Pressures trapped below a bridge plug should be estimated depending upon the
depth & pressure above the plug be adjusted accordingly before milling/drilling the
plug.
Paraffin
The possibility of Paraffin forming a solid mass & creating a bridge depends upon
bottom hole temperature. Below a certain depth, temperatures being too high do not
allow paraffin to solidify. Previous records may be checked to find out the probable
depth up to which the paraffin can be formed. An estimate of differential pressure
should be made & surface pressure be adjusted accordingly while approaching
paraffin plug.
Page....359
Sand bridges
Sand, unlike paraffin can cause bridging at any depth. Even a small amount of sand
can hold pressures trapped below it. An estimate of differential pressure should be
made & surface pressure be adjusted accordingly while approaching a sand bridge.
Packers
Production packers could also be potential source of trapped pressures. After
releasing a packer, the well should be monitored for any flow & if required the well
should be shut-in at surface. The well should be circulated bottom‟s up.
PRESSURE ON CASING
One of the following could be a source of pressure on casing :
Hole in tubing
Hole in casing
Seal or packer leak
Pulled seal out of seal bore due to pressure/temperature effects
Failed squeeze jobs or patch
Hole in Tubing
Holes in tubing shall result in communication between tubing and casing and would
show as pressure on casing when the well is producing. Before killing a producing
well, first the depth of communication be determined using a ponytail or logging & a
pack-off job be carried out.
Another method commonly used in the field to detect the hole or leak requires rigging
up the surface equipment & pumping the brine. The volume pumped, before the brine
returns to choke can be used to locate the hole in the tubing. If the hole is deep, the
well can be killed by conventional circulation method. For holes at shallow to
medium depth the well can be killed either by lubrication or snubbing a coil tubing /
jointed pipe. Another option is bull heading from the annulus provided the burst
strength of the casing is higher then maximum anticipated surface pressure.
If tubing string develops a communication during work-over well killing, it shall be

indicated by decrease in the circulating tubing pressure with no change in casing
pressure. If this happens, the killing operation should be stopped & position of influx
in relation to the point of communication should be determined based on shut-in
surface pressures. In case the influx is above the leak point the influx may be
circulated out in conventional manner using slower pump rates.
If the influx is below the leak point, the influx be brought above the leak point by
volumetric method & thereafter it can be circulated out by using conventional method.
Page....360
Figure Collar Stop Running Tool Figure Pony Tail
Hole in Casing
A hole in casing can develop due to following reasons:
Casing getting damaged due to pipe movement /rotation

Exposure of casing to corrosive formation fluids
Improperly made up casing joints
Collapse/shear of casing due to formation movements
Depending upon the nature of damage the following remedial measures can be
carried out :
Running a straddle packer

Cement squeeze
Backing of damaged casing, replacing the damaged joint & tying back
Repairing the collapse casing with casing roller./swage
Page....361
Seal or packer leak & Pulled seal out of seal bore due to pressure/temperature
effects
To rectify casing communication due to above two cases requires a work-over job. As
& when the same is planned, first the well will have to be killed by one of the
procedures of killing a producing well already discussed.
UNDERGROUND FLOW
This involves significant down hole flow of formation fluid from a zone of higher
pressure to a zone of lower pressure. The direction of the flow may be from a lower
kick zone to upper weak zone, which is the case most of the times or it may be to a
lower weak zone from an upper kick zone & is an important criteria for deciding the
control procedure. In work-over operations there is possibility of underground flows if
the well is completed in one of the following ways :
Open hole completion
Un-cemented slotted liner completion
Underground flows can also occur when more than one formation layers having
different pore pressures are being produced simultaneously. In such cases the low
pressure zone shall not support the high density fluid required to control the other
zone. The problem can be tackled by using polymer plugging or calcium carbonate to
seal the low pressure zone.
When the underground blow-out occurs after the BOP has been closed on a kick
while work-over, the flow will normally be from the kick zone to some shallow weak
zone. The indications of a under ground blow out are as below:
a) Initial build up both in SITP & SICP followed by decrease as the

fracture is induced. The tubing pressure may drop down to zero.
b) After the fracture is induced & under-ground blow-out is initiated,
the casing pressure may not change much initially but will steadily
increase with time.
c) No direct communication between tubing & casing pressure.
In case the communication has been established between upper zone having higher
pore pressure & lower producing formation, not only a kick be in progress but the
cross flow between the two formations be on making the well control operation an
extremely difficult task. One common control procedure involves plugging &
abandonment of one zone & continuing production from the other. This can be
brought about by setting a bridge above the zone to be abandoned followed by a
cement plug.
In case the production is desired from the lower zone, a cement plug may be placed
across the lower perforations followed by repair job of the upper zone. After the repair
of the upper zone, the lower zone can be reactivated.
Page....362
PLUGGED WORK-STRING
During work-over killing a plugged work string shall be indicated by sudden increase
in circulating tubing pressure with no change or slight decrease in casing pressure. If
such an indication is noticed, the killing operation should be stopped i.e the pump
should be stopped & choke be closed. Thereafter, following attempts can be made to
clear the obstruction in the work string :
By creating pressure pulses i.e pressurising & releasing the work string
alternatively
By pressurising the annulus (consideration should be given to fracture
strength of perforated interval)
Killing annulus by volumetric method while the arrangements are being made
for perforating the work string above plugged interval
HYDRATES
Hydrates are compounds of water and hydrocarbon gas. They are solid substances
with ice like characteristics. Formation of hydrates can cause blocking of flow lines
and BOP stacks, thereby preventing fluid circulation and normal functioning of BOP
stacks. Most favourable situations for hydrate formation are during well killing (when
gas is in the well) and well testing.
Various conditions conducive to formation of hydrates are:
a) Motionless Time
b) Temperature near 0oC
c) High pressure
Prevention and removal of hydrates

i) Motionless time should be avoided when gas is near the surface (In offshore
stopping of kick operations when gas is within 200-500 ft of BOP stack should be
avoided)
ii) Pumping of methanol/glycol through kill line should be considered for while gas is
being circulated out. It can both prevent the hydrate formation and as well
dissolve or thaw after they have formed. Since location of the gas in the well bore
can not be evaluated with sufficient accuracy and moreover if the gas enters
slowly in the well, it gets uniformly distributed in small bubbles therefore a
continuous injection of methanol through kill line should be preferred.
iii) For removal of hydrates, the only reliable way is to increase the temperature by
circulating warm fluid around or near the hydrate plug which will help the plug to
melt slowly.
(In offshore operations coil tubing can be run down the riser, near the plug and
warm fluid can be circulated.)
Since high pressure may exist below the hydrate plug, use of snubbing unit may be
considered while melting / drilling the plug.
LOST CIRCULATION
In work-over well killing lost circulation can occur if multiple zones are exposed. It can
happen because of one of the following reasons :
Formation fracture due to pressure surges,
Heavy fluid weight
Excessive back pressure at surface due to large kick volumes
Mishandled kicks.
Page....363
While circulating out a gas kick, when ever there is a chance of lost returns, pit gain
trends should be precisely monitored & if any deviation is noticed, the choke size
should be increased or decreased and it should be checked whether tubing and
casing pressure, both, respond to it or not ( for response on tubing pressure gauge
due consideration should be given to lag time). If these pressures do not respond
uniformly to choke operation, it indicates that fluid is being lost down hole and well
may not be killed in normal way. However lost returns often involve only a percentage
of the fluid being lost down hole. It might be possible to kill the well by conventional
methods provided the well maintains 50-75% returns, because the pressure at the
loss zone shall become less when the gas bubble gets past this zone. Pressure can
be reduced at the weak zone by
a) Using as slow a circulating rate as possible
b) Using the 'wait and weight' method.
(Add some LCM material in the circulating fluid )
In case of partial loss during killing, several techniques can be tried in following
order:-
i) If the loss is not substantial and fluid volume can be kept up by mixing, continue
with 'Wait and Weight' method.
ii) Reduce the tubing circulating pressure by a small amount (in any case tubing
pressure should not be reduced more than the amount of annular frictional loss, so
as to avoid additional influx) and wait to see, if it increases the return. Continue to
do this until lost returns are reduced enough so that the mixing of new fluid can
make up for the loss
iii) Stop and shut in the well. Wait for 1 to 4 hours to cure itself. During this time keep
SITP constant by bleeding through choke/filling through kill line.
iv) Pump heavy slug of fluid at the bottom of the hole if loss is taking place above
kick zone. Thereafter solve the loss problem.
Note : In simultaneous loss & kick situations , generally the complication which is at
the bottom is handled first.
v) If none of the above work, use a barite or gunk or cement plug to seal off the kick
zone, then solve the loss problem.
ORGANISING A WELL KILL OPERATION
1. Engineer In charge of the Rig
He will have the overall responsibility for the supervision of well control
operations.
2. Tool Pusher / DIC
He will prepare kill sheet & direct the operations. He will operate the
choke during well killing operation.
3. Shift In charge
He is the main line of defence when a kick occurs. He will be at the
derrick floor & follow the directions from Tool Pusher & will be responsible for:
a. Detection of kick
b. Close the well
c. Operating the Rig equipment ( draw works, mud pump
etc.)
d. Monitor pressures
Page....364
4. Shift chemist
He will be responsible for:
a. Monitoring the well bore fluid, gain/ loss & conditioning

b. Preparation of Brine/ mud
c. Handling the mud contaminated due to kick
5. Maintenance In charge
He will supervise the running of all Rig equipment with the help
of mechanical crew at the drill site.
6. Assistant shift In charge

He will assist the Chemist / Engineer in operating the brine /
mud preparation equipment with the help of top man & rig man
or as directed by Rig In charge depending upon the situation of a
particular Rig.
7. Electrician / Mechanic
Standby for possible instructions.
8. Rig man
They will be available on derrick floor to follow instructions of the
shift in charge
9. Top man
They will be available on derrick floor to follow instructions of the
Assistant shift in charge.
10. Others
All others will remain stand by & readily available at safe
distance & wait for instructions from the Rig in charge.
Communication responsibility
An efficient communication system is a vital requisite for the safety of the installation
as well as personnel. Every installation should be provided with equipment for radio
communication at all times with the base office. The person who would be
responsible for communication at the time of emergency should be pre-defined.
Page....365
CHAPTER- 9 SURFACE EQUIPMENT
BLOWOUT PREVENTION EQUIPMENT

Blowout prevention equipment is composed of various components required to
operate the blowout preventers under varying rig and well conditions. The system
consists of blowout preventers, kill line, choke manifold, BOP control unit, diverter,
marine riser and auxiliary equipment. The primary function of this system is to
confine well fluid to the well bore, provide means to add fluid to the well bore, allow
controlled volumes to be withdrawn, means to hang off string, shearing of string if
necessary, disconnection of risers from sub sea well head and re-entry of temporary
abandoned well. The under water blowout prevention equipment is designed to have
100% redundancy in equipment in the event of any one function failing.
Blow-out Preventors
When primary well control has been lost, it becomes necessary to seal the well to
prevent an uncontrolled flow of formation fluid. The equipment consist of inside
blowout preventers also known as string blowout preventers ,string safety valve
designed to stop the flow through string and annular preventer or ram type preventer
designed to stop flow from the annulus.
Annular Preventor
The four basic segments of annular preventer are the head, body, piston and steel
ribbed packing element. When the preventer‟s closing mechanism is actuated,
hydraulic pressure is applied to the piston, causing it to move upward. This forces the
packing element towards the well bore and it closes around the object in the well
bore. The preventer element is opened by applying hydraulic pressure to the piston in
opposite direction which slides the piston downward, and allows the packing element
to return to its original position.
Annular preventer can be closed on string, tubing, drill collar, casing strings, square
& hexagonal Kelly, tapered string, tool joint, logging tool, wire line and on an open
hole in case of any emergency. When annular preventer is closed on open hole, the
rubber packing element is subjected to high stress and the over all life of the element
is reduced. Therefore, the annular preventer should be closed on open hole only if
there is an emergency & the condition of the packing element is good. However the
operating pressure required to close in open hole will be more than normal operating
pressure.
Under certain conditions, hydraulic pressure has to be reduced so as to minimise any

wear to rubber of the packing element and to avoid any possible damage to large
diameter tubular. Manufacturers recommended closing pressures that depend on
shut-in casing pressure, for stripping operations should be followed. A special design
feature of annular preventer is that it allows stripping operation to be carried out while
maintaining seal as string/tool joint passes through it. When sub-sea stripping is
done, surge bottle(s) have to be used for faster closure of annular preventer‟s
element after tool joint passes.
Page....366
Wear Plate
Element Segment
Packing Element
Latched Head
Opening Chamber
Piston
Closing Chamber
Piston Seals
Figure Hydril GK annular preventer
Figure Closing sequence of annular preventer
Page....367
Quick Release
Top
Donut
Packer
Access Flaps
Locking Groove Outer cylinder
Lock down
Packer Insert
Vent
Operating
Piston
Pusher Plate
Closing Port
Opening Port
Vent
Figure Cameron „D‟ type annular preventer
Head
Packing Element
Adapter Ring
Opening Chamber
Piston
Closing Chamber
Figure Shaffer spherical annular preventer
Page....368
M/s Hydril is manufacturing different models of annular preventers for surface and
sub sea services. MSP model is low pressure annular normally used as diverter, GK
models are used on surface BOP, GL model is used on sub sea BOP and GX models
are of higher rated working pressure used in both surface & sub sea BOP. The only
difference in the GL & other models is that it has secondary chamber in addition to
opening and closing chambers. This secondary chamber can be connected to
closing line or to the riser string with a separator in between when used in sub sea to
compensate for riser fluid hydrostatic head. If GL model is to be used on surface than
secondary chamber should be connected to opening chamber so as to minimise
packing element‟s wear.
Page....369
Ram Preventor
Ram type preventers are designed to seal the annulus by forcing two front packing
elements which make contact with each other and seal around the object in the well
bore. The two top seals seal the annulus area. The packing elements have rubber
packing seals that affect the complete closure. Other than the sealing mechanism,
ram type preventers differs greatly from annular preventers because each type and
size of ram has a particular function and can not be used for a variety of applications,
the exception is the variable bore ram.
For example, ram preventer bodies with a set of 5” string ram will seal on 5” string
only and will not seal on any other size of string, nor will it seal without string in the
well bore. Ram type preventers are generally considered to be more reliable in high
pressure situations & are easily serviceable.
Ram preventers are manufactured with self feeding action for the rubber sealing. As
the rubber wears, the small extrusion plates are forced into the increased area, which
allows additional rubber to extend past the ram face and aid in securing a seal. If the
rams are not used properly, the self feeding action will cause the rubber seal to
extend an excessive distance into the well bore, which will cause over stressing and
rapid deterioration of element. Because of this the string ram should not be closed if
there is no string in the hole.
String rams are designed to seal the well bore around the fixed size of string for
which it is designed. The front packer (ram packer) of string rams has a groove in
front to seal around the string in the well bore. The front packer is enclosed between
two steel plates because of the following reasons:
To push extra rubber for sealing around the string in case the face of the front
packer wears out.
To prevent the extruding of rubber from top and bottom due to wellbore and
closing pressure.
Page....370
Blind rams are designed to seal the well if there is no string in the well bore. The
front packers of blind rams are flat faced and contain a rubber section. When the ram
is closed both the flat faced rubber sections make contact with each other and seal
the annulus.
Variable bore rams (VBR) have the capability to seal on several string sizes
depending on the range of variable bore ram. For example 3 1/2” - 5” variable bore
ram can be closed on any string size from 3 1/2” to 5” i.e. 3 1/2 “, 4”, 4 1/2” and 5”
etc. The front packer of VBR have small steel segments embedded in the rubber and
will take the shape of the string around which it is closed.
Page....371
Shear blind rams (SBR) are designed to shear the string in the well and seal the
wellbore simultaneously. It has steel blades to shear the string and seals to seal the
annulus after shearing the string. Shearing capability varies with size of string & its
weight. The shearing force will also vary with type and size of BOP. When shear blind
rams are closed, both upper and lower blade assembly moves closer and shear the
string in the wellbore, after shearing the upper blade moves over the lower blade.
The blade packer seals between the blades and top seals seal the annulus area.
Some of the manufacturers use side packer along with the top seals.
Shearing operation should be done on no load condition which can be achieved by
hanging the string/ string on the lower string ram to avoid any accident. Whenever
the string is hanged the rams should be locked properly.
Dual rams are used when two production tubing strings are lowered for two separate
zones. These type of rams have front packers with two grooves which will seal
around both the tubing strings when ram is closed.
Stripper rams has special PTFE (Poly Tetra Fluro Ethylene) seal in front packer,
which enables the string to be reciprocated when stripper rams are closed and well is
under pressure. When the stripper rams are to be used for both reciprocation as well
as rotation than the PTFE seals with anti rotation edges are used in front packers.
These rams are normally used in a snubbing unit BOP & not in the normal drilling
BOP stack.
Page....372
Slip rams are used to hold the string weight and not to seal the well bore. These
types of rams have a front packer made-up of steel with dies which will hold the string
body when it is closed and will not allow the string to move up or down. Such rams
are used in snubbing units and sometimes in capping stack in combination with
inverted rams.
Locking Mechanism
Locking devices are designed to hold the rams in the closed position when the string
is hanged on the ram, and if accumulator operating pressure is lost or removed.
Manual locking system is commonly used for surface BOP stacks. Depending upon
the type, manual locks hold the rams closed by either screwing the locking screw or
unscrewing it. In either case, the threads on the locking shaft should be in a condition
that allows the locks to be easily closed. Since each manual locking system works
independently both sides must be locked.
BOP stack with auto-lock system in ram preventer is also used now days. The
preventors equipped with automatic locking system remain locked in closed position
even if the closing pressure is lost or removed, and hydraulic opening pressure is
required to unlock the locking device
Page....373
Page....374
Page....375
Page....376
BOP CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST
1. ACCUMULATORS 16. ELECTRIC MOTOR 28. MANIFOLD BLEEDER
Pre- charged with Nitrogen VALVE
at 1000 psi. 17. HYDRO ELECTRIC PRESS. To bleed off the manifold
SWITCH pressure.
2. ACCUMULATOR BANK Set at 3000 psi cut off & starts
ISOLATION VALVE electrical pum
p at 2700 psi. 29. ACCUMULATOR
To isolate the Accumulator PRESSURE GAUGE
banks. 18. ELECTRIC STARTER Pressure- 3000 psi.
Should be kept in Auto
3. ACCUMULATOR RELIEF 30. ANNULAR UNIT/ REMOTE
VALVE 19. SUCTION VALVE OF SELECTOR VALVE
Set at 3300 psi. ELECTRIC PUMP Selects mode of annular
regulation from the unit or
4. AIR FILTER 20. SUCTION FILTER OF Driller’s air operated
ELECTRIC PUMP remote control panel.
5. AIR LUBRICATOR Should be cleaned every 30
Use SAE-10 oil. days. 31. AIR REGULATOR,
ANNULAR PILOT
6. AIR PRESSURE GAUGE 21. DISCHARGE CHECK PRESSURE
Rig Air pressure
-125 psi. VALVE Regulates air pilot signal
to the annular regulator.
7. HYDRO PNEUMATIC 22. ACCUMULATOR
PRESSURE SWITCH ISOLATION VALVE 32. MANIFOLD PRESSURE
Set at 2900 psi cut off
and Used to isolate the GAUGE
starts air pumps at 2500 accumulators and electric
psi. pump when higher 33. ANNULAR REGULATOR
pressures are required Used to regulate ann.
8. AIR BYPASS VALVE on the manifold. operating pressure.
Should be kept close.
23. HIGH PRESSURE FILTER 34. ANNULAR PRESSURE
9. AIR SUPPLY VALVE Should be cleaned every
0 3 GAUGE
Should be kept open days.
35. ANNULAR PRESSURE
10. SUCTION VALVE FOR 24. MANIFOLD REGULATOR TRANSMITTER
AIR PUMPS Used to regulate manifold
pressure. 36.ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
11. SUCTION FILTER FOR TRANSMITTER
AIR PUMPS 25. BY PASS VALVE
Clean every 30 days. Normally should be kept at 37. MANIFOLD PRESSURE
low pressure position. TRANSMITTER
12. AIR PUMPS Transmitters converts
26. THREE POSITION FOUR - hydraulic pressure into
13. CHECK VALVE WAY VALVE low air pressure and send
Normallyshould be kept at signals to drillers remote
14. ELECTRICAL PUMP open or closed position. panel.
15. CHAINGUARD 27. MANIFOLD PROTECTOR 38. AIR JUNCTION BOXES

VALVE Check the gasket in use
Set at 5500 psi.
Page....377
Gas fluid
separation
Bladder
Vessel
Shock
Dampener
Puppet
Spring
Safety
Relief Port
Assembly
Flow Port
Figure Accumulator bottle with charging & gauging assembly
Page....378
BOP OPERATING FLUID PATH
Accumulators
Annular
Regulator
Isolation
Valve Low High
Bypass Valve
Manifold Regulator Pressure Gauges
MANIFOLD
open close
Rams HCR Annular

Four-way Valves
Tail Rod Ram Assembly
Piston Ram Shaft
Figure Bypass valve in low position
Page....379
BOP OPERATING FLUID PATH
Accumulators
Annular
Regulator
Isolation
Valve Low High
Bypass Valve
MANIFOLD
open close
Rams HCR Annular

Four-way Valves
Tail Rod Ram Assembly
Piston Ram Shaft
Figure Bypass valve in high position
Page....380
Accumulators
Annular
Regulator
Isolation
Valve Low High
Bypass Valve
Activating Switches
MANIFOLD
o c open close
Rams HCR Annular
Air line
Driller’s Remote Panel

Accumulator Manifold
2 3
Air
Air
Annular
1 Annular
4
Master O C
Electrical Signals Valve Inc. Dec
String Ram
O C
O C
Figure RAM OPERATION FROM REMOTE PANEL

O C
Page....381
ACCUMULATOR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS
Usable Fluid
The usable fluid is defined as the recoverable fluid from accumulator bottles between
accumulator operating pressure and 1200 psi or 200 psi above pre-charge pressure,
whichever pressure is maximum. The operating pressure is the rated working pressure
of accumulator bottles of BOP control unit.
Example:
A bladder type accumulator bottle of 11 gallons capacity was pre-charged with nitrogen
at a pressure of 1,000 psi. The hydraulic fluid is pumped to it's rated working pressure
of 3,000 psi. The hydraulic fluid of bottle was used to operate the BOP function. The
pressure of the bottle has dropped to 1,200 psi. The volume of bladder and puppet
assembly in the accumulator bottle is one gallon. Calculate how much fluid has been
used to operate the BOP functions.
Solution:
Actual capacity of accumulator = 11 - 1 = 10 gallons.
Pre charge Pressure of Nitrogen (P1) = 1,000 psi
Volume occupied by Nitrogen (V1) = 10 gallons.
Pressure of Nitrogen when fully charged (P2) = 3,000 psi
Volume of the Nitrogen at 3000 psi (V2) can be worked as follows :
P1V1 1,000 10
V2 = -------- = --------------- = 3. 33 gal
P2 3,000
Pressure of Nitrogen after BOP function is operated (P3) = 1,200 psi
Volume of Nitrogen at 1200 psi (V3) can be calculated as follows :
P1V1 1,000 10
V3 = --------------- = ----------------- = 8. 33 gal
P3 1200
Volume of fluid used to operate BOP function will be equal to the amount of fluid
pushed out of the accumulator bottle by expansion of nitrogen gas from 3000 psi
to 1200 psi.
Usable fluid = (Volume of Nitrogen at 1,200 psi -Volume of Nitrogen at 3,000 psi)
= V 3 - V2
= 8. 33 - 3. 33 = 5 gallons
Page....382
SIZING OF ACCUMULATOR
The accumulator bottle in the surface BOP control unit should be designed to have
usable fluid equal to the volume required to close all the blow out preventers and to
open all HCR valves in BOP stack with an additional safety factor of 50% which is
required to compensate for any fluid loss in control system and / or preventers.
Accumulator bottles also should maintain a minimum operating pressure of 1,200 psi or
200 psi above pre-charge pressure, which ever pressure is maximum, when all the
above functions are operated with pumps off (Both pneumatic and electric).
Example:
A 13 5/8" BOP stack having GK Hydril annular preventer of 5,000 psi working pressure
and three Cameron U-type ram preventer of 5,000 psi working pressure and one HCR
valve in choke line of 5M rating requiring 1.1 gallon fluid to open. A 3,000 psi working
pressure BOP control unit is used to operate BOP functions. Calculate how many
number of bladder type accumulator bottles of 11 gallons capacity are required in the
unit. The minimum operating pressure of accumulator should not be less than 1,200
psi.
Solution:
Annular gallons to close = 17. 98 gallons
3 Rams (5. 8 gallons each) = 17. 40 gallons
1 HCR in choke to open = 01. 10 gallons
-------------------
36. 48 gallons
plus 50% safety factor = 18. 24 gallons
-------------------
Total usable fluid required = 54. 72 gallons
--------------------
In the previous example the usable fluid for 10 gallons effective capacity accumulator
bottle is calculated and it is 5 gallons.
Total usable fluid required
No. of Accumulator bottles required = -------------------------------------
Usable fluid of one bottle
54. 72
= ----------
5
= 10. 94
~ 11 bottles
BOP control unit should have 11 bottles with 1000 psi Nitrogen pre-charge pressure.
Page....383
AUXILIARY WELL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
The prevention of blowouts through the string is an important aspect of well control.
Several tools are available to contain string pressure during kicks. The primary tool is
the kelly cock. When kelly is not in use, string valves are necessary to control the
pressure. These valves may be automatic or manually controlled valves, and they may
be a part of the string or installed when kick occurs.
Kelly Cock
The kelly through which rotary motion is applied to the string is the tubular connection b
etween the string and the surface drilling equipment, valves are placed above and
below the kelly to provide pressure protection for the kelly and all surface equipment.
These valves are high pressure ball valves.
The upper kelly cock is used to isolate the rotary hose, swivel or stand string from string
when the string pressure exceeds the rotary hose pressure rating or if there is any
leakage developed in swivel rotary hose or stand string at the time of well activities /
operations.
Lower kelly cock is used when upper kelly cock is damaged, not easily accessible or
any damage in kelly. In well control operations when kill pressure is nearing to rotary
hose rated pressure or string is to be hanged off on the rams in case of well kick - the
lower kelly cock is closed and kelly to be disconnected and set back and circulating
head with a high pressure hose is connected and operations to be resumed after
opening lower kelly cock.
Page....384
Page....385
Full Open Safety Valve
A full opening safety valve (FOSV) is usually installed on a string after a kick occurs
when the kelly is not in use. The advantage of the safety valve is that it can be in open
position when stabbed on the string to minimise the effect of upward moving flow
leaving the valve, the flow will pass - through the valve during the stabbing and make
up, then the valve can be closed. This type of safety valve facilitates wire line
operations in case of any problem in the string, like string plug etc. or if circulation from
the bottom of the string is not possible due to well complications.
A lubricator can be installed on the top of the valve and with wire line BOP on top,
logging tool can be run down in the string and logs can be recorded. Accordingly if any
perforation is required to be done, perforation tool can be lowered and string can be
perforated at desired depth interval to control the well kick situations. This FOSV is a
ball valve like kelly cock and should be always kept on rig floor in open position
during tripping operations. If a combination string is in use, then crossover of
different connection compatible with FOSV and strings in use should also be kept
ready on drill floor, so in case of any kick situation at the time of trip, valve can be
installed as fast as possible. Key /Wrench for this valve should be kept at an
accessible place. On top drive system upper and lower safety valves are used, both the
valves are ball type and connected together. The upper safety valve is normally remote
operated so in case of kick while drilling valve can be operated remotely. During trips
with top drive system, the swivel and safety valves are not set back but rather are
hoisted with the string. If a kick occurs during the trip, the safety valves are
immediately connected to drill string and upper valve is remotely closed. All the
safety valves should be pressure tested, when BOP is tested and the pressure
should be applied in the direction, in which it will be subjected to well pressure at the
time of well kick situation.
Inside BOP
At the time of tripping if well kicks, a non return valve known as check valve also is kept
on rig floor ready in open position to be installed on drill string and is normally
called "INSIDE BOP". Once it is installed it can be closed quickly by releasing a rod on
top of it which keeps the valve in open position at the time of stabbing it on the string
for its easy installation at the time of well kick situation. Generally inside BOPs” are
more difficult to stab on drill string because of flow restriction in it whereas
FOSV has full bore opening and no flow restriction when installed in well kick
situation. When it is installed , it will not show any shut-in drill string pressure &
to record this pressure an exercise is to be done which is explained in earlier
chapter. With check valve installed no logging operations can be carried out.
Therefore in kick situation while tripping, first FOSV should be installed & if string
stripping is to be done in that case the inside BOP should be installed on top of FOSV
and before stripping down in the well FOSV should be opened.
Page....386
Page....387
Lock Screw
Releasetool body
Release Rod
Upper body
Upper Body
eat
Seat
Seal
Seal
Spring
Lower body
Figure INSIDE BOP
Page....388
Choke Manifold
The choke manifold is an arrangement of valves, lines and chokes to control the flow of
fluid and kick fluids from the annulus during the killing process. The chokes are used to
create pressure loss/ hold back pressure in kick control circuit while killing a well.
Design of choke manifold depends on variety of factors such as type of fluids (fluid, oil,
water or gas), pressure, up-stream flow rates, down-stream velocities and solids in the
fluid flowing out of the well ( sand, shale and string protector rubbers etc). In sour gas
applications the choke manifold should be H2S trim.
MGS
Manual choke
B
U
F
F
Distribution Block E
R
Drilling
Spool T
A
N
HCR Manual HCR
valve K
Remote choke
Shale shaker
Figure CHOKE MANIFOLD
Page....389
Manually Adjustable Choke
This type of choke creates a back pressure with a stem and bevelled mechanism. Fluid
is allowed to flow through the seat or orifice. As some alteration in the amount of back
pressure is required, the stem is positioned in the seat to create a greater or lesser
resistance to flow. Back pressure control is attained by the degree to which the stem is
forced into the bevelled seat or extracted from it.
Page....390
Remote Control, Adjustable Chokes
Remote control choke consists of two tungsten carbide plates with half moon orifice that
control fluid flow depending on the relative position of the orifices. The orifices are
offset in closed position and as one plate is rotated with respect to the other, the orifices
beome aligned which allow fluid flow through choke.
TRIP TANK
Importance of Hole Filling During Trips

Failure to keep the hole full during pull out with fluid can cause a kick and can lead to
blowout if undetected. Blowouts have occurred just as often while tripping as while
drilling. The principal cause of well kicks/blowouts during a tripping is improper filling of
the hole with fluid of desired weight / sp.gr. The kicks/blowouts on trips can be avoided if
due attentions is paid to monitoring of hole filling during tripping by a trip tank.
When the string is pulled out from the hole some times it behaves like a piston and in
this process tries to swab the hole. The longer the open hole greater is the amount of
swabbing. Therefore greatest swabbing tendency occurs when the bit is just pulled off
the bottom. It is therefore important to keep a close watch in the beginning of each trip
to ensure that no formation fluid is being swabbed into the hole which can lead to a
kick condition due to reduction in hydrostatic head.
Page....391
The other important factors which effect the swabbing and make it more pronounced
are:
High viscosity of fluid
Balling of bit
High tripping speed
To prevent a kick on a trip, the hole must be filled with a volume of fluid equivalent to the
displacement of the string. If it is observed that the hole is taking less amount of fluid
than required, it means swabbing is taking place and all out efforts should be made to
contain the same. Trip tank is one of the most important equipment which is used during
tripping operation for early detection of the kicks / swab.
PIT VOLUME RECORDER

One of the devices used to continuously monitor the level of the drilling fluid in the fluid
pits is a pit level indicator. The indicator usually consists of a float device that senses the
fluid level and transmits data to a recording and alarm device called a pit volume
recorder or (pit volume totalizers). PVT is a gauge mounted on the driller‟s console on
the rig floor.
Pit volume indicator and totalizer devices use electric signal to record or indicate the
fluid level in different tank. PVT instruments are calibrated in total barrels of fluid which
is directly indicated on the gauges installed on driller panel. These indicators have low
and high-level alarms that sound a warning or turn on light in case of lost circulation or
well kick. Normally this indicator is set for loss / gain depending on the size of hole
drilled which varies from 5-10 bbl . For slim hole drilling this limit is set as less as 1 bbl
gain / loss, so that in case of any eventuality in the well timely action can be taken.
FLUID FLOW INDICATOR
The fluid volume control is designed for the purpose of providing the driller with a
continuous flow of information to keep him informed of fluid flow rate and pump stroke
rate or fill count and total strokes and to warn him of an oncoming kick or loss of fluid
into an unconsolidated formation.
This displays return fluid flow status on the flow meter. Pump strokes per minute, fill
strokes and total pump strokes are displayed on the electromechanical digital display on
the front panel which can be viewed up to twenty feet away, even in direct sunlight.
The console receives its input signals from two sources: (a) the flow sensor and (b)
pump switches.
The Flow Sensor are of two types, one the potentiometer type or other non contacting
sensor type. The sensor senses the percent of fluid returns from the well bore and this
is displayed on the return flow meter.
Pump Switches which are attached to the fluid pumps, provide input pulses to the
console to be registered on the digital display as strokes per minutes fill strokes and
total strokes. These pump switches are either in contact closure models or non-
contacting sensor models.
Alarms to indicate increase or decrease of flow are provided. An alarm lamp on the
front panel and optional external alarms, consisting of a horn and lamp, inform the driller
that preset high or low return flow limits have been reached which may indicate an
impending kick (high) or loss of fluid to an unconsolidated formation (low).
Page....392
FLUID FLOW SENSOR
The purpose of the fluid flow sensor is to monitor the fluid flow level in the return flow
line. The signals from the flow sensor are registered on the fluid flow indicator providing
the operator with indications of fluid flow changes and initial fluid flow returns during
trips. The location of the flow sensor in the return flow line gives the driller his first
indication of a gas kick or the beginning of lost circulation.
Drillers Console Rig Floor

40 60 Return Flow Gauge
0 100
Bell Nipple
String
Paddle
Figure FLUID FLOW SENSOR
The Flow Sensor monitors fluid flow through the return line to the shaker using a paddle
type sensor. The alarm setting for gain or loss indication is done when the pump is
running at desired SPM. The normal range for alarms is „+‟ and -„„ of 5% of the current
return flow. The assembly is mounted on the return line with the paddle extending
through a 9.25 x 2.50 inch cut-out in the string into the fluid flow. Deflected by the force
of the fluid flow, the paddle drives a potentiometer which provides a DC analogue signal
(O to 10 Volt DSc) that is in proportion in amplitude to the position of the paddle in the
fluid flow. The resultant signal registers on the percent of Flow Dial in the console.
Page....393
GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
A gas detection system is used to detect flammable and combustible gases

before they reach a concentration level that would cause a fire or explosion. They
are the first line of defence in prevention of human injury & equipment damage.
The layout of gas detectectors is determined by two philosophies:
- Gas detectors shall be located where the leaks are most likely to occur.
- Gas detectors shall also be located where the consequences of a gas
accumulation will be the greatest.
Gas detectors are usually calibrated for methane and hydrogen. Gas detectors
which are calibrated for hydrogen only are installed in the battery rooms.
The set points of the alarm are 20% LEL and 60% LEL (Lower Explosive Limit).
Alarm is generated on 20% & 60% LEL.
Coincident 60% LEL indication by two gas detectors will initiate the ESD of the
platform.
H2S Detection
Detection equipment for hydrogen sulphide (H2S) has one common feature to warn
the personnel beforehand of the impending danger from the highly toxic gas. The
equipment varies from Lead acetate paper to fixed monitors with extra sensor heads.
The equipment is broadly classified hereunder:
Lead acetate paper

Lead acetate paper detectors operate under the principle of
contamination. When H2S comes in contact with the lead acetate
coating on the paper, lead sulphide is produced which will tend to turn
the paper to various shades from tan to brown.
The comparative darker brown shade on paper indicates higher level

of concentration of lethal gas. It can be used by each crew member
and gives a fairly accurate reading when matched with the calibrated
colour chart provided to crew members.
Usually three to six minutes are necessary for the reaction to change
colour of the paper.
Thus in high concentration, this type has inherent disadvantage of

infecting the crew before its presence can be detected. Therefore, it
is important to wear protective masks before entering into contaminated
area.
Page....394
Hand operated tube detectors
This is one of the most accurate of manual detectors.
It precisely measures concentration levels from 0 ppm to 1000 ppm simply
by changing the range of the sensor tubes. It works by drawing H2S
through the sensor tubes filled with lead acetate coated silica gel granules.
This equipment directly gives the reading of concentration level of the
gas.
It is very important to wear protective breathing mask/equipment before
advancing into the contaminated area being monitored.
Capsule detectors
The lead acetate capsule works on the same principles as the spot check
paper detector.
Because of its precise detection limitations this detector should only
be used as an H2S indicator.
To use the acetate capsule, break the glass container, expose to H2S,
wait three to six minutes and compare the results with the colour chart.
The main advantage of this system is that its life is up to two years. Also
the mobility is its major advantage.
Personal H2S detector

The unit is an excellent piece of equipment supplying an accurate digital
readout of H2S concentration in parts per million (ppm). It operates with
rechargeable batteries.
The detector measures H2S very accurately, from 0 to 50 ppm. The
warning system is audio, which sounds at level of 10 – 20 ppm.
Reaction is cut to 5 to 10 seconds in this equipment.
Fixed detectors
This is the most advanced piece of H2S safety equipment in the
market today. This gives both visual and audio alarm.
It uses several monitors or sensor heads placed at each strategic area
which is susceptible to H2S presence and accumulation.
When the level of H2S concentration reaches 10 ppm, the flashing lights
appear and at levels of 20 ppm or more, the lights and the siren are
activated.
Page....395
FLUID GAS SEPARATOR (POOR – BOY DEGASSER)
A fluid / gas separator is essential equipment used on the rig for removing high
percentage of gas from the fluid, which is coming out from downstream of the choke
during gas kicks.
i) Fluid / gas separator provides a means of safely venting the gas away from the
rig.
ii) A liquid seal/goose neck arrangement at bottom permits fluid to flow to shale
shaker / vacuum degasser tank while maintaining a fluid head to hold the gas in
the upper part of the separator.
iii) Many of the fluid / gas separators are constructed from a length of large diameter
pipe with interior baffles, to slow down the fluid – gas stream, which assist in
separator of gas.
Recommendation
i) The pressure loss in the gas vent line at the top of separator must be less than
the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid column in the bottom of the separator in
order to vent the gas at safe distance from the rig. Most of the separator has a
working pressure ranging from 50 psi to 125 psi.
ii) Lines from choke manifold to separator should be straight or with targeted turns.
Rubber hoses should not be used.
iii) Flanged openings should be provided near the bottom to permit clean out. This
opening can be used for drain line if necessary.
iv) Vent line should be firmly anchored to ground anchors to prevent movement
when blowing off large volumes.
Limitations
a) Vertical height of the liquid seal (HL) / goose neck limits the maximum allowable
internal pressure of the separator before the blow through takes place.
b) The length/height ( Hv) and the internal diameter of the vent line(IDv) determine the
pressure build up in the separator. This should be less than the maximum allowable
internal pressure to avoid the gas blow through the shale shaker.
Page....396
IDv
Vent line Hv
IDb
Fluid Inlet
Baffle plates Hb
Body
HL
Cleaning port
Base
Figure fluid gas seperator
Vacuum degasser
Vacuum degasser is used to remove gas from the gas cut fluid during drilling ,circulation
and well killing. Degasser has a vacuum pump on top and a horizontal tank with inclined
flat surface in it. The vacuum pump creates 2 to 6 psi depending on the weight of the
fluid being handled. Fluid enters the degassing vessel through the pipe on one side of
the tank, the fluid being raised from pit by the low pressure in the vessel and enters the
horizontal tank. Fluid flows across inclined flat surfaces and creates thin layers so that
the gas bubbles can be separated from fluid, The degassed fluid falls to the bottom of
the vessel and this fluid flows to the active pit. In some of the degasser units an auxiliary
Page....397
pump on the rig is used to operate a hydraulic jet which is used to pull fluid from the
vessel despite the vacuum. Vacuum degasser of this type handles sizeable volume of
fluid, and with one pass through this unit a density of as high as 2 ppg can be achieved.
Figure Vacuum degasser
BOP drills
1. BOP drills shall be performed to ensure that crew is adequately trained and remain
alert to implement early kick detection and closing procedures of BOP to shut in the
well correctly.
2. BOP drills shall be conducted once a week with each crew, in order to maintain their
alertness and competence.
3. The drill should be initiated at unscheduled times when operations and hole
condition permits.
4. To conduct drill a kick should be simulated by manipulating primary kick indicator
such as the pit level indicator or the flow line indicator by raising its float gradually
and checking for the alarm.
5. The reaction time from float raising to the designated crew member is ready to start
the closing procedure shall be recorded and response time should not be more than
60 seconds.
6. Total time taken to complete the drill shall be recorded and it should not be more
than 2 minutes.
Page....398
7. Following drills should be performed:
On bottom drill
Trip drill
String out of the hole drill
Shut in procedure for BOP drills
Common points to all type drill
1. Raise the float gradually
2. Check and see change in pit volume totaliser reading and detection of pit gain.
3. Check for alarm.
Condition-1: On Bottom Drill (While string is rotating))
1. Give signal by raising alarm.
2. Stop rotary
3. Pick up Kelly to clear tool joint above rotary.
4. Stop fluid pump.
5. Lock the brake securely.
6. Check for well flow.
Condition – 2: Trip Drill (While Tripping)
2. Position tool joint above rotary and set the string on slips.
3. Install full opening safety valve in open position. Close FOSV after installation.
4. Close Annular Preventer.
5. Open HCR valve
Or
In case there is no HCR valve on choke line then open mechanical valve adjacent to
drilling spool.
7. Make up Kelly or circulating head and open FOSV.
8. Record SITP & SICP.
Condition – 3: String is out of hole Drill

2. Open HCR valve
3. Close blind / shear ram.
4. Close adjustable choke and.
5. Record shut in pressure.
TESTING OF BLOWOUT PREVENTERS STACK
There are two types of test to be conducted on blowout preventer stack.
a) Function test
b) Pressure test
Function test is conducted to check the closing time of each Blowout preventer which
should be with in the prescribed limit and to check the condition of accumulators
whether having proper pre-charge pressure and the condition of the bladders used in
accumulators of BOP control unit.
Pressure test is conducted to check the integrity of all the joint in BOP stack, Blowout
preventer's seals and valves. To conduct pressure test a cup tester or a test plug
should be used.
Page....399
TESTING OF SURFACE (LAND & JACK UP) BOP STACK
Function Test
i) Blowout preventer should be function tested at least once a week as per API
ii) The test should be conducted when the drill string is inside casing.
iii) Test should be conducted after installing FOSV / inside BOP on drill string.
iv) Both pneumatic and electric pump of accumulator unit should be turned off after
recording initial accumulator pressure.
v) All the ram preventers (except blind / shear) & HCRs‟ in choke / kill line should be
function tested.
vi) Closing time of all the BOP‟s should be recorded. .
vii) Weekly, function test is not required for shear ram. As a minimum these rams
should be tested after casing strings has been set.
viii) Blind ram should be operated for function test while string is out of hole.
ix) Closing time should not exceed 30 sec for all ram preventers and annular preventers
smaller than 18¾”. It is 45 sec for annular preventer 18¾" & larger size.
x) Function test should be carried out alternately from main control unit / rig floor
driller‟s panel / auxiliary panel.
xi) Recorded final accumulator pressure after all the functions should not be less than
1200 psi due to operating limitations or 200 psi above the pre-charge pressure of
accumulator as per API or value based on closing ratio of ram preventer (whichever
is maximum).
Pressure Testing
i) Test BOP using cup tester or test plug.
ii) Clear water should be used as test fluid for water base mud.
iii) For high pressure gas wells, use of inert gas such as nitrogen is desirable.
iv) Diesel or an acceptable alternative should be used as test fluid for OBM.
Frequency of Pressure Test (As per API)

i) Upon installation.
ii) After repairs that require breaking a pressure connection.
iii) Not to exceed 21 days.
Low Pressure Test

i) All the blowout preventers and hydraulically operated valves should be
pressure tested at 200-300 psi.
ii) The low pressure test should be stable for at least five minutes.
iii) The pipe used for testing should be of sufficient weight and grade to safely
withstand tensile, yield, collapse, or internal pressures.
High Pressure Test

Once the equipment passes the low pressure test, it should be tested to high pressure,
following are the recommendations:
a) On installation, blowout preventer stack should be pressure tested at the rated
working pressure of the ram preventer or well-head whichever is lower. An exception
Page....400
is the annular preventer which should be tested to the test pressure applied to ram
preventer or 70% of annular rated pressure which ever is lesser .
b) On subsequent tests the BOP stack should always be tested to greater than the
maximum anticipated surface pressure but not to exceed the rated working pressure
of ram preventer or well head which ever is less (i.e. to be tested to least valued
component of the stack). An exception is the annular preventer which should be
tested to 70% of its rated pressure or the test pressure of the ram which ever is less
to minimize packer element wear or damage.
c) The stable high pressure should be maintained at least for five minutes as per API.
d) Precaution should be taken not to expose the casing to pressures in excess of its
rated strength. Well head valve should be kept open while testing with test plug.
e) Conduct high pressure test for entire blowout preventer stack, all choke manifold
components, upstream of chokes, kelly & kelly valves, drill pipe and tubing safety
valves and drilling spools (if in use).
f) Test pressure should be applied from the direction in which Blowout preventers /
valves would experience pressure during actual well kick situations.
PRESSURE TESTING OF IBOP, KELLY COCK , CHOKE, SWIVEL & R/ HOSE

All the above equipment should be pressure tested to at least maximum anticipated
surface pressure but limited to rated working pressure of BOP.
All the above equipment should be tested at low pressure i.e at 200-300 psi . High
pressure test should be conducted at rated working pressure of the item being tested or
of the weakest member exposed to test pressure upon installation and the subsequent
test should be conducted at greater than the maximum anticipated surface pressure.
Both the test should be stable for at least five minutes.
Page....401
RING GASKETS & CONNECTIONS
The most common connections for BOPs, Spools, and side outlets are Studded
connection, Flange connection & Hub connection. There are two basic type of
flanges type 6B & type 6BX. 6B type of flanges are for all sizes in maximum working
pressure rating of 2,000 psi and 3,000 psi. In case of 5,000 psi the type of flanges for
sizes smaller than 13 5/8” will be 6B where as type of flanges for sizes 13 5/8” &
above will be 6BX . All sizes of 10,000 psi , 15,000 psi and 20,000 psi rating
flanges will be of 6BX type .
Type 6B flanges are for R or Rx type rings having flat bottomed grooves. Since the
type of flange for R and Rx is same that‟s why these rings are interchangeable. Type
BX – flanges use Bx type of rings only. Rx and Bx type of ring gaskets are not
interchangeable but both provide a pressure – energized seal.
There is considerable merit to the energised seal. With the non- energised type, the
weight of the stack above rests on the seal ring. Weight and vibration deform the
rings, loosening the flanges bolts, and tightening is required from time to time.
Energised rings still seal despite some loosening. Rx rings also carry load, but Bx
rings are even better since the design allows the flanges faces to come together and
carry weight. Bx ring gaskets have some interference and are not recommended for
re-use.
Nominal Flange Diameter

Studded Connection Flange Connection
Hub Connection
Figure DIFFERENT TYPE OF CONNECTIONS
Page....402
Type R Octagonal Type R Oval
Type Rx Type Bx
PRESSURE ENERGISED RING GASKETS
Figure RING GASKETS
Figure TYPE 6B FLANGE Figure TYPE 6BX FLANGE

when tightened when tightened
NOTE : 1. RING GASKETS SHOULD BE USED CLEAN & DRY . NO

GREASE SHOULD BE APPLIED TO RING GASKETS.
2. RING GASKETS SHOULD NOT BE RE-USED.
Clamp – type connections of the bolted half – ring are also used and are much
quicker to assemble and disassemble than API flanges. These are designed to
withstand external loading, both bending and tension. The Grayloc ring combines
tapered, flexible lips on each side of a rigid rib. The angle of the lips is slightly less
than the mating hub thereby forming a surface seal as the connection is brought
together. The rigidity of the seal provides a definite stop on make – up and prevents
Page....403
crushing by over tightening the seal. The seal is pressure energised. These two
clamps type connections are similar in appearance.
RINGS FOR 6B & 6BX TYPE FLANGES
Size Pressure Rating
2M 3M 5M 10M 15M/ 20M
2 1/16” R/RX 23 R/RX 24 R/RX 24 BX 152 BX 152

2 9/16” R/RX 26 R/RX 27 R/RX 27 BX 153 BX 153
3 1/8” R/RX 31 R/RX 31 R/RX 35 --- ---
3 1/16 --- --- --- BX 154 BX 154
4 1/16” R/RX 37 R/RX 37 R/RX 39 BX 155 BX 155
7 1/16” R/RX 45 R/RX 45 R/RX 46 BX 156 BX 156
9” R/RX 49 R/RX 49 R/RX 50 BX 157 BX 157
11” R/RX 53 R/RX 53 R/RX 54 BX 158 BX 158
13 5/8” R/RX 57 R/RX 57 BX 160 BX 159 BX 159
16 3/4” R/RX 65 R/RX 66 BX 162 BX 162 ---
18 3/4” --- --- BX 163 BX 164 BX 164
20 3/4” --- R/RX 74 --- --- ---
21 1/4” R/RX 73 --- BX 165 BX 166 ---
M = 1000 psi Source API RP 16A
Page....404
CHAPTER-10 FOMULAE & EXERCISES
1. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (psi)

Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x TVD (ft)
2. PRESSURE GRADIENT (psi/ft)
Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052
3. FORMATION PORE PRESSURE ( psi)
Hydrostatic Pressure in String (psi) + SITP (psi)
4. PUMP OUT PUT (bbl/min)
Pump Displacement (bbl/stroke) x Pump Rate (SPM)
5. EQUIVALENT CIRCULATING DENSITY (ppg)
Annular Pressure Loss (psi)
+ Fluid Density (ppg)
TVD (ft) x 0.052
6. NEW PUMP PRESSURE WITH NEW PUMP RATE (psi) approximate
New Pump Rate(SPM) 2
Old Pump Pressure (psi) x
Old Pump Rate (SPM)
7. NEW PUMP PRESSURE WITH NEW FLUID DENSITY (psi) approximate
New Fluid Density (ppg)
Old Fluid Density (ppg)
8. KILL FLUID DENSITY (ppg)

SITP (psi)
+ Original Fluid Density (ppg)
TVD (ft) x 0.052
9. INITIAL CIRCULATING PRESSURE (psi)

Kill Rate Circulating Pressure (psi) + SITP (psi)
10. FINAL CIRCULATING PRESSURE (psi)

Kill Rate Circulating Pressure (psi) x Kill Fluid density (ppg)
Original Fluid density (ppg)
11. LENGTH OF INFLUX ALONG HOLE (ft)
Influx Volume (bbl)
Annular Capacity (bbl/ft)
12. PRESSURE GRADIENT OF INFLUX ( psi/ft)
SICP (psi) – SITP (psi)
Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 –
Influx Vertical Height (ft)
13. BARYTE REQUIRED TO INCREASE DRILLING FLUID DENSITY (lb/bbl)

[Kill Fluid density (ppg) – Original fluid Density (ppg)] x 1500
35.8 – Kill fluid Density (ppg)
Page....405
14. PERCOLATION RATE (ft/hr)
Increase in Surface Pressure (psi/hr)
Well bore fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052
15. GAS LAWS

P1 x V1 P1 x V1
P1 x V1 = P2 x V2 P2 = V2 =
V2 P2
16. PRESSURE DROP PER FOOT TRIPPING DRY STRING (psi/ft)
Well bore fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser / Casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
17. PRESSURE DROP PER FOOT TRIPPING WET STRING ( psi/ft)

Well bore fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Closed End Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser/casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Closed End Displacement (bbl/ft)
18. FLUID LEVEL DROP, TRIPPING OUT ALL TUBULARS ( DRY ) ( feet)
Length of Tubular (ft) x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser/Casing Capacity (bbl/ft)
19. LENGTH OF TUBULARS TO PULL DRY BEFORE OVERBALANCE IS LOST

(ft)
Overbalance (psi) x [ Riser/Casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Metal Displacement (bbl/ft) ]
Well bore fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
20. VOLUME TO BLEED OFF TO RESTORE BHP TO FORMATION PRESSURE

(bbl )
Increase in Surface Pressure (psi) x Influx Volume (bbl)
Formation Pressure (psi) – Increase in Surface Pressure (psi )
21. BOP CLOSING RATIO

Wellhead Pressure at BOP (psi)
Hydraulic Pressure Required to Close (psi)
22. BOP OPENING RATIO

Hydraulic Pressure Required to Open (psi)
Page....406
EXERCISES ON FORMULAE SHEET
1. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (psi)

Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x TVD (ft)
Example :
fluid density = 11.5 ppg

Well TVD = 11,000 ft
Well MD = 12,500 ft
Calculate hydrostatic pressure.
Hydrostatic pressure
= 11.5 0.052 11,000 = 6578 psi
2. PRESSURE GRADIENT (psi/ft)

Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052
Example :
Fluid density = 11.5 ppg
Calculate pressure gradient.
Pressure gradient
= 11.5 0.052 = 0.598 psi / ft
3. FORMATION PORE PRESSURE ( psi)

Hydrostatic Pressure in String (psi) + SITP (psi)
Example :
Fluid density = 11.5ppg

Well MD = 12,500 ft
SITP = 500 psi
SICP = 700 psi
Page....407
Calculate formation pressure.
Hydrostatic pressure = 11.5 0.052 11,000 = 5

678 psi
Formation pressure= 6578 + 500 = 7078 psi
4. PUMP OUT PUT (bbl/min)

Pump Displacement (bbl/stroke) x Pump Rate (SPM)
Example :
Pump output = 0.107 bbl / stk

Well MD = 12,500 ft
Pump speed = 40 SPM
Calculate Pump output.
Pump output = 0.107 40 = 4.28 bbl / min
5. EQUIVALENT CIRCULATING DENSITY (ppg)

Annular Pressure Loss (psi)
+ Fluid Density (ppg)
TVD (ft) x 0.052
Example :
Original fluid density = 11. 5 ppg

Well MD = 12,500 ft
Annular pressure loss = 100 psi
Calculate Equivalent circulating density
100
Equivalent circulating density = + 11.5 = 11.67 ppg
11,000 0.052
Page....408
6. NEW PUMP PRESSURE WITH NEW PUMP RATE (psi) approximate
New Pump Rate(SPM) 2
Old Pump Rate (SPM)
Example :
Pump Pressure at 60 SPM = 800 psi

Well MD = 12,500 ft
Calculate pump pressure at 30 SPM.

(30)2
Pump pressure at 30 SPM = 800 = 200 psi
2
(60)
7. NEW PUMP PRESSURE WITH NEW FLUID DENSITY (psi) approximate

New fluid Density (ppg)
Old fluid Density (ppg)
Example :
Pump Pressure with 11 ppg fluid = 800 psi
Well MD = 12,50
0 ft
Calculate pump pressure with 12 ppg fluid at same SPM.
12
Pump pressure with 12 ppg fluid = 800 = 873 psi
11
Page....409
8. KILL FLUID DENSITY (ppg)
SITP (psi)
+ Original Fluid Density (ppg)
TVD (ft) x 0.052
Example :
Original fluid density = 11. 5 ppg

Well MD = 12,500 ft
SCR @ 30 SPM = 300 psi
SITP = 500 psi
SICP = 700 psi
Calculate Kill fluid density.

500
Kill fluid density = + 11.5 = 12.37 ppg
11,000 0.052
9. INITIAL CIRCULATING PRESSURE (psi)

Kill Rate Circulating Pressure (psi) + SITP (psi)
Example :
Original fluid density = 11.5 ppg

Well MD = 12,500 ft
SCR @ 30 SPM = 300 psi
SITP = 500 psi
SICP = 700 psi
Calculate initial circulating pressure.
Initial circulating pressure

= 300 + 500 = 800 psi
Page....410
10. FINAL CIRCULATING PRESSURE (psi)
Kill Rate Circulating Pressure (psi) x Kill Fluid density (ppg)
Original Fluid density (ppg)
Example :
Original fluid density = 11.5 ppg

Kill rate pressure @ 30SPM = 300 psi
Kill fluid density = 12.5 ppg
Calculate final circulating pressure.
300 12.5
Final circulating pressure = = 326 psi
11. 5
11. LENGTH OF INFLUX ALONG HOLE (ft)

Influx Volume (bbl)
Annular Capacity (bbl/ft)
Example :

Well MD = 12,500 ft
SITP = 500 psi
SICP = 700 psi
Kick size = 14 bbl
Annular volume = 0.0316 bbl / ft
Calculate Height of influx.
14
Height of influx =
0.0316
= 443 ft
Page....411
12. PRESSURE GRADIENT OF INFLUX ( psi/ft)
SICP (psi) – SITP (psi)
Well BoreFluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 –
Influx Vertical Height (ft)
Example :
Well bore fluid density = 11. 5 ppg

SITP = 500 psi
SICP = 700sip
Height of influx = 500 ft
Calculate influx gradient.
(700 – 500)
Influx gradient = 11.5 0.052 - = 0.198 psi / ft
500
13. BARYTE REQUIRED TO INCREASE DRILLING FLUID DENSITY (lb/bbl)

[Kill Fluid Density (ppg) – Original Fluid Density (ppg)] x 1500
35.8 – Kill Fluid Density (ppg)
Example :
Original drill fluid density = 11. 5 ppg

Kill fluid density = 12. 0 ppg
Calculate amount of Baryte to raise drill fluid density.
(12.0 – 11.5) 1500

Baryte to raise drill fluid density = = 31.5 lbs / bbl
35.8 – 12.0
Page....412
14. PERCOLATION RATE (ft/hr)
Increase in Surface Pressure (psi/hr)
Well Bore Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052
Example :
Well Bore fluid density = 11.5 ppg

Increase in string pressure = 100 psi per 15 minutes
Well TVD = 9,700 ft
Well MD = 10,500 ft
Gas gradient = 0.1 psi / ft
Calculate Percolation rate.
Increase in string pressure per hour = 100 4 = 400 psi

400
Percolation rate = = 669 ft / hour
11.5 0.052
15. GAS LAWS

P1 x V1 P1 x V1
P1 x V1 = P2 x V2 P2 = V2 =
V2 P2
Example :
Well TVD = 9,700 ft

Well MD = 10,500 ft
Gas bubble pressure = 1,000 psi
Gas bubble Volume = 14 bbl
New pressure of gas bubble = 500 psi
Calculate new volume of gas bubble.
1,000
New volume of gas bubble = 14 = 28 bbl
500
Page....413
16. PRESSURE DROP PER FOOT TRIPPING DRY STRING (psi/ft)
Well Bore Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser / Casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Example :
Metal Displacement = 0.008 bbl/ ft
Casing capacity = 0.148 bbl/ ft
Calculate pressure drop per ft tripping out dry string.
11.5 .052 0.008

Pressure drop per ft tripping dry string = = 0.0341
psi/ ft
0. 148 - 0.008
17. PRESSURE DROP PER FOOT TRIPPING WET STRING ( psi/ft)

Well Bore Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Closed End Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser/casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Closed End Displacement (bbl/ft)
Example :
Well TVD = 9,700 ft

Well MD = 10,500 ft
String Capacity = 0.0178 bbl/ ft
Calculate pressure drop per ft tripping out wet string.
Closed end displacement = 0.008+ 0.0178 = 0.0258 bbl/ft
11.5 .052 ( 0.008 + 0.0178 )

Pressure drop per ft tripping wet string = =
0.126 psi/ ft
0.148-0.0258
Page....414
18. FLUID LEVEL DROP, TRIPPING OUT ALL TUBULARS ( DRY ) ( feet)
Length of Tubular (ft) x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Riser/Casing Capacity (bbl/ft)
Example :
Well TVD = 9,700 ft
Well MD = 10,500 ft
Length of drill collars = 500ft
Calculate level drop for pulling drill collars out of the hole ( Dry ).
500 0.008
Level drop for POOH drill collars ( Dry ) = = 27.02 ft
0.148
19. LENGTH OF TUBULARS TO PULL DRY BEFORE OVERBALANCE IS LOST

Overbalance (psi) x [ Riser/Casing Capacity (bbl/ft) – Metal Displacement (bbl/ft) ]
Well bore Fluid Density (ppg) x 0.052 x Metal Displacement (bbl/ft)
Example :
Well bore fluid density = 11.5 ppg
Metal Displacement 0.008
= bbl/ ft
String Capacity = 0.0178 bbl/ ft
Well MD = 12,500 ft
Formation pressure = 6,400 psi
One stand length = 93 ft
Calculate number of stands which can be pulled out dry before the well starts flowing
Hydrostatic pressure = 0.05211,000 11.5 = 6578 psi
Overbalance = Hydrostatic pressure- Formation pressure = 6578
- 6400 = 178 psi
178 (0.147– 0.008)
String to pull before well starts to flows = = 5171 ft
11.5 0.052 0.008
Number of stands 5171 93 = 55. 6 stands
So, stands which can be pulled out safely = 55
Page....415
20. VOLUME TO BLEED OFF TO RESTORE BHP TO FORMATION PRESSURE (bbl )
Increase in Surface Pressure (psi) x Influx Volume (bbl)
Formation Pressure (psi) – Increase in Surface Pressure (psi )
Example :
SITP = 500 psi
SITP after one hour = 600 psi
Original kick volume = 20 bbl
Formation pressure = 6,400 psi
Calculate volume to bleed to maintain BHP.
Increase in pressure
in one hour = 600
– 500 = 100 psi
100 20
Volume to bleed to maintain BHP
= = 0 .317 bbl / hour
6400– 100
21. BOP CLOSING RATIO

Hydraulic Pressure Required to Close (psi)
Example:
BOP Rating = 10,000 psi
Closing Ratio =7:1
Calculate the minimum hydraulic pressure required to close the rams

anticipating 10,000 psi pressure acting from bottom.
10000
Hydraulic pressure required to close =
7
= 1428 psi
Page....416
22. BOP OPENING RATIO
Hydraulic Pressure Required to Open (psi)
Example:
BOP Rating = 10,000 psi
Opening Ratio = 2.3 : 1
Calculate the minimum hydraulic pressure required to open the rams

anticipating 10,000 psi pressure acting from bottom.
10000
Hydraulic pressure required to open =
2.3
= 4348 psi
Page....417
Glossary-Work Over & Completion
Acid
Pertaining to an aqueous solution, such as a water-base drilling fluid, which has more
hydrogen ions (H+) than hydroxyl ions (OH-) and pH less than 7..
Acidizing
The pumping of acid into the wellbore to remove near-well formation damage and other
damaging substances. This procedure commonly enhances production by increasing the
effective well radius. When performed at pressures above thepressure required to fracture
the formation, the procedure is often referred to as acid fracturing.
Accelerator
A downhole tool used in conjunction with a jar to store energy that is suddenly released
when the jar is activated. The energy provides an impact force that operates associated
downhole tools or, in a contingency role, helps release a tool string that has become stuck.
Depending on the operating mode, the energy in tension or compression can be stored by
means of a mechanical spring or a compressible fluid such as nitrogen gas. Accelerators
should be selected on the basis of their compatibility with the jar to be used.
Accumulator
A device used in a hydraulic system to store energy or, in some applications, dampen
pressure fluctuations. Energy is stored by compressing a precharged gas bladder with
hydraulic fluid from the operating or charging system. Depending on the fluid volume and
precharge pressure of the accumulator, a limited amount of hydraulic energy is then
available independent of any other power source. Well pressure-control systems typically
incorporate sufficient accumulator capacity to enable the blowout preventer to be operated
with all other power shut down.
Back up
To hold one end of a threaded connection while the other is turned to make up the joint. To
ensure a secure connection, many types of threaded joints are made up to specific torque
requirements in oil- and gas-well applications. This process requires the controlled
application of force to the rotating component and a means of stabilizing and securing the
corresponding stationary component to which it is being connected.
Page....418
Bridging Material
Solids added to a drilling fluid to bridge across the pore throat or fractures of an exposed
rock thereby building a filter cake to prevent loss of whole mud or excessive filtrate.
Bridging materials are commonly used in drilling fluids and in lost circulationtreatments. For
reservoir applications, the bridging agent should be removable-common products include
calcium carbonate(acid-soluble), suspended salt (water-soluble) or oil-soluble resins. For
lost-circulation treatments, any suitably sized products can be used, including mica,
nutshells and fibers. These products are more commonly referred to as lost-circulation
material (LCM).
BalancePoint
The point at which the forces acting on a tubing string suspended in a live wellbore are
equal. Under these conditions, the weight of the tubing string is balanced by the wellbore
pressure acting to expel the string from the wellbore. The friction caused by the tubing
string passing through the stripper or wellhead sealing device acts to extend the interval
over which the balance point is apparent.
Batch Mixer
A vessel and mixing system used to prepare treatment fluids. A batch mixer is generally
equipped with a means of adding dry and liquid chemicals, an agitation or circulation system
and a manifold system to deliver the prepared fluid to storage tanks or treating pumps.
Blind Shear Ram
A blowout preventer (BOP) closing element fitted with hardened tool steel blades designed
to cut the drillpipe or tubing when the BOP is closed, and then fully close to provide
isolation or sealing of the wellbore. A shear ram is normally used as a last resort to regain
pressure control of a well that is flowing. Once the pipe is cut (or sheared) by the shear
rams, it is usually left hanging in the BOP stack, and kill operations become more difficult.
The joint of drillpipe or tubing is destroyed in the process, but the rest of the string is
unharmed by the operation of shear rams.
Broach
A downhole tool used to repair the internal diameter of the production tubing where a
slight collapse or a dent has occurred. Cutting profiles on a broach removes the tubing-wall
material to allow subsequent passage of tools and equipment of a prescribed
diameter.encountered under static or slow-moving conditions.
Page....419
Braided Line
A type of multistrand wireline used for slickline applications in which higher tension or
weight-carrying ability is required. The most common size of braided line is 3/16-in.
diameter, although special heavy applications use 1/4-in. and 5/16-in. sizes. When larger
sizes are used, it may be necessary to kill the well due to the effect of wellhead pressure on
the relatively large cross-sectional area of the line entering the wellbore.
Bull Plug
A solid plug used as an isolation device in piping systems, conduits or wellbore tubulars.
Bias Weld
A technique used in the assembly of coiled tubing strings at the manufacturing plant. Prior
to being formed, the string is assembled from flat steel strips joined by a bias weld that is
angled across the strip joint at 45 degrees. When the tubing string is milled, the helical weld
form provides enhanced characteristics of the tube at the weld site. These are significantly
better than those achievable with the alternative butt weld technique
Bleed Off
To equalize or relieve pressure from a vessel or system. At the conclusion of high-pressure

tests or treatments, the pressure within the treatment lines and associated systems must be
bled off safely to enable subsequent phases of the operation to continue. The bleedoff
process must be conducted with a high degree of control to avoid the effect of sudden
depressurization, which may create shock forces and fluid-disposal hazards.
Bleed Off Line
A section of manifold containing the valves and piping necessary to bleed off pressure from
a vessel or system. Bleedoff lines may be exposed to widely fluctuating pressures. They
must be adequately secured, and consideration must be given to safe handling or disposal
of the resulting fluids.
Barrel Pump
A small pump with an extended suction duct that is designed to pump fluid from barrels.
Barrel pumps are commonly used to decant liquid additives during the preparation of
treatment fluids at the wellsite.
Page....420
Blender
The equipment used to prepare the slurries and gels commonly used in stimulation
treatments. The blender should be capable of providing a supply of adequately mixed
ingredients at the desired treatment rate. Modern blenders are computer controlled,
enabling the flow of chemicals and ingredients to be efficiently metered and requiring a
relatively small residence volume to achieve good control over the blend quality and
delivery rate.
Butt Weld
A welding technique used to join two tubes in which the squared and prepared ends are
butted together in preparation for welding. The resulting circumferential weld has relatively
good strength characteristics but has limitations where the tube is to be plastically
deformed or bent, such as occurs on a coiled tubing string. Consequently, butt welds
performed on a coiled tubing string should be checked carefully using hardness and
radiographic testing methods and their locations detailed in the string record. The
anticipated fatigue life in the butt-weld area must also be reduced to compensate for the
weakness of the weld.
C pump
A type of pump commonly used in the handling and mixing of oilfield fluids. The rotary
motion of a profiled impeller in combination with a shaped pump housing or volute applies
centrifugal force to discharge fluids from the pump. Centrifugal pumps generally operate
most efficiently in high-volume, low-output-pressure conditions. Unlike a positive-
displacementpump, the flow from centrifugal pumps can be controlled easily, even allowing
flow to be completely closed off using valves on the pump discharge manifold while the
pump is running. This pump is known as a "centrifugal pump."
Closure Pressure
An analysis parameter used in hydraulic fracture design to indicate the pressure at which
the fracture effectively closes without proppant in place.
Casing Patch
A downhole assembly or tool system used in the remedial repair of casing damage,
corrosion or leaks. Casing patches are most frequently used as short- to medium-term
repairs that enable production to be resumed until a major workoveroperation is scheduled.
In some cases, such as in depleted wells nearing the end of viable production, a casing patch
may be the only economic means of safely returning the well to production.
Page....421
Chrome Tubing
Tubing manufactured from an alloy containing a high proportion of chrome, typically greater
than 13%. Chrome tubing is classified as a corrosion-resistant alloy (CRA) and is used where
the wellbore conditions or reservoir fluid create a corrosive environment that conventional
tubing cannot safely withstand. Wells that produce hydrogen sulfide, and similar corrosive
fluids, typically require chrome tubing.
Coiled Tubing
A long, continuous length of pipe wound on a spool. The pipe is straightened prior to
pushing into a wellbore and rewound to coil the pipe back onto the transport and storage
spool. Depending on the pipe diameter (1 in. to 4 1/2 in.) and the spool size, coiled tubing
can range from 2,000 ft to 15,000 ft [610 to 4,570 m] or greater length.
Circulation Sub
A downhole tool typically used with motors or assemblies that restrict the allowable fluid-
circulation rates. When operated, the circulation sub allows a higher circulation rate to be
established by opening a path to the annulus in the top section of the tool string. This is
especially useful in applications such as drilling in slim-diameter wells, where a higher
circulation rate may be necessary to effect good cuttings transport and hole cleaning before
the string is retrieved.
Coiled Tubing Connector
The downhole device used to connect the tool string to the coiled tubing string. Several
types of devices with varying principles of operation are commonly used. The primary
requirement is provision of an adequate mechanical connection capable of withstanding the
necessary tensile and compressive forces, while ensuring efficient hydraulic isolation of the
connection between the tool string and the coiled tubing string.
Casing Scraper
A downhole tool incorporating a blade assembly that is used to remove scale and debris
from the internal surface of a casing string. Generally run on tubing or drill pipe, casing
scrapers are routinely used during work over operations to ensure that the wellbore is clean
before reinstalling the completion string.
Circulation Valve
A downhole device that enables circulation through the tubing string and associated
annulus. As a completion accessory, a circulation valve is included to circulate fluid for well
kill or kickoff. Circulation valves typically are operated by slickline tools and are generally
capable of several opening and closing cycles before requiring service.
Page....422
Coiled Tubing String
A continuous length of low-alloy carbon-steel tubing that can be spooled on a reel for
transport, then deployed into a wellbore for the placement of fluids or manipulation of tools
during workover and well-intervention operations. The process of spooling and
straightening a coiled tubing string imparts a high degree of fatigue to the tube material.
Therefore, a coiled tubing string should be regarded as a consumable product with a finite
service life. Predicting and managing the factors that affect the safe working life of a coiled
tubing string are key components of the string-management system necessary for ensuring
safe and efficient coiled tubing operations.
Corrosion Inhibitor
A chemical additive used in acid treatments to protect iron and steel components in the
wellbore and treating equipment from the corrosive treating fluid. Corrosion inhibitors
generally are mixed with the treatment fluid and are formulated to be effective in
protecting the metal components the fluid is likely to contact. This protection must remain
effective under the anticipated pressure and temperature environment for the duration of
the treatment.
Coiled Tubing Unit
The package of equipment required to run a coiled tubing operation. Four basic components
are required: the coiled tubing reel to store and transport the coiled tubing string, the
injector head to provide the attractive effort to run and retrieve the coiled tubing string, the
control cabin from which the equipment operator controls and monitors the operation, and
the power pack that generates the necessary hydraulic and pneumatic power required by
the other components. The dimensions and capacities of the coiled tubing unit components
determine the size and length of coiled tubing string that can be used on the unit. Pressure-
control equipment is incorporated into the equipment to provide the necessary control of
well pressure fluid during normal operating conditions and contingency situations requiring
emergency control.
Counter Balance Winch
The lifting device on a snubbing unit used to pick up and lay down the tool string and
running-string tubulars.
Clean Out
To remove wellbore-fill material such as sand, scale or organic materials, and other debris
from the wellbore. Many reservoirs produce some sand or fines that may not be carried to
surface in the produced fluid. Accumulations of fill material may eventually increase in
concentration within the lower wellbore, possibly restricting production. Cleanouts using
coiled tubing, snubbing or hydraulic workover techniques are performed routinely.
Page....423
Collapse Pressure
The pressure at which a tube, or vessel, will catastrophically deform as a result of

differential pressure acting from outside to inside of the vessel or tube. The collapse-
pressure rating of perfectly round tubing is relatively high. However, when the tubing is
even slightly oval, the differential pressure at which the tube will collapse may be
significantly reduced. This is an important factor in determining the operating limits of
coiled tubing strings since the action of spooling the string tends to induce some ovality.
Collector
The electrical device used on the axle of a spool or reel to provide electrical continuity
between the rotating reel core and the stationary reel chassis. When using a coiled tubing
string equipped with an electrical conductor, such as required during coiled tubing logging
operations, a collector is fitted to the reel axle to allow connection of the surface data-
acquisition equipment
Closing Unit
A generic term given to the hydraulic power pack and accumulators used to control the
blowout preventers on a drilling or workover rig.
Combi BOP
A type of blowout preventer (BOP) in which each ram set combines two conventional ram
functions, such as blind/shear and pipe/slip. The principal advantage of the combi-BOP is
the reduced height required for rig up of the required ram functions.
CT
Another term for coiled tubing, a long, continuous length of pipe wound on a spool. The
pipe is straightened prior to pushing into a wellbore and rewound to coil the pipe back onto
the transport and storage spool. Depending on the pipe diameter (1 in. to 4 1/2 in.) and the
spool size, coiled tubing can range from 2,000 ft to 15,000 ft [610 to 4,570 m] or greater
length.
Dart
A device dropped or pumped through tubing or coiled tubing string to activate downhole
equipment and tools.
Page....424
Deployment System
An assembly of pressure-control equipment that enables the running and retrieval of long
tool strings on a coiled tubing string in a live wellbore. The deployment system is configured
to provide two barriers against well pressure as the tool string is assembled and run into the
wellbore. Once fully assembled, the coiled tubing equipment is connected and the tool
string is run into the wellbore. The process is reversed for tool retrieval.
Dummy Valve
A blank gas-lift valve placed in a gas-lift mandrel to isolate the tubing string from the
annulus. Gas-lift valves frequently are replaced with dummy valves during intervention work
on wells with gas-lift completions.
Equalizing Valve
A device that is operated to equalize the pressure across a valve, plug or similar pressure or
fluid isolation barrier. The operating mechanism on many pressure-sealing devices is
rendered inoperable once the mechanism has been activated by pressure. In such cases, the
pressure across the pressure barrier must be equalized before the barrier can be removed.
Flow Meter
A device installed in a pump manifold or treating line to measure the fluid flow rate.
Flowmeters can be used to measure the flow rates of liquid or gas and are available in
various configurations and with differing operating principles.
Flow Meter
A device installed in a pump manifold or treating line to measure the fluid flow rate.
Flowmeters can be used to measure the flow rates of liquid or gas and are available in
various configurations and with differing operating principles.
Fishing Diagram
A diagram noting the major profiles and dimensions of tools and equipment run into a
wellbore. A fishing diagram should be prepared for every tool operation, enabling
contingency plans to be implemented efficiently if the tool string becomes stuck or lost.
Free Point
The depth at which tubing or coiled tubing string that is stuck in the wellbore is free to
move. When the tubing string must be cut to enable recovery, the free point should be
known to ensure retrieval of the cut tubing. This enables remedial action to be taken to
resolve the sticking mechanism on the portion of the string below the cut.
Page....425
Fishing Neck
The surface on which a fishing tool engages when retrieving tubing, tools or equipment
stuck or lost in a wellbore. Tools and equipment that are temporarily installed in a wellbore
are generally equipped with a specific fishing-neck profile to enable the running and
retrieval tools to reliably engage and release.
Fluid Compatibility Test
A test, or series of tests, performed to check that no undesirable reactions occur with a
specific fluid. The testing process may include checks for compatibility with other treating
fluids, wellbore fluids, reservoir fluids and the reservoir formation. In extreme cases, the
mixing of seemingly benign fluids can create significant reactions that may damage the
reservoir permeability permanently.
Fluid Level
The depth, or distance from surface, that the fluid in a well incapable of natural flow will
reach under static conditions.
Free-Point Indicator
A wireline tool used to determine the free point on a stuck string. The free-point indicator
operates by detecting stretch in the tubular when tension is applied at surface. If stretch is
not detected, the string must be stuck above the tool; if stretch is detected, the string is free
above the free-point indicator tool.
Gas Buster
A simple separator vessel used to remove free or entrained gas from fluids circulated in the
wellbore, such as mud used during drilling operations. The gas buster typically comprises a
vessel containing a series of baffles with a liquid exit on the bottom and a gas-vent line at
the top of the vessel.
GooseNeck
An inverted "U" shaped section of rigid piping normally used as a conduit for high-pressure
drilling fluid. In particular, the term is applied to a structure that connects the top of a
vertical standpipe running up the side of a derrick or mast to a flexible kelly hose that in turn
is connected to another gooseneck between the flexible line and the swivel.
Grapple
A generic name given to tools that engage on the outer surface of a tubing string or tool
assembly, generally for fishing purposes.
Page....426
Grease-Injection System
An assembly of components used to contain wellhead fluids and pressure during braided-
line or wireline operations. The wireline passes through a close-tolerance tube assembly as
it leaves the wellbore. High-pressure grease is pumped into the surrounding annulus to
effect a pressure-tight dynamic seal that is maintained during the operation by injecting
more grease as required. A slight leakage of grease is normal, and the addition of fresh
grease enables the consistency of the seal to be maintained at an effective level.
Gripper Blocks
The profiled blocks attached to the drive chains of a coiled tubing injector head. The gripper
blocks are arranged in opposing pairs to secure the coiled tubing string in the injector-head
chains. As the hydraulic drive system rotates the chains, the gripper blocks feed the tubing
string into, or out of the well.
Gin Pole
A lifting device, similar in function to a crane jib, that is used in a number of oilfield
applications, such as for handling tubularson a snubbing unit, tool strings on a slickline unit
or on a winch truck, and for general lifting at the wellsite.
Heavy Pipe
An operating condition during a snubbing operation in which the force resulting from the
weight of the pipe or tubing string is greater than the wellhead pressure and the buoyancy
forces acting to eject the string from the wellbore. In the heavy-pipe condition, the string
will drop into the wellbore if the gripping force is lost.
High-PressureSsqueeze
A squeeze-cementing technique involving the application of treatment pressure that is

higher than the fracture pressure of the information. This procedure may be necessary to
force the slurry into microcracks or annuli that surround the wellbore. The characteristics of
a fracture are dependent on the fluid flow rate when the fracture is initiated; consequently,
high-pressure squeeze operations must be conducted with a high degree of control to place
the slurry in the desired location.
Hydraulic Release Tool
A downhole tool designed to allow the lower and upper tool string sections to be parted to
enable retrieval of the running string. Hydraulic disconnects rely on the application of a
predefined pressure through the running string to activate a release mechanism. In some
cases, a ball or dart is plugged to block circulation through the tool string and enable the
application of the release pressure.
Page....427
Hesitation Squeeze
A technique used in squeeze cementing whereby a portion of the slurry is pumped, then
pumping stops to expose the slurry to differential pressure against the zone of interest in
stages over a period from several minutes to several hours. This pressure, higher than
necessary for fluid movement, is applied to force the cement slurry into the area requiring
repair. This staged procedure is repeated until all the slurry has been pumped or until no
further slurry can be placed into the treatment zone. The cement remaining in the zone
forms an effective hydraulic seal with a high compressive strength.
Hydraulic Disconnect
A downhole tool designed to allow the lower and upper tool string sections to be parted to
enable retrieval of the running string. Hydraulic disconnects rely on the application of a
predefined pressure through the running string to activate a release mechanism. In some
cases, a ball or dart is plugged to block circulation through the tool string and enable the
application of the release pressure
Injector Head
One of the principal equipment components of a coiled tubing unit. The injector head
incorporates special profiled chain assemblies to grip the coiled tubing string and a hydraulic
drive system that provides the tractive effort for running and retrieving the string from the
wellbore. The base of the injector head is secured to the wellhead pressure-control
equipment by the stripper assembly mounting system. The gooseneck mounted on top of
the injector head feeds the tubing string from the reel around a controlled radius into the
injector head.
Intensifier
A downhole tool used with a jar to increase the impact force imparted as the jar is fired.
Similar in function to an accelerator, intensifiers typically use compressed gas rather than a
mechanical spring to store the energy released during operation.
Jacking Frame
A support structure used to stabilize the injector head and pressure-control equipment on
some offshore, or special onshore, coiled tubing units. The jacking frame is hydraulically
controlled to enable the injector head to be located at a safe and secure working height.
Additional features, such as the ability to skid the injector head to the side for access to the
wellbore are included in some of the more complex designs of jacking frame.
Page....428
Junk Sub
A downhole tool with a profiled external surface designed to catch and retrieve junk or
debris from the wellbore. The debris is carried up the tool-string annulus in the circulation
fluid. An indented profile creating a larger annular area causes the fluid flow rate to drop
and allows debris to drop into a basket or receptacle located at the base of the tool.
Jar
A mechanical device used downhole to deliver an impact load to another downhole

component, especially when that component is stuck. There are two primary types,
hydraulic and mechanical jars. While their respective designs are quite different, their
operation is similar. Energy is stored in the drill string and suddenly released by the jar when
it fires. The principle is similar to that of a carpenter using a hammer. Kinetic energy is
stored in the hammer as it is swung, and suddenly released to the nail and board when the
hammer strikes the nail. Jars can be designed to strike up, down, or both. In the case of
jarring up above a stuck bottom hole assembly, the driller slowly pulls up on the drill string
but the BHA does not move. Since the top of the drill string is moving up, this means that
the drill string itself is stretching and storing energy. When the jars reach their firing point,
they suddenly allow one section of the jar to move axially relative to a second, being pulled
up rapidly in much the same way that one end of a stretched spring moves when released.
After a few inches of movement, this moving section slams into a steel shoulder, imparting
an impact load. In addition to the mechanical and hydraulic versions, jars are classified as
drilling jars or fishing jars. The operation of the two types is similar, and both deliver
approximately the same impact blow, but the drilling jar is built such that it can better
withstand the rotary and vibrational loading associated with drilling.
Kill Pump
A high-pressure pump designated for well-kill purposes. Depending on the application, the
kill pump may need to be connected to a ready supply of kill fluid should well control be
required at short notice.
Lubricator
A long, high-pressure pipe fitted to the top of a wellhead or Christmas tree so that tools may
be put into a high-pressure well. The top of the lubricator assembly includes a high-pressure
grease-injection section and sealing elements. The lubricator is installed on top of the tree
and tested, the tools placed in the lubricator and the lubricator pressurized to wellbore
pressure. Then the top valves of the tree are opened to enable the tools to fall or be
pumped into the wellbore under pressure. To remove the tools, the reverse process is used:
the tools are pulled up into the lubricator under wellbore pressure, the tree valves are
closed, the lubricator pressure is bled off, and then the lubricator may be opened to remove
the tools.
Page....429
Lifting Frame
A lifting device used when performing coiled tubing operations from a semisubmersible rig
or drillship. The coiled tubing injector and pressure-control equipment are positioned within
the lifting frame, which is attached to the flow head and running string and supported by
the traveling blocks. This configuration enables the heave-compensation system of the rig to
counteract the vessel motion.
Light Pipe
An operating condition during a snubbing operation in which the wellhead pressure and
buoyancy forces are greater than the force resulting from the weight of the pipe or tubing
string. In the light-pipe condition the string will be ejected from the wellbore if the gripping
force of the slips is lost.
Load Cell
The sensor component in a weight-indicator system that detects the tensional or

compression forces being imparted to the running string at surface. Load cells are
hydraulically or electronically operated and are connected to the weight-indicator display
system on the equipment operator's console.
Milling
The use of a mill or similar downhole tool to cut and remove material from equipment or
tools located in the wellbore. Successful milling operations require appropriate selection of
milling tools, fluids and techniques. The mills, or similar cutting tools, must be compatible
with the fish materials and wellbore conditions. The circulated fluids should be capable of
removing the milled material from the wellbore. Finally, the techniques employed should be
appropriate to the anticipated conditions and the likely time required to reach the
operation objectives.
Mast Unit
A well-servicing unit for slickline, wireline or coiled tubing operations that is equipped with a
mast rather than a crane or gin pole. The mast provides a means of lifting and stabilizing
tools, and running pressure-control and other equipment.
Page....430
Mill
A tool that grinds metal downhole. A mill is usually used to remove junk in the hole or to
grind away all or part of a casing string. In the case of junk, the metal must be broken into
smaller pieces to facilitate removal from the wellbore so that drilling can continue. When
milling casing, the intent is to cut a window through the side of the casing or to remove a
continuous section of the casing so that the wellbore may be deviated from the original well
through the window or section removed. Depending on the type of grinding or metal
removal required, the shape of the cutting structures of mills varies. Virtually all mills,
however, utilize tungsten carbine cutting surfaces.
Mechanical Jar
A type of jar that incorporates a mechanical trip or firing mechanism that activates only
when the necessary tension or compression has been applied to the running string. In
slickline operations, the term is often used to describe any jar that does not contain a
hydraulic trip mechanism, such as link and tubular jars that do not incorporate a firing
mechanism.
Overshot
A downhole tool used in fishing operations to engage on the outside surface of a tube or
tool. A grapple, or similar slip mechanism, on the overshot grips the fish, allowing
application of tensile force and jarring action. If the fish cannot be removed, a release
system within the overshot allows the overshot to be disengaged and retrieved.
Pack off
To plug the wellbore around a drillstring. This can happen for a variety of reasons, the most
common being that either the drilling fluid is not properly transporting cuttings and cavings
out of the annulus or portions of the wellbore wall collapse around the drill string. When the
well packs off, there is a sudden reduction or loss of the ability to circulate, and high pump
pressures follow. If prompt remedial action is not successful, an expensive episode of stuck
pipe can result. The term is also used in gravel packing to describe the act of placing all the
sand or gravel in the annulus.
Pill
Any relatively small quantity (less than 200 bbl) of a special blend of drilling fluid to
accomplish a specific task that the regular drilling fluid cannot perform. Examples include
high-viscosity pills to help lift cuttings out of a vertical wellbore, freshwater pills to dissolve
encroaching salt formations, pipe-freeing pills to destroy filter cake and relieve differential
sticking forces and lost circulation material pills to plug a thief zone.
Page....431
Poppet Valve
A type of check valve often used in the lines or manifolds associated with kill and choke lines
or pressure-control equipment.
Pipe Heavy
An operating condition during a snubbing operation in which the force resulting from the
weight of the pipe or tubing string is greater than the wellhead pressure and the buoyancy
forces acting to eject the string from the wellbore. In the heavy-pipe condition, the string
will drop into the wellbore if the gripping force is lost.
Pipe Light
An operating condition during a snubbing operation in which the wellhead pressure and
buoyancy forces are greater than the force resulting from the weight of the pipe or tubing
string. In the light-pipe condition the string will be ejected from the wellbore if the gripping
force of the slips is lost.
Pulling Tool
A slickline or coiled tubing tool used to retrieve temporary devices, such as plugs and flow-
control equipment, from the wellbore. Pulling tools are available in a range of sizes and
profiles and must be compatible with the equipment to be retrieved. A contingency release
system in the pulling tool allows the tool to be released and retrieved if the equipment to be
retrieved cannot be released.
Reel Back Tension
The tension applied to a coiled tubing string as it passes between the reel and the injector
head. An adequate back-tension must be maintained to ensure that the string spools
correctly on or off the reel.
Running Tool
A generic name for a tool or device that is used in the placement or setting of downhole
equipment such as permanent packers or plugs. The running tool can be retrieved after the
operation or setting process. In some cases, the running tool also is used to retrieve the
equipment or tool that has been set in the wellbore.
Reel
The device used to store and transport a coiled tubing string ready for use at the wellsite.
The coiled tubing reel incorporates a manifold and swivel arrangement to enable fluids to be
pumped through the coiled tubing string at any time, a level wind assembly to ensure the
string is correctly spooled and a treatment system to apply inhibitor or similar protective
Page....432
coatings to the coiled tubing string. The reel functions are hydraulically powered and
controlled from the unit control cabin.
Shear Ram
A blowout preventer (BOP) closing element fitted with hardened tool steel blades designed
to cut the drillpipe or tubing when the BOP is closed, and then fully close to provide
isolation or sealing of the wellbore. A shear ram is normally used as a last resort to regain
pressure control of a well that is flowing. Once the pipe is cut (or sheared) by the shear
rams, it is usually left hanging in the BOP stack, and kill operations become more difficult.
The joint of drill pipe or tubing is destroyed in the process, but the rest of the string is
unharmed by the operation of shear rams.
Snubbing Basket
The work area at the top of a snubbing unit that houses the unit controls and a means of
handling the tubulars and tool string to be run or retrieved.
Safety Head
Another term for shear-seal BOP, an item of pressure-control equipment often fitted to the
wellhead during well-intervention operations on live wells. Most commonly associated with
coiled tubing operations, the shear-seal BOP is a ram-type preventer that performs the dual
functions of shearing or cutting the tubing string and then fully closing to provide isolation
or sealing of the wellbore. Shear-seal BOPs are most commonly used in offshore or high-
pressure applications where an additional contingency pressure barrier is required.
Shear Seal BOP
An item of pressure-control equipment often fitted to the wellhead during well-intervention

operations on live wells. Most commonly associated with coiled tubing operations, the
shear-seal BOP is a ram-type preventer that performs the dual functions of shearing or
cutting the tubing string and then fully closing to provide isolation or sealing of the wellbore.
Shear-seal BOPs are most commonly used in offshore or high-pressure applications where
an additional contingency pressure barrier is required.
Snubbing Force
The force required to insert a tool or tubing string into a live wellbore. Two main
components act to determine the snubbing force: the force resulting from the wellhead
pressure acting on the cross-sectional area of the tubing, or the outside diameter of the tool
and the force required to overcome the friction resulting from the stripper or similar sealing
device containing the wellbore pressure and fluids.
Page....433
Stabbing Valve
A valve that is connected to the work string in the event that the well starts to flow when
running or retrieving the string. A stabbing valve generally is kept on the rig floor as a
contingency against unexpected well flow. On snubbing operations, a stabbing valve, or
safety valve, is kept in the workbasket to protect against tubing plug or backpressure valve
failure.
Snubbing Jack
The components of a snubbing unit that provide the vertical stroke or movement required
to run or retrieve the work string. Snubbing jacks are hydraulically operated and can apply
extremely high forces to the tubing string and the wellhead to which they are attached.
Stationary Slips
The slip set on a snubbing unit located at the base of the jack. Two sets of stationary slips
are available, one set for pipe-heavy conditions and another for pipe-light conditions.
Sand Cleanout
The process of removing sand or similar fill from a wellbore. Many wells produce sand that
may accumulate and restrictproduction if not removed from the wellbore by the production
fluid. Coiled tubing and snubbing units are routinely used for sand-cleanout operations,
enabling the well condition to be treated without removing the completion equipment or
even killing the well.
Shear-Seal BOP
An item of pressure-control equipment often fitted to the wellhead during well-intervention

operations on live wells. Most commonly associated with coiled tubing operations, the
shear-seal BOP is a ram-type preventer that performs the dual functions of shearing or
cutting the tubing string and then fully closing to provide isolation or sealing of the wellbore.
Shear-seal BOPs are most commonly used in offshore or high-pressure applications where
an additional contingency pressure barrier is required.
Spooler
A device used to handle and temporarily store a coiled tubing string. Spoolers generally are
configured with a removable drum that allows transport spools to be inserted, allowing a
new string to be spooled onto a reel. The term is also occasionally used to describe the level
wind assembly on a tubing reel.
Page....434
Stationary Snubbers
The stationary slip set on a snubbing unit used when operating under light-pipe conditions.
Under these conditions, the well head pressure is sufficient to eject the tubing string from
the wellbore. Therefore, the slips are oriented in a hold-down position to grip with the force
acting upward on the string.
Shifting Tool
A downhole tool, most commonly associated with slickline operations, that is used to open,
close or shift the position of downhole flow control or circulation devices, such as sliding
sleeves. The shifting tool generally features some means of engaging the components to be
shifted and is typically run with upward or downward operating jars to deliver the necessary
force or impact.
Spot
To place a small volume or pill of fluid in a wellbore annulus to free differentially stuck pipe.
Oil-base mud is the traditional stuck-pipe spotting fluid. Speed in mixing and placing the
spot is of primary importance to successfully freeing pipe. Because of concern about mud
disposal, spots used offshore are either synthetic-based emulsions or benign water-base
formulations. Each type is supplied as prepackaged concentrate designed for rapid access
and mixing at the rig. A spot frees pipe by covering the stuck region. It presumably breaks up
the filter cake, allowing the spot to migrate into cracks in the cake and between the pipe
and the cake, reducing the stuck area and allowing pipe to be pulled free.
Stem
The weight bar used in slickline operations to overcome the effects of wellhead pressure
and friction at the surface seal where the wire enters the wellbore. In addition to a solid
steel stem, a special high-density stem is available with internal cavities filled with lead,
tungsten or mercury alloys.
Sand Line
A long cable, installed on most drilling and work over rigs, used when swabbing or bailing in
the production tubing or well bore tubulars. The sand line is typically stored and operated
on a winch drum that is part of the rig draw works. The sand line is capable of significantly
higher tensile forces than slickline or electric wireline.
Sand Out
A condition encountered during some hydraulic fracturing operations whereby the fracture
cannot accept further sand orproppant and only the carrier fluid is injected into the
formation. A sand out occurs when the concentration of proppant within the tubing string
rapidly increases, creating a corresponding sudden increase in pump pressure.
Page....435
Slickline
A thin nonelectric cable used for selective placement and retrieval of wellbore hardware,
such as plugs, gauges and valves located in side pocket mandrels. Valves and sleeves can
also be adjusted using slickline tools. Partially collapsed tubing can be repaired using a
tubing swage on slickline.
Slug
A volume of mud that is denser than the mud in the drill pipe and wellbore annulus. A slug is
used to displace mud out of the upper part of the drill pipe before pulling pipe out of the
hole and is mixed in the pill pit by adding additional weighting material (barite) to a few
barrels of mud from the surface pits. The pill is pumped into the top of the drill string to
push mud downward, out of the pipe, thus keeping the upper stands of pipe empty.
Stripper Rubber
The sealing element used in coiled tubing or snubbing stripper systems. The stripper
element is a consumable product and generally should be replaced for each operation.
Coiled tubing elements can be replaced with the tubing in place, enabling a worn or leaking
element to be replaced during an operation. Snubbing stripper rubbers are of single-piece
construction and cannot be changed with the work string in place.
Scraper
Also called a pig, a device with blades or brushes inserted in a pipeline for cleaning
purposes. The pressure of the oil stream behind pushes the pig along the pipeline to clean
out rust, wax, scale and debris. To clean downhole tubulars a similar device, called a casing
scraper or paraffin scraper, may be used.
Stripping
The act of putting drill pipe into the wellbore when the blowout preventers (BOPs) are
closed and pressure is contained in the well. This is necessary when a kick is taken, since
well kill operations should always be conducted with the drill string on bottom, and not
somewhere up the wellbore. If only the annular BOP has been closed, the drill pipe may be
slowly and carefully lowered into the wellbore, and the BOP itself will open slightly to
permit the larger diameter tool joints to pass through. If the well has been closed with the
use of ram BOPs, the tool joints will not pass by the closed ram element. Hence, while
keeping the well closed with either another ram or the annular BOP, the ram must be
opened manually, then the pipe lowered until the tool joint is just below the ram, and then
the ram closed again. This procedure is repeated whenever a tool joint must pass by a ram
BOP. Rig crews are usually required to practice ram-to-ram and ram-to-annular stripping
operations as part of their well control certifications. In stripping operations, the
combination of the pressure in the well and the weight of the drill string is such that the
Page....436
pipe falls in the hole under its own weight, whereas in snubbing operations the pipe must be
pushed into the hole.
Snub
To put drillpipe into the wellbore when the blowout preventers (BOPs) are closed and
pressure is contained in the well. Snubbing is necessary when a kick is taken, since well kill
operations should always be conducted with the drill string on bottom, and not somewhere
up the wellbore. If only the annular BOP has been closed, the drill pipe may be slowly and
carefully lowered into the wellbore, and the BOP itself will open slightly to permit the larger
diameter tool joints to pass through. If the well has been closed with the use of ram BOPs,
the tool joints will not pass by the closed ram element. Hence, while keeping the well closed
with either another ram BOP or the annular BOP, the ram must be opened manually, then
the pipe lowered until the tool joint is just below the ram, and then closing the ram again.
This procedure is repeated whenever a tool joint must pass by a ram BOP. In snubbing
operations, the pressure in the wellbore acting on the cross-sectional area of the tubular
can exert sufficient force to overcome the weight of the drill string, so the string must be
pushed (or "snubbed") back into the wellbore. In ordinary stripping operations, the pipe falls
into the wellbore under its own weight, and no additional downward force or pushing is
required.
Stripping Ram
A ram-type blowout preventer used to provide primary pressure control in high-pressure

snubbing operations. Stripping rams are used when the wellhead pressure is higher than the
limitations of a stripper bowl.
Secondary Cementing
Another term for remedial cementing, cementing operations performed to repair primary-
cementing problems or to treat conditions arising after the wellbore has been constructed.
The two main categories of remedial cementing include squeeze cementing and the
placement of cement plugs.
Snubbers
The slips used to grip the pipe during a snubbing operation.
Swab Valve
The topmost valve on a Christmas tree that provides vertical access to the wellbore.
Snubbing
The act of putting drillpipe into the wellbore when the blowout preventers (BOPs) are
closed and pressure is contained in the well. Snubbing is necessary when a kick is taken,
Page....437
since well kill operations should always be conducted with the drill string on bottom, and
not somewhere up the wellbore. If only the annular BOP has been closed, the drillpipe may
be slowly and carefully lowered into the wellbore, and the BOP itself will open slightly to
permit the larger diameter tool joints to pass through. If the well has been closed with the
use of ram BOPs, the tool joints will not pass by the closed ram element. Hence, while
keeping the well closed with either another ram BOP or the annular BOP, the ram must be
opened manually, then the pipe lowered until the tool joint is just below the ram, and then
closing the ram again. This procedure is repeated whenever a tool joint must pass by a ram
BOP. In snubbing operations, the pressure in the wellbore acting on the cross-sectional area
of the tubular can exert sufficient force to overcome the weight of the drill string, so the
string must be pushed (or "snubbed") back into the wellbore. In ordinary stripping
operations, the pipe falls into the wellbore under its own weight, and no additional
downward force or pushing is required.
Tapered String
A string of drill pipe or casing that consists of two or more sizes or weights. In most tapered
strings, a larger diameter pipe or casing is placed at the top of the wellbore and the smaller
size at the bottom. Note that since the pipe is put into the well bottom first, the smaller pipe
is run into the hole first, followed by the larger diameter. Other than the different sizes,
which are usually chosen to optimize well economics, there is nothing distinctive about the
pipe sections. However, pipe-handling tools must be available for each pipe size, not just
one size, as is the typical case.
Travelling Snubbers
The travelling slip set on a snubbing unit that is used when operating under light-pipe
conditions. Under these conditions, the wellhead pressure is sufficient to eject the tubing
string from the wellbore. Therefore, the slips are oriented in a hold-down position to act
against the upward force applied to the tubing string.
Wireline
Related to any aspect of logging that employs an electrical cable to lower tools into the
borehole and to transmit data. Wireline logging is distinct from measurements-while-drilling
(MWD) and mud logging.
Work string
A generic term used to describe a tubing string used to convey a treatment or for well
service activities. Both coiled and jointed tubing strings are referred to as work strings.
Page....438
Wash Pipe
A tool-string component used with a burn shoe for washover operations. The wash pipe is a
relatively large internal-diameter tubular that can be washed over a fish in preparation for
engaging and retrieving the fish.
Weight Indicator
One of the instruments that the driller uses to monitor and improve the operating
efficiencies of the drilling operation. The actual measurement of weight is made with a
hydraulic gauge attached to the dead line of the drilling line. As tension increases in the
drilling line, more hydraulic fluid is forced through the instrument, turning the hands of the
indicator. The weight that is measured includes everything exerting tension on the wire
rope, including the traveling blocks and cable itself. Hence, to have an accurate weight
measurement of the drillstring, the driller must first make a zero offset adjustment to
account for the traveling blocks and items other than the drillstring. Then the indicated
weight will represent the drillstring (drillpipe and bottomhole assembly). However, the
driller is only nominally interested in this weight for most operations. The weight of interest
is the weight applied to the bit on the bottom of the hole. The driller could simply take the
rotating and hanging off bottom weight, say 300,000 pounds [136,200 kg], and subtract
from that the amount of rotating on bottom weight, say 250,000 pounds [113,500 kg], to
get a bit weight of 50,000 pounds [22,700 kg]. However, most rigs are equipped with a
weight indicator that has a second indicator dial that can be set to read zero ("zeroed") with
the drillstring hanging free, and works backwards from the main indicator dial. After proper
zeroing, any weight set on bottom (that takes weight away from the main dial), has the
effect of adding weight to this secondary dial, so that the driller can read weight on bit
directly from the dial.
Wireline Cutter
A downhole tool used to cut slickline from a tool string that is stuck or jammed in a
wellbore. The wireline cutter is attached to the slickline at surface and dropped down the
wellbore. When the cutting tool impacts the tool string, a cutting mechanism cuts the
slickline and enables recovery of the line in preparation for further fishing operations.
Workover
The repair or stimulation of an existing production well for the purpose of restoring,
prolonging or enhancing the production of hydrocarbons.
Washover
A type of milling operation in which the outer surfaces of a plug or similar fish are milled
with a circular hollow mill. By including wash pipe in the tool string, the mill face can reach
Page....439
over the body of the fish until it can be pushed to bottom, or until the slips or retaining
device can be milled out and the fish retrieved.
Well Servicing
The maintenance procedures performed on an oil or gas well after the well has been
completed and production from thereservoir has begun. Well service activities are generally
conducted to maintain or enhance the well productivity, although some slickline and coiled
tubing applications are performed to assess or monitor the performance of the well or
reservoir. Slickline, coiled tubing, snubbing and workover rigs or rod units are routinely used
in well service activities.
Wireline Grab
A fishing tool used for the retrieval of broken or cut slickline from the wellbore. Wireline
grabs are intended to catch and engage wireline that has been bunched or nested in the
wellbore. For that reason, they are often run after a blind box or similar fullbore tool has
been used to nest the wireline.
Workover Fluid
A well-control fluid, typically a brine, that is used during workover operations. Since the
wellbore is in contact with the reservoirduring most workover operations, workover fluids
should be clean and chemically compatible with the reservoir fluids and formation matrix.
Wire Clamp
A safety device attached to the slickline at surface between the hay pulley and stuffing-box
pulley. The wire clamp generally is applied when the slickline is to be stationary for a period
of time. This prevents the tool string from dropping down the wellbore if the winch unit fails
or the slickline becomes damaged at surface.
Work Basket The work area at the top of a snubbing unit that houses the unit controls and
a means of handling the tubulars and tool string to be run or retrieved.
Workover String
Another term for work string, a generic term used to describe a tubing string used to convey
a treatment or for well service activities. Both coiled and jointed tubing strings are referred
to as work strings.
Page....440

Falcon Latest Well Intrevention With Glosory

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Falcon Latest Well Intrevention With Glosory

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FM WELL INTERVENTION

Chapter 1 Principles & Procedures

Drilling Mud, Brine, inhibited Sea Water and Fresh water

Classed as a primary barrier

Prevent annulus flow

From the production well

First contain/maintain pressure or flow

Well was killed with Kill Fluid (fluid barrier)

First prevent flow of well = Primary Barrier

The hydrostatic pressure of a column of fluid is determined on the basis

Pressure Gradient (psi/ft) = 0.052 x Fluid Density (ppg) Formula-1

Fluid Density (ppg) = Pressure (psi)

API Unit Formula-4

Formation Pressure Determination

SITHP = 2,500 psl

Oil Density = 7.0. ppg

Depth of top Perforation = 9,500 Ft. (TVD)

FP = (0.052 x 7 x 9500) + 2500

Over Balance Pressure is;

Well is under balance

Basic Hydrostatic Pressure

There are two types of testing;

Reduce Pressure at the upper side of

Increase Pressure at the upper side of

Cement Plug (P & A):

Cased hole well:

X/Mas Tree & Well Head:

Production Packer Production Packer with

Valve Operation in Flowing Wells

Annular Capacity (bbl/ft) = (IDcsq)2 - (ODtbq)2

API Unit Formula-7

Strokes to Displace (strokes)

Tubing = Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Annulus = Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Time to Pump (minutes)

Tubing = Tubing Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

Annulus = Annulus Capacity (bbl/ft) x MP (ft)

1. Annulus capacity - Kfi.094)z - (2.875)'] + 1029.4 = 0.028 bbl/ft

2. Tubing capacity -X^^)2 + 1029.4 - 0.0050 bbl/ft

3. Casing capacity - ($.094)2 + 1029.4 - 0.0361 bbl/ft4.

4.Total Barrels in Annulus above Packer = 0.028 x 11.290 = 316.6 bbls

5. Total Barrels and Strokes to Reverse circulation through SSD

6. Total barrels to bullhead down the tubing to the top perforation

Note: Formation pressure always calculated based on top of

Kill Fluid Density = Formation Pressure

Kill Fluid Density (ppg)

= Original Fluid Density (ppg) + SIWHP (psi)

Pressure behavior while in Killing Operation

Well Killing Methods

Surge & Swab Pressure

Surge and Swab are function of:-

Swab will be maximum when we trip out intervention

The well must be;

1. Shut in and secured then need to

Document for responsibility of concerned party in emergency

Due to the Well Intervention Operations are carried out by many

Chapter 2 Completion Equipments

- Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)

Side Pocket Mandrels (SPM)

Sliding Side Door/ Sleeves (SSD)

NO-GO Shoulder Functions:-

It is designed to have a smaller

Most common, NO GO Nipple

Nipple with Port / Sleeve